Home

Crimson User Manual

1. Parity None h Port Sharing Share Port no y TGP Port 0 Clear Port Settings Restore Driver Defaults Note that the Baud rate and other port settings do not have to be the same as those for the port which we are sharing unless the unit being programmed is a PAX meter In that case the PAX and the G3 port MUST be set for 9600 8 N 1 In the configuration shown above data to and from the programming software 1s sent at a higher Baud rate than the data to and from the PLC with the G3 doing the appropriate buffering and conversion In this example to make use of the shared port you would connect a spare serial port on your PC to the programming port of the G3 and configure the PLC programming software to talk to this COM port As soon as the PC begins to talk to the PLC communications between the G3 and the PLC will be suspended and the G3 s two ports will be connected in software such that the PC will appear to be talking directly to the PLC If no data is transferred for more than a minute communications between the G3 and the PLC will be resumed CONNECTING VIA ETHERNET Rather than using an additional serial port on your PC and on the HMI it is possible to use a third party utility to create what are known as virtual serial ports on your computer These appear to applications to be physical COM ports but in fact they send and receive data to a remote device over TCP IP By installing o
2. The Value property is used to define the value to be displayed The Show Label property is used to indicate whether a label should be included with the bar graph For vertical graphs the label is included at the bottom for horizontal graphs it is included at the left hand side If a tag is used for the value property the label may be obtained from that tag Otherwise it must be entered on the Format tab of the dialog box The Show Value property is used to indicate whether the value of the data should be displayed within the graph itself If a tag of the appropriate data type is used for the value property the format may be obtained from the tag Otherwise as with the label it must be entered on the Format tab The Show Setpoint property is used to indicate whether tick marks should be added either side of the bar to indicate the setpoint for the controlling value This option is only available if a tag has been entered for the value field The Get Label and Get Format properties are as defined for the various tag text primitives The format is not required if the show value property is set to No The Fill property is used to indicate the pattern to be used for the active portion of the bar If you find that your bar graph does not appear to work make sure you have not left this property set to None PAGE 105 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL PAGE 106 e The Font property is used to indicate the font to be use
3. RS 485 Comms Port Driver Settings On Update Comms TCP Port 1234 Clear Port Settings Add Additional Device over caps NUM REVISION 12 PAGE 227 READING CHARACTERS CRIMSON USER MANUAL The On Update property 1s configured as described above while the Port property should be configured to indicate which TCP port you want the driver to monitor The driver will accept connections on this port and then call the On Update program to handle communications READING CHARACTERS To read data from a raw port a character at a time use the PortRead function as documented in the Function Reference section of this manual As with all raw port functions the port argument for this function 1s calculated by counting down the list of ports in the left hand pane of the Communications window with the programming port being port 1 The example below shows to use PortRead to accept characters int Data 1 00 NN 4 1f Data PortRead 2 100 gt Add code to process data Note that by passing a non zero value for the period argument the need to call the Sleep function is removed If you use a zero value for this argument you must make sure that you suspend the communications task at some point or you will disrupt system operation READING ENTIRE FRAMES To read an entire frame from a raw port use the PortInput function as documented in the Function Reference section of t
4. To include this tag in a custom web page use 0 e The Label Text property is used to specify the label that can be shown next to this tag when including the tag on a display page The label differs from the tag name in that the former can be translated for international applications while the latter remains unchanged and is never shown to the user of the panel e The Template property is used to provide a picture of the string thereby indicating what kind of characters can occur in each position If a template is specified data entry will be limited such that only the correct kind of character can be selected for each character in the string The table below shows the meaning of the various special characters that can be included in a template Character Permitted Characters A Z a Z 0 9 Space Misc A Yes a Yes S Yes os Yes N Yes pn Yes Mm ves Characters not included in the table are copied verbatim to the display For example to allow entry of a US telephone number use a template of 000 000 0000 REVISION 12 PAGE 87 MORE THAN TWO ALARMS CRIMSON USER MANUAL The parentheses the space and the dash will all be included when the field is displayed but only the 10 digits indicated by the 0 characters will be stored in the string Similarly if data entry is enabled for a field using this template the cursor will skip the various non numeric positions when moving left or rig
5. 7 cons THE TAG TEXT PRIMITIVES The tag text primitives are used to display or edit an expression in textual form Primarily they are used to display tags in which case the default format is taken from the Format tab associated with that tag in the Data Tags window If a non tag expression 1s entered or if you want the formatting to differ from the default values for a tag the format data can be overridden as required There 1s one type of tag text for each tag family The Flag Text primitive 1s used to display a true or false condition The Integer Text primitive is used to display an integer expression The Real Text primitive is used to display a floating point expression The Multi Text primitive is used to display a multi state condition The String Text primitive is used to display a string expression The properties of a tag text primitive are displayed using three tabbed pages http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING A COLOR USER INTERFACE PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS The first page 1s more or less the same for all five primitive types REVISION 12 cor Integer Text Properties xj Properties Data Entry Format Data Source Value TankLevel Pick Data Entry r Flash on Alarm Mo Show Label Yes Show Value Wes et From Tag J Field Label Data Format Text Colors Text Format Foreground 9 Fixed verte Pick Background Fixed Mca a Pick
6. Justification Horizontal center gt Vertical middle Set As Defaults e The Value property is used to indicate from where the data for this primitive should be obtained You may select a tag a register in a communications device or an expression that combines a number of such items The data type of the item must be appropriate to the primitive in question eg the Value property for an integer text primitive cannot be set equal to a string expression e The Data Entry property is used to indicate whether or not you want the user of the operator interface panel to be able to change the underlying value via this primitive Selecting Local will enable data entry but prevent access via the virtual panel facility of the web server For data entry to be enabled the expression entered for the value property must be capable of being changed For example if a formula is entered data entry will not be permitted e The Show Label property is used to indicate whether or not you want the primitive to include a label to identify the data being displayed If this property is set to yes the label will be left justified within the primitive s bounding rectangle while the data itself will be right justified If this property is set to no the Horizontal Justification property will be used to locate the data in the field e The Show Data property is used to indicate whether or not the primitive should include the data value or wh
7. PAGE 280 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE FILL ELEMENT DATA COUNT FILL LEMENT DATA COUNT element int float The first array element to be processed data int float The data value to be written count int The number of elements to be processed DESCRIPTION Sets count array elements from element onwards to be equal to data FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE Fill List 0 0 100 REVISION 12 PAGE 281 FIND STRING CHAR SKIP CRIMSON USER MANUAL FIND S7RING CHAR SKIP ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION int The character to be found int The number of times the character is skipped DESCRIPTION Returns the position of char in string taking into account the number of skip occurrences specified The first position counted is 0 Returns 1 if char is not found In the example below the position of skipping the first occurrence is 7 FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Position Find one two three 1 PAGE 282 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE FINDFILEFIRST DIR FINDFILEFIRST D A ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION dir Directory to be used in search DESCRIPTION Returns the filename of name of the first file or directory located in the dir directory on the CompactFlash card Returns an empty string 1f no files exist or 1f no card 1s present This functio
8. REMOTE UPDATE The Remote Update option is used to enable or disable firmware and configuration download via TCP IP As noted in an earlier section remote firmware updates over TCP IP require the units to be fitted with a CompactFlash card Since downloads will more than likely involve a firmware update at some point such a card 1s highly recommended when using this feature PROTOCOL SELECTION Once the Ethernet port has been configured you can select the protocols that you wish to use for communications Up to four protocols may be used at once and many of these protocols will support multiple remote devices This means that you have several options when deciding how to mix protocols and devices to achieve the results you want http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING COMMUNICATIONS SLAVE PROTOCOLS For example suppose you want to connect to two remote slave devices using Modbus over TCP IP Your first option is to use two of the Ethernet port s protocols and configure both as Modbus TCP IP Masters with a single device attached to each protocol dar Untitled File Crimson 2 0 Eile Edit View Link Help Deal 4 nBX F a 6303 Programming Port RS 232 Comms Port I Enable Device RS 485 Comms Port E 4 Ethernet Device Identification EME Protocol 1 Modbus TCP IP Master IP Address 192 9 200 52 Em PLC1 EXA Protocol 2 Modbus TCP IP Master TCP Port 502 E PLC2 W Protocol 3 Unit Number 1
9. Turn On Set the data to 1 when the primitive 1s pressed Turn Off Set the data to 0 when the primitive is pressed e The Style property 1s as defined for general buttons e The Layout property is used to define where the optional label and data values are to be placed relative to the button itself when custom images are used The text fields are always placed within the button for the other button styles e The Show Label property is used to indicate whether or not you want the primitive to include a label to identify the data being displayed and controlled http www redlion net g3 CRIMSON USER MANUAL CONFIGURING A COLOR USER INTERFACE PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS e The Show Data property is used to indicate whether or not the primitive should include the associated data value For buttons configured with a type of toggle or momentary the displayed data value 1s the value of the underlying tag For other buttons the displayed value 1s the value to which the tag will be set e The Get From Tag properties are used to indicate from where the label text the field format and the text colors should be obtained The options presented depend on what was entered for the Value property In each case you may manually enter the data in the appropriate properties or assuming a suitable expression has been defined you may instruct the primitive to get the required information from the underlying data tag The second page defines additional
10. In order to prepare images for the CF Image primitive the makepic utility is used This utility can be found under Crimson 2 0 installation folder and is a command line based utility Makepic can only convert BMP images and it is strongly recommended to resize the image to its final appearance on the panel before the conversion The syntax for makepic is as follow makepic switches lt input file gt lt picture number gt Where lt input file gt is the path and file name of the image you whish to convert and lt picture number gt the number assigned to the converted picture number that will be used by the primitive in the Image Selection property to identify the image The switches field may contain one or more of the following options e nocomp can be used so the Bitmap result is not compressed e wide can be used to use 16 bit colors instead of 256 As an example the following command line makepic C MyImages picture bmp 1 will convert the image picture bmp and create a file pic001 g3p under the makepic installation folder This file can then be copied over to the CompactFlash card under the PICS folder This image will be available for the CF Image primitive when image selection is equal to 1 THE DIAL GAUGE PRIMITIVES swing within a full circle The primitive can optionally display the data value and the associated data label The number of scale divisions can also be defined De The Full Dial Gauge pr
11. Popup Window e QVGA Display 305 x 224 pixels max e VGA Displays The popup cannot be larger than 296 pixels and higher than 224 pixels at the same time One of the dimensions has to stay below the respective value This means the maximum dimensions horizontally are 624 x 224 and vertically 296 x 464 Popup Menu e QVGA Display No limits e VGA Display 296 pixels wide max REVISION 12 PAGE 125 ACTION DESCRIPTIONS THE PUSH BUTTON ACTION CRIMSON USER MANUAL This action 1s used to emulate a pushbutton The options are shown below corRectangle Properties i Ea Formak Action Action Mode Operation As Action Details Button Type Toggle v Button Data o Tag output Pick Action Control Enable 7 General TRUE Edit Remote Enabled Cancel Set s Defaults e The Button Type property is used to define the primitive s behavior Toggle Change the data state when the primitive is pressed Momentary Set the data to 1 when the primitive is pressed Set the data to 0 when the primitive is released Turn On Set the data to 1 when the primitive is pressed Turn Off Set the data to 0 when the primitive is pressed e The Button Data property is used to define the data to be changed In the example above the primitive will toggle the value of the output tag PAGE 126 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING A COLOR USER INTERFACE ACTION DESCRIPTIONS THE
12. Y Protocol 4 Device Settings m Protocol Options Link Type Hise Dedical ICMP Ping Disabled ha Connection Timeout 5000 ms Connection Backaff 200 ms Transaction Timeout 2500 ms Delete This Device Add Gateway Block For most protocols this will produce higher performance as it will allow simultaneous communications with the two devices It will however consume two of the four protocols limiting your ability to connect via additional protocols in complex applications Your second option is therefore to use a single protocol configured as a Modbus TCP IP Master but to add a further device so that both slaves are accessed via the same driver cerUntitled File Crimson 2 0 File Edit Yiew Link Help lox DSH r 3bDEx 4 p m Device Settings Programming Port l RS 232 Comms Port V Enable Device R5 485 Comms Port 4e Ethernet m Device Identification El Protocol 1 Modbus TCP IP Master IP Address 192 9 200 52 m Em PLC2 TCP Port 502 Y Protocol 2 7 Protocol 3 Unit Number 1 W Protocol 4 Protocol Options Link Type use Dedicated Socket y ICMP Ping Disabled Da Connection Timeout 5000 ms Connection Backoff 200 ms Transaction Timeout 2500 ms Delete This Device Add Gateway Block over cars num This will typically produce slightly reduced performanc
13. comment Security Triggers Alarm 2 alarm 1 Colors Format Data Variable Data Sian Mode pinternal Next ACCESS PLC1 Storage PLCZ hd Simulation 0 rScaling and Transforms Transform he El F Round Source Data 52 bit nteger zf Store As o To 10000 a To 10000 Display As Setpoint Enable No he SP Valuer w General Edit Actions On Write None CRIMSON USER MANUAL When you select the device Here PLCI a dialog box prompts you to select the register address to access in that device Since the protocol selected was Allen Bradley DF1 the addresses available here are native Allen Bradley registers Select for example the prefix N for 0001 Varl will thus be the same as N7 1 in the PLC integer and the address 0007 Prefix lt None gt No Selection Bits Counters Select Address for DF1 Master g x Address N 007 000 Details Inputs C F Floating Point I L Long Word Outputs Strings Status Timers 3010 Type Word as Word Default NO07 0000 Minimum NOO9 0000 Maximum N223 9999 Radix Decimal Create another integer variable Available from the Tags tree root and map it to N7 2 You now have two variables Var mapped to N7 1 and Var2 mapped to N7 2 Both variables are in red meaning you can read and write information from the PLC To limit the access to Read O
14. float EXAMPLE Average Mean Data 0 10 PAGE 336 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE MID STRING POS COUNT MID STRING POS COUNT ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION pos nt The position at which to start int The number of characters to return DESCRIPTION Returns count characters from position pos within string where 0 is the first position FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE Exchange Mid Phone 3 3 REVISION 12 PAGE 337 MIN A B CRIMSON USER MANUAL MIN A 5 ET int aloa The first value to be compared ES ined float The second value to be compared DESCRIPTION Returns the smaller of the two arguments FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int or float depending on the type of the arguments EXAMPLE Smaller Min Tank1 Tank2 PAGE 338 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE MULDIV A B C MuLDiv a ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Returns a b c The intermediate math is done with 64 bit integers to avoid overflows FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE d MulDiv a b Cc REVISION 12 PAGE 339 MUTESIREN CRIMSON USER MANUAL MUTESIREN ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Turns off the operator panel s internal siren FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE This function does not return
15. i Current Time Data Entry Disabled Show Label Yes Get Label From Format Page Text Format Font Swiss 7x8 Flash on Alarm No r Foreground Black Background white x Horizontal center he vertical iddle e The Value property is used to indicate the time and date value to be displayed If no value is entered the current time and date is shown If an expression 1s entered it is taken to represent the number of seconds that have elapsed since 1 January 1997 Such values are typically obtained using the various time and date functions described in the Function Reference e The Data Entry property is used to indicate whether or not you want the user of the operator interface panel to be able to change the underlying value via this primitive If no value property has been defined this amounts to changing the current time or date If a value property has been entered the expression entered must be capable of being changed For example if a formula is entered data entry will not be permitted e The balance of the properties are as described for tag text primitives While it may look odd to have Get Label and Flash On Alarm properties remember that the value property may be a tag and so Crimson does have access to the tag label and to the tag s alarm state should you decide to use them REVISION 12 PAGE 103 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL The second tab is shown below c
16. 0 mle e e e Library 1 G310 Crimson 2 0 Edit View Key Page Link Help Sal imax al gt 9 15 ex Water Control HeatiCool i I To i i As you can see at each level fewer keys are shown and more of the window is allocated to the display itself The panel view level can be controlled from the View gt Panel menu or by using the panel icon 7 or by pressing the Alt key together with the digits 1 through 4 ZOOM FUNCTION In addition to the panel views a zoom 1s available to help graphic designs Zooming in and out can be achieved from the View gt Zoom menu or by using the magnifying glass icon 7 or by rolling your mouse wheel up or down The Zoom will center on the mouse cursor so you can control which area of the screen you are zooming to There are four levels of zoom The highest level would give the following screen for the above database REVISION 12 PAGE 115 USING THE PAGE LIST CRIMSON USER MANUAL Due to screen resolution and panel size 1t might not be possible to visualize the entire screen design even when zoomed out It is possible however to get this view using the View gt Panel gt Show All Screen menu This menu is only available when the Panel is NOT in display only mode Edition of the screen however will not be available in this mode since the screen resolution is too small for accurate drawings der G310 Library test G310 Crimson 2 0 ma x File Edit Yiew Insert Arrange Tr
17. ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION int The port number where the camera is connected camera nt The camera device number E Inspection file number in the camera file cstring Path and filename for the inspection file on the operator interface CompactFlash card DESCRIPTION This function loads the inspection file from the operator interface CompactFlash card to the camera memory The number to be placed in the port argument is the port number to which the driver is bound The argument camera is the device number showing in Crimson 2 0 status bar when the camera is selected More than one camera can be connected under a single driver The index represents the inspection file number within the camera where the file will be loaded in The file is the path and filename for the source inspection file on the CompactFlash card This function will return true if the transfer is successful false otherwise Note This function should be called in a user program that runs in the background so the G3 has enough time to access the CompactFlash card FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Success LoadCameraSetup 4 0 1 in0O isp Loads the file named in0 isp in inspection file number 1 in camera device number 0 connected on port 4 Ethernet Protocol 1 REVISION 12 PAGE 329 LOG VALUE CRIMSON USER MANUAL LOG VALUE ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Returns the natural log of value FU
18. Image Count Image Selection General T Edit a Image Visible General TRUE Edit Fick Browse Image 1 Adjust _ Clear Fick a Pick Erase Frowse Image 3 dise adjust _ clear dear Cancel Set s Defaults e The mage Count property is used to indicate how many different images should be displayed by this primitive Up to ten different images can be shown e The mage Selection property is a numeric value used to select between the various images if an Image Count of greater than one has been configured A value of zero will display Image 0 and so on e The mage Visible property is a true or false value used to hide or show the selected image If you want the image to be hidden you must not select No Fill for the Background when defining the background format e The mage properties define each particular image The Pick button next to each image can be used to launch the image library to allow an image to be selected the Browse button can be used to open a file containing a bitmap a JPEG or a Windows metafile the Clear button can be used to remove the image and the Adjust button can be used to edit the image as discussed below PAGE 168 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING A COLOR USER INTERFACE PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS If you use one of the Adjust buttons to manipulate an image you will first be warned about the problems you will encounter 1f you then try to
19. Maximum General 100 Edit Y Axis Minimum General 0 Edit Maximum General 100 Edit Set s Defaults e The X Values property is used to define the array element that contains the first x coordinate to be plotted while the Y Values property 1s used to define the array element that contains associated y coordinate e The Count property 1s used to specify the number of values to be shown REVISION 12 PAGE 133 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL e The X Axis Minimum and X Axis Maximum properties are used to specify the scaling for the horizontal axis while the Y Axis Minimum and Y Axis Maximum properties are used to specify the scaling for the vertical axis The Edit Graph Properties window accessed via the Edit button defines various formatting options cor Edit Graph Properties 1 xj Format Colors Options Graph Style Data Markers Srl Regression Line Hide p e The Graph Style property is used to select between a line graph a line graph with data markers or a set of data markers without a line The various other formatting options on the Color page will be enabled or disabled as required e The Regression Line property is used to show or hide the regression line for the data sets If the line is enabled the software will calculate a best fit line based upon the least squares method and draw it on top of the data sets e The remaining properties are used to de
20. RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE Data TextToFloat 3 142 PAGE 390 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE TEXTTOINT STRING RADIX TEXTTOINT S7RING RADIX ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION int The number base to be used DESCRIPTION Returns the value of string treating it as a number of base radix This function is often used together with Mid to extract values from strings received from raw serial ports It can also be used to convert other string values into integers FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Data TextToInt 1234 10 REVISION 12 PAGE 391 TIME H M S CRIMSON USER MANUAL TIME H M S ne The hour to be encoded from 0 to 23 oe The minute to be encoded from 0 to 59 int The second to be encoded from 0 to 59 DESCRIPTION Returns a value representing the indicated time as the number of seconds elapsed since midnight This value can then be used with other time date functions It can also be added to the value produced by Date to produce a value that references a particular time and date FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE t Date 2000 12 31 Time 12 30 0 PAGE 392 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE USECAMERASETUP PORT CAMERA INDEX USECAMERASETUP POR7 CAMERA INDEX ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION int The port number where the camera is connected camera nt The camera device number
21. REVISION 12 PAGE 223 WRITING ACTIONS CHANGING PAGE WRITING ACTIONS While expressions are used to define values actions are used to define what you want to happen when a trigger or other event occurs Since the vast majority of the actions in a database will relate to key presses and since Crimson provides a simple method of defining commonly used actions via the dialog box discussed in the User Interface section you will often be able to avoid writing actions by hand Actions are needed though if you want to use triggers write programs or use a key in User Defined mode CHANGING PAGE To create an action that changes the page shown on the panel s display use the syntax GotoPage Name where Name is the name of the display page in question The current page will be removed and the new page will be displayed in its place CHANGING NUMERIC VALUES Crimson provides several ways of changing data values SIMPLE ASSIGNMENT To create an action that assigns a new value to a tag or to a register in a communications device use the syntax Data Value where Data is the data item to be changed and Value 1s the value to be assigned Note that Value need not just be a constant value but can be any valid expression of the correct type Refer to the previous section for details of how to write expressions For example code such as N7 0 Tank1 Tank2 can be used to add two tank levels and store the total quantity directly in a PLC
22. SETREALTAG INDEX VALUE PAGE 374 ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION index int Tag index number The value to be assigned DESCRIPTION This function sets the tag specified by index to the specified value The index can be found from the tag label using the function FindTagIndex This function will only work if the target tag is a real floating point FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE SetRealTag 5 12 55 Set the real tag of index 5 with value 12 55 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE SETSTRINGTAG INDEX VALUE SETSTRINGTAG INDEX VALUE ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION index Int Tag index number ToL The value to be assigned DESCRIPTION This function set the tag specified by index to the specified value The index can be found from the tag label using the function FindTagIndex This function will only work if the target tag is a string FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE SetStringTag 5 Hello Set the tag of index 5 with value of Hello REVISION 12 PAGE 375 SGN VALUE CRIMSON USER MANUAL SGN VALUE ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION inte rloa The value to be processed DESCRIPTION Returns 1 if value is less than zero 1 if it is greater than zero or 0 if it is equal to zero FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE
23. Show Image General Preu Edit Show Item w General me O Fill Format Fill Style EE soidcolr xl Fill Color 1 Fixed icy Ff Fick Fill Color 2 Fixed Wa Picke Line Format Line Style solid Color y Line Color Fixed Owie o Pick Cancel Set As Defaults e The mage Selection property is used to select the image to display from the CompactFlash card This setting is an integer number given by the MakePic utility when converting from BMP only to the format required on the CompactFlash card e The Show Image property is a true or false value used to hide or show the image If you want the image to be hidden you must not select No Fill for the background when defining the background format REVISION 12 PAGE 171 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL PAGE 172 e The Show Item property is a true or false value used to hide or show the primitive A value of zero will hide the primitive e The Fill Format properties are used to define the background of the primitive e The Line Format properties are used to specify the format of the optional border around the primitive The second tab of the primitive s properties is used to define optional actions that can be triggered when the operator touches the image You are referred to the earlier section on assigning actions to the primitives for more details of how to configure this functionality CONVERTING IMAGES FOR THE COMPACTFLASH
24. 75 gal 50 gal 400 gal 75 gal 50 gal 400 gal 75 gal 50 gal 400 gal 75 gal 50 gal 400 gal 75 gal 50 gal 400 gal 75 gal 50 gal 400 gal 75 gal 50 gal 400 gal 75 gal 50 gal 400 gal 75 gal 50 gal 400 gal 75 gal 50 gal 400 gal 75 gal 50 gal 400 gal 75 gal 50 gal 400 gal 75 gal 50 gal 400 gal 75 gal 50 gal 400 gal 75 gal 50 gal 400 gal 75 gal 50 gal 400 gal 75 gal 50 gal 400 gal 75 gal 50 gal 400 gal 75 gal 50 gal 400 gal 75 gal 50 gal 400 gal 75 gal 50 gal 400 gal 75 gal 50 gal 400 gal 75 gal M4 49 Unknown Zone WEB SERVER SAMPLES PAGE 207 WEB SERVER SAMPLES CRIMSON USER MANUAL The picture below shows a custom page containing three tags 3 New Page 1 Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Bak gt gt Y A Qsearch Favorites meda lt 4 B GO Address http 192 9 200 163 user default htm G5 red lion www g3panels com Tank 1 50 gal Tank 2 400 gal Tank 3 75 gal YA internet Z Folders fip Reports Navigation 7 o E aF Y E l Hyperlinks 2 E p 8 UN EJZ 18 seconds over 28 8 A For Help press F1 PAGE 208 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING THE WEB SERVER WEB SERVER SAMPLES The picture below shows the remote viewing and or control display for the G303 3 G3 Remote Monitoring Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools
25. Enabling the Sync Manager activates the FTP support The different settings necessary to connect to an FTP server are then available EPUntitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 loj xj File Edit View Link Help OSal47 sna x E z po gt RS 232 Comms Port R5 485 Comms Port I Enable Log File Sync FTP Client ress v Fixed 192 168 200 1 Y Fixed a ername None sts SsSS ssword None ata Connection standard yl 0 secs og File Disabled 7 e The Server IP address indicates the IP address of the FIP server In most applications this address will be a computer server IP address e The Port Number represents the TCP port to which the G3 FTP client service connects This port number is setup in the FTP server The default value is suitable for most applications e The Logon Username and Logon Password are credentials required by the server for a client to connect It has to match a user set up in the Server Both are case sensitive For anonymous login enter anonymous in Username and leave the password blank http www redlion net g3 ADVANCED COMMUNICATIONS CONFIGURING THE SYNCHRONIZATION MANAGER FTP e The Data Connection provides a choice between standard and PASV mode You can enable the PASV mode to have the FTP client initiate all data connections rather than waiting for incoming connections from the server This mode is sometimes required when workin
26. Mone Touch Entry Keypad Type numeric with Raise Lower Keys gt Keypad Style besat e Set As Defaults The Enable property is used to define an expression that must be true in order for data entry to be permitted This property may thus be used to implement a security system or to restrict entry to certain machine states The Validate property is used to define an expression that will be used to validate any entered values e g DATA 25 0 will only allow multiples of 25 to be entered into the variable Amount The special system variable Data will hold the newly entered value but only during the execution of this expression The code should evaluate to non zero to allow entry or zero to block it The On Selected and On Deselected properties are used respectively to define actions to be executed when the user selects the field for entry or when the user deselected the field by selecting another The actions may invoke any of the various functions from the Function Reference or the data modification operators described in the Writing Actions section or may run a program The On Entry Complete and On Entry Error properties are used respectively to define actions to be executed when data entry is completed successfully or when PAGE 140 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING A COLOR USER INTERFACE PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS an invalid value 1s entered The actions may invoke any of the functions from the Function Referenc
27. To avoid this complication forward slashes can be used in place of backslashes without the need for such doubling The function returns a value of one if it succeeds and a value of zero if it fails FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Success DeleteDirectory logs custom REVISION 12 PAGE 269 DELETEFILE FILE CRIMSON USER MANUAL DELETEFILE AILE ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION Dnt File handle as returned by OpenFile DESCRIPTION Closes and then deletes a file located on the CompactFlash card FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Result DeleteFile hFile PAGE 270 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE DEVCTRL DEVICE FUNCTION DATA DEVCTRL DEVICE FUNCTION DATA device int The index of the device to be controlled in The required function to be executed DESCRIPTION This function is used to perform a special operation on a communications device The number to be placed in the device argument to identify the device can be viewed in the status bar of the Communications category when the device name is highlighted The specific action to be performed is indicated by the function parameter the values of which will depend upon the type of device being addresses The data parameter may be used to pass addition information to the driver Most drives do not support this function Where supported the operations are driver sp
28. With a little practice this feature can make it very easy to align primitives as they are created without the need to go back and tweak your display pages to get the various figures into alignment In the example shown below a newly created ellipse is being aligned with two rectangles 2 gt Untitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 0 x File Edit View Insert Arrange Transform Page Link Help Oeel snexl al e 3 o mE lujo Pr Position 328 064 480 160 Size 153 097 Guidelines are present at both the edges of the figures and at the center showing that both the edges and the centers are aligned The red rectangle is highlighting the newly created primitive while the blue rectangles are highlighting the primitives to which the guidelines have been drawn Smart Align 1s also enabled when primitives are moved or re sized http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING A COLOR USER INTERFACE USING THE IMAGE LIBRARY KEYBOARD OPTIONS While creating a display primitive the following keyboard options are available e Holding down the shift key while dragging out the primitive will cause the primitive to be drawn such that 1t is centered on the initial mouse position with one of its corners defined by the current mouse position If this doesn t make sense go ahead and try it it s a lot easier to see than it is to explain This is useful for drawing symmetrical figures centered on an initial point
29. a user can connect to a G3 using an FTP client software and download log files from the CompactFlash card to the PC hard drive On the other hand he could upload new recipe files or updated HTML files for the custom web site from the PC hard drive to the G3 CompactFlash card Numerous FTP clients are available on the market some free others at a charge Windows Explorer is an example of FTP client embedded in the OS The FTP Server configuration 1s available in the Communication module FTP SERVER SETTINGS Check the Enable FTP Server check box to activate the FTP Server support The following settings are then available 10l x titled File G310 Crimson 2 File Edit View Link Help DSB inex m Fs e r Settings Anonymous Access Disabled y Record Log File Disabled id e The Anonymous Access defines the rights for a user accessing the server with anonymous username and password If Disabled no anonymous users can access http www redlion net g3 ADVANCED COMMUNICATIONS CONFIGURING THE FTP SERVER the server In Read Only mode the anonymous user can only download files from the CompactFlash card In Read Write the user will have full access on the CompactFlash card For security reasons Disabled 1s recommended e Enable the Record Log File to keep a log of all FTP interactions in the root directory of the CompactFlash card This file can be useful when debugging FTP operations bu
30. a user who receives an SMS message that has been sent to several recipients can reply to that message and have the operator panel relay the message to the other recipients This provides a simple conferencing facility between message recipients REVISION 12 PAGE 39 WORKING WITH MODEMS CRIMSON USER MANUAL Note that for the SMS transport to operate a GSM modem must have been installed on one of the unit s serial ports Refer to later sections of this chapter for details on how to configure such a modem and on multiple modems will interact THE ADDRESS BOOK The Addresses tab is used to define email recipients cer Untitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 New Contact Delete Edit Contact sms SMTP General 2 Mail R5232 485 Opti 232 Comms Por R5 485 Comms Port Addresses An unlimited number of address book entries can be added edited or deleted using the buttons in the right hand pane Each entry can refer to one or more email recipients from any of the transports enabled by the database Recipients for multiple transports can be included in the same entry The dialog used to define the properties of each recipient is shown below erEdit Contact Details x m Properties LA Display Mame ServiceC E mail Address w Fixed mikegeredion net 17175551234 Cancel e The Display Name property is used to define the human readable name of
31. gramming Port Program Thru E RS 232 Comms Port Mitsubishi FX river Mitsubishi Electric FX Series Port Settings Baud Rate s0 E Data Bits seven y Stop Bits fone y Parity leven y m Port Sharing Share Port v TCP Port 4000 Clear Port Settings Restore Driver Defaults If you leave the port setting at zero a number of 4000 plus the logical index of the port will be used To obtain the logical index of the port count the port s position in the list noting that the programming port is always logical port 1 You may use any number that is not already used by another TCP IP protocol If you are stuck for ideas we recommend numbers between 4000 and 4099 CONNECTING VIA ANOTHER PORT If you want to use another port on the HMI to route data to the shared port you must select the Generic Program Thru driver for that port and configure this driver with the TCP IP port http www redlion net g3 ADVANCED COMMUNICATIONS SHARING SERIAL PORTS number of the serial port that you have shared In the example below we are routing data from the programming port to a PLC that is connected via the RS 232 comms port ep Untitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 10 x File Edit View Link Help Programming Port Program Thru omms Port Mitsubishi FX m Driver Settings Target Port kooo Port Settings Baud Rate 115200 y Data Bits Eight h Stop Bits Jone had
32. http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE DECTOTEXT DATA SIGNED BEFORE AFTER LEADING GROUP DECTOTEXT DATA SIGNED BEFORE AFTER LEADING GROUP data tnt float Numeric data to be formatted Signed before leading int Group DESCRIPTION 0 unsigned 1 soft sign 2 hard sign Formats the value in data as a decimal value according to the rest of the parameters The function is typically used to generate advanced formatting option via programs or to prepare strings to be sent via a raw port driver FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE Text DecToText varl REVISION 12 1 PAGE 267 DEG2RAD THETA CRIMSON USER MANUAL DEG2RAD THETA ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Returns theta converted from degrees to radians FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE Load Weight cos Deg2Rad Angle PAGE 268 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE DELETEDIRECTORY NAME DELETEDIRECTORY W4M ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Remove a directory its subdirectories and contents from the CompactFlash Note that the filing system used on the card does not support long filenames and that if backslashes are included in the pathname to separate path elements they must be doubled up per Crimson s rules for string constants as described in the chapter on Writing Expressions
33. selection to the back of the z order scrolling down moves the selection to the front EDITING PRIMITIVES In addition to the above primitives can be edited in various ways The various clipboard commands on the Edit menu eg Cut Copy and Paste or the corresponding toolbar icons can be used to duplicate items or move them around on a page or between pages The Duplicate command can be used to perform a Copy operation immediately followed by a Paste operation Note that when a Paste is performed Crimson will offset the newly pasted item if it will exactly overlay an item of the same type The various formatting properties eg fill pattern outline color text justification and so on can be changed by selecting a primitive and then either clicking the various buttons in the appropriate toolboxes or by using the associated commands on the Format menu If multiple primitives have been selected Crimson will apply the changes to all selected primitives The more detailed properties of a primitive can be edited by double clicking the primitive or by using the Properties command on the Edit menu A dialog box will be displayed allowing all of the primitives to be accessed The properties associated with each primitive will be described below PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS PAGE 96 The sections below describe each primitive found in the drawing toolbox THE LINE PRIMITIVE a The Line primitive is a line drawn between two points Its
34. the G3 a PLC programming package can be used to download to the programmable controller connected to the operator panel with the software thinking it is talking over a standard COM port An operator panel in a remote location is configured to accept incoming connections from a SCADA system located in a central office The SCADA package can use Modbus TCP IP to access gateway blocks within the panel thereby reading and writing data collected from devices connected to the G3 s serial ports The SCADA package can also make direct contact with devices connected to the panel by means of the G3 s IP routing capability There are obviously many other applications beyond these few examples REVISION 12 PAGE 41 WORKING WITH MODEMS WORKING WITH MODEMS PAGE 42 ADDING A DIAL IN CONNECTION CRIMSON USER MANUAL To add a dial in connection to your database open the Communications window and select the serial port to which the connection will be made Click on the Edit button of Driver field in the right hand pane and select the PPP and Modem Server driver from the System section of the selection dialog Driver Picker for Serial Port i xj Manufacturer PPP and Modem Server Raw Serial Port SMS via GSM Modem Virtual Serial Port Version 1 00 Version 1 00 version 1 00 Version 1 00 Version 1 00 Version 1 00 The right hand pane will now show the modem configuration erUntitled File G310 Crimson 2
35. 1s to be used on several tags THE COLORS TAB The Colors tab of a multi tag contains the following properties dar Untitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 0 x File Edit View Tag Link Help iea imaxe 2 4 e Foreground and Background MER and C write y TEXT i vj and IE sac y Triggers alarm 2 alarm 1 Colors Format Data To include this tag in a custom web page use 0 e The various color pairs are used to specify how the tag should be displayed when 1t 1s each of the states specified on the Format tab As with the Format tab the Navigation slider can be used to up and down the list of color pairs when more than eight states have been defined Not present on G303 and other monochrome devices REVISION 12 PAGE 83 EDITING MULTI TAGS THE ALARM TABS Each Alarm tab of a multi variable or formula contains the following properties CRIMSON USER MANUAL cerUntitled File Crimson 2 0 Event Mode JEGER bi Event Name Motor One Failed Translate Value Y General E Edt Trigger level alarm Delay oo ms Accept manual y Priority HZ Print no y Siren no y o 3 mA p E 5 had E 5 a N 5 lt 1 D a 2 E e The Event Mode property is used to indicate the logic that will be used to decide whether the alarm should activate The table below lists the available modes The value of the tag is equal to th
36. 485 Note This function will only work when called before the device startup The OnLoad field provided in the User Interface on the pages tree root is used for this purpose See example below for more details Note The function CommitAndReset is used to force the device to cycle power in order for the SetPortConfig function to set the new port parameters FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE See next page PAGE 372 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE SETPORTCONFIG PORT PARAM VALUE The following setup shows how to modify the RS232 port from the device display e Create a tag for each parameter value 1 0 Baud DataBits StopBits Parity and PhysicalMode Make sure all tags are set to retentive e Insert the tags on the User Interface for operator access e Create a button set its action to User Defined and enter the CommitAndReset function in the OnPressed field e Create a user program with the following code Programl SetPortConfig SetPortConfig SetPortConfig SetPortConfig SetPortConfig Baud DataBits STOPBLESIS Parity PhysicalMode e Call this program in the OnLoad field in the User Interface The user can now enter the port settings on the display and will commit the changes when pressing the button The device will cycle power to change the port settings REVISION 12 PAGE 373 SETREALTAG INDEX VALUE CRIMSON USER MANUAL
37. As mentioned above the properties for the other types of primitive are similarly identical to those of the corresponding tag You are thus referred to the earlier section of the manual regarding Data Tags for more information on each property EDITING THE UNDERLYING TAG If you want to edit a tag text primitive s properties either double click on the primitive or right click and select the Properties command from the resulting menu If however you want to edit the properties of the tag that is being used to control the primitive right click and select the Tag Details command instead The resulting dialog box will show the Data Format and Colors tabs from the Tags window and allow you to change the various properties Note REVISION 12 PAGE 141 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL that a change made via this mechanism will change all the primitives controlled by that tag 1f those primitives are configured to obtain their configuration from that source THE MULTI LINE TEXT PRIMITIVES The Multi Line Status Text primitive 1s used to display an on off value but split over several lines This allows larger amounts of text to be shown perhaps to provide prompts or help information to the operator The Multi Line Multi Text primitive is used to display one of a series of text values but split over several lines This allows larger amounts of text to be shown perhaps to provide prompts or help information to the operator E
38. C2 s unique remote access and control feature which allows a web browser to view the G3 s display and control 1ts keyboard The web server can also be used to access CSV files from the Data Logger SECURITY MANAGER This 1con 1s used to create and manage the various users of the panel as well as the access rights granted to them Real names may also be given which allows the security logger to record not only what data was changed and when but also by whom the data was changed The rights required to modify a particular tag or to access a page are set via the security properties of the individual item REVISION 12 PAGE 15 SELECTING A TERMINAL CRIMSON USER MANUAL SELECTING A TERMINAL When Crimson first starts 1t will assume that you are continuing to work with the same model of operator panel as was used by the last loaded database If Crimson has not been previously executed 1t will assume you are working with a G303 If you want to select a new model select the New command from the File menu The following dialog will appear be New Database Select Model Monochrome HMI Landscape 3 Color Touch Panel Landscape 6 6308 Color Touch Panel Landscape 8 j Color Touch Panel Landscape 10 The dialog lists the models supported by the current version of the software providing a description of each terminal and the dimensions of its display Selecting a terminal will create a blank database and reconfigure Cri
39. CHANGE INTEGER VALUE ACTION This action 1s used to write an integer value to a data item The options are shown below corRectangle Properties x Formak Action Action Mode Seem change Integer value Action Details write To Tag Motorspeed Fick Data General 100 Edit Action Control Enable 7 General TRUE Edib Remote Enabled Cancel Set s Defaults e The Write To property is used to define the data item to be changed e The Data property is used to define the data to be written In the example above the primitive will set the MotorSpeed tag to 100 THE RAMP INTEGER VALUE ACTION This action is used to increase or decrease a data item The options are shown below op Rectangle Properties xj Formak Action Action Mode Operation A Action Details write To Tag MotorSpeed Fick Data General A E Limit General foo Ramp Mode increase y Action Control Enable Y General Re Edit Remote Enabled y Cancel Set s Defaults e The Write To property is used to define the data item to be changed e The Data property 1s used to define the step by which to raise or lower the item e The Limit property is used to define the minimum or maximum data value e The Ramp Mode property is used to define whether to raise or lower the item REVISION 12 PAGE 127 ACTION DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANU
40. CRIMSON USER MANUAL ETHERNET COMMUNICATION This section is used to troubleshoot the communication between two devices linked via Ethernet TIP For communication troubleshooting it is strongly advised to create a new Crimson database including only one data tag mapped to a known register in the target device PROBLEM 99 Values show Values blink between the data and PAGE 404 Incorrect target device IP address Incorrect cable or wrong connection Ethernet port disabled Crimson and target devices are in a different address domain If no routers are present on the network If a router is present on the network Incorrect tag mapping Incorrect tag mapping on one of the tags on the display Communications times out POSSIBLE CAUSES POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS Check the target device IP address in Crimson in communications on the PLC symbol to match the target device IP address setup Check the LED on the Crimson device Ethernet port If none are lit there are no connections Check the cable or that the Ethernet port is enabled in Crimson see below Check that the Ethernet port in Crimson is enabled Check that the target device IP address and Crimson device IP address are different but in the same domain For example both start with the same three first numbers ex 192 168 2 xxx if the mask is 255 255 255 0 Check the Crimson device Ethernet port gateway
41. Crimson also provides operators to shift an integer n bits to the left or right Each example shifts Data two bits in the specified direction BITWISE NOT Finally Crimson provides a bitwise NOT operator to invert the sense of the bits in a value OPERATOR PRIORITY EXAMPLE This example produces a value where every bit is equal to the opposite of its value in Mask INDEXING ARRAYS Elements within an array tag can be selected by following the array name with square brackets that contain an indexing expression This expression must range from 0 to one less REVISION 12 PAGE 221 INDEXING STRINGS CRIMSON USER MANUAL than the number of elements in the array If you create a 10 element array for example the first element will be Name 0 and the last will be Name 9 INDEXING STRINGS Square brackets can also be used to select characters within a string For example if you have a tag called Text that contains the string ABCD then the expression Text 0 will return a value of 65 this being equal to the ASCII value of the first character Index values beyond the end of the string will always return zero ADDING STRINGS As well as adding numbers the addition operator can be used to concatenate strings Thus the expression AB CD evaluates to ABCD You may also use the addition operator to add an integer to a string in which case a single character equal to the ASCII code represented by the integer is a
42. Edit View Link Help Deal 47s oe x m e Communications xj Option Card Selection Option Card Not Fitted ERE Remove Option Gard Programming Port R5 232 Comms Port R5 485 Comms Port 4 Ethernet W Protocol 1 Y Protocol 2 YS Protocol 3 W Protocol 4 Kg Services E Mail Manager Hi OPC Server E FTP Server ga Time Manager n Sync Manager OVER caps NUM Select the communication port your PLC should be connected to in this example the RS232 Comms Port and click the Edit button in the driver selection area to choose a protocol In this example Allen Bradley DF1 Master has been selected as the protocol cepUntitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 File Edit View Link Help DSH ina x e Communications 63 Driver Selection Programming Port Driver No Driver Selected R5 232 Comms Port R5 485 Comms Port 4 Ethernet 7 Protocol 1 Y Protocol 2 W Protocol 3 W Protocol 4 Port Settings Baud Rate 19200 z 2 1 Driver Picker for Serial Port xj y Services E Mail Manager pElsnufactures Ty OPC Server E FTP Server DF1 Master ga Time Manager n Sync Manager Version 1 02 Version 1 02 Version 1 00 Version 1 00 Cancel Add Additional Device OVER caps NUM By doing so a device called PLC has been created When the comm
43. FTP Server ga Time Manager n Sync Manager r Data Type Word as Long word as Real Enter the desired number of registers in the Block Size property in this example 5 as well as the desired direction using the Direction property In this example G3 to Device In our example below registers 400001 through 400005 have been allocated REVISION 12 PAGE 11 COMMUNICATIONS G3 AS A SLAVE CRIMSON USER MANUAL or Untitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 File Edit View Link Help DSH tnax EE SH es m Block Settings Programming Port l RS 232 Comms Port Modbus RTU Slave Start Address 400001 Edit PLC1 mm ee Block Size 5 Edit X 400001 Direction G3 to Device Edit X 400002 X 400003 X 400004 m Block Control X 400005 Request v General Edit R5 485 Comms Port Fat Ethernet Acknowledge General Edit Y Protocol 1 Y Protocol 2 YS Protocol 3 Export to File S Protocol 4 y Services Delete This Block EJ Mail Manager OPC Server pl FTP Server ga Time Manager n Sync Manager A ZAS To map data tags variables select one of the registers A list of available tags will be shown in the right hand pane cer Untitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 File Edit Vie
44. Help Bak Y fat Qsearch Favorites Emedia 4 B GO Links Se Address http 192 9 200 163 remote default htm Go red lon 7l8fo non Hoe BOG MENU RAISE Downloading picture http 192 9 200 163 remote display bmp 001064603685879 4H Internet REVISION 12 PAGE 209 USING THE SECURITY SYSTEM SECURITY BASICS USING THE SECURITY SYSTEM Crimson contains powerful features to allow you to define which operators have access to which display pages and limit those operators who are able to make changes to sensitive data The software also contains a security logging facility that can be used to record changes to data values indicating when the change occurred and by whom 1t was performed SECURITY BASICS The follow sections details some of the basic concepts used by the security system OBJECT BASED SECURITY Crimson s security system is object based This means that security characteristics are applied to a display page or to a tag and not to the user interface element that accesses the page or makes a change to the tag The alternative subject based approach typically means that you have to be careful to apply security settings to every single user interface element that might change restricted data Crimson s approach avoids this duplication and ensures that once you have decided to protect a tag it will remain protected throughout your database NAMED USERS Crimson supp
45. Help Oeal 47t nex m EE Communications 63 m Block Settings Programming Port RS 232 Comms Port Modbus RTU Slave Start Address None Edit PLCI Block sizer fo E s R5 485 Comms Port PEE 63 to bevie y Direction G3 to Device Edit 4 Ethernet Est Y Protocol 1 Y Protocol 2 Block Control W Protocol 3 Request Y General Edit W Protocol 4 By Services Acknowledge General Edit E Mail Manager OPC Server i FTP Server Export to File ga Time Manager ay Elf Sync Manager Delete This Block OVER GAPS Num Next you 1l need to identify the register locations that you wish to map data to or from starting with a register address Click the Edit button to see the registers supported by Crimson for the selected protocol Select a starting address and click OK cerUntitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 7 0 xj File Edit View Link Help Deal 47t nex m s EE Communications G a Block Settings rogramming Port RS 232 Comms Port Modbus RTU Slave Start Address None PLC1 k Size lies m Block i Block size fo Edi RS 485 Comms Port Select Address for Modbus RTU Slave xi d Ethernet Data Item gt Element Y Protocol 1 W Protocol 2 4 00001 W Protocol 3 ms Y Protocol 4 Digital Cols y Services Digital Inputs E Mail Manager iy OPC Server r
46. LOE Inspection file number in the camera DESCRIPTION This function selects the inspection file to be used by the camera The number to be placed in the port argument is the port number to which the driver is bound The argument camera 1s the device number showing in Crimson 2 0 status bar when the camera is selected More than one camera can be connected under a single driver The index represents the inspection file number within the camera This function will return true if the successful false otherwise Note This function should be called in a user program that runs in the background to let the camera enough time to change the file FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Success UseCameraSetup 4 0 1 Selects inspection file number 1 on camera device number 0 connected on port 4 Ethernet Protocol 1 REVISION 12 PAGE 393 USERLOGOFF CRIMSON USER MANUAL USERLOGOFF ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Causes the current user to be logged off the system Any future actions that require security access rights will result in the display of the log on popup to allow the entry of credentials FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE UserLogoff PAGE 394 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE USERLOGON USERLOGON ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Forces the display of the log on popu
47. Languages set up earlier via the Select Language buttons are displayed Just pick the language and click OK Crimson will switch all the text displayed in pages to the selected translation field Language Simulation x Language O Korean i American 2 Li French 2 MA German 4 _ Generic S _ Generic 6 _ Generic Z _ Generic http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING A COLOR USER INTERFACE DEFINING KEY BEHAVIOR DEFINING KEY BEHAVIOR In addition to defining actions that occur when primitives are touched you may define actions to be executed when keys are pressed To do this first change the zoom level so that the required key can be seen Then double click the key to produce the following dialog box x This Page al Pages Action Mode Operation ama Action Details Target Page Page had Show 45 Normal Page gt Action Control Enable General TRUE Edit Remote Enabled You will note that this dialog box is similar to that shown earlier in respect of primitives but that it has two tabbed pages The first page is used to define what will happen when the key in question is pressed when the current page is selected The second page is used to define what will happen 1f the key is pressed when any page is selected The first type of action is called a local action while the second type is called a global action The color used to display the key will change according to
48. PR oe SE ee a oe an ad 242 PROGRAMMING REFERENCE oescscscscncncncncncnencncnenencseucnencneneueneuencnencueneuenesesenenens 243 EXPRESSION OPERA TORS it cada 243 AC TIONS CPE ATOR Sada daa 244 PROGRAMMING STATEMENTS vacia iaa 245 FUNCTION REFERENCE scacesansccnstactnanacacnanccacacscecaceecentaceaanstaceeanscausecacaveeanstanes 247 NOTES FOR EDICT USERS aii 247 N adams ereeieee 248 ACOS VALUF J ai ao iaa 249 PEAR MIC CEP Tan 250 RONCAL UL oasis 251 ATANC VALUE io 252 ATENAS da 253 BEEP REO PERIOD ace ceeeeaese ovaucaacea wins veraucaace oaks era aces ant Goatees 254 CLEAREVENTS iaa 255 CLOSET E ii 256 COMMITANDRESET bassiciarlici A E 257 COMPACT FEASHEJECT O raino eei a eea ra N 258 COMPACTFIASHSTATUS ista 259 CONTROLDEVICE DEVICE ENABLE sssssssssssnssnsrssnsrrrrernrnnrnrrernrnennrnennrnennrnenernenenne 260 COPY DESTAS RO COUNT direnani 261 COSTI TAY o 262 CREATEDIRECTORY MAME escoba 263 GREATE RILE NAME eraai ann a a O E N 264 DATATOTEX E DATA LIMIT ias 265 DATEI M NA 266 DECTOTEXT DATA SIGNED BEFORE AFTER LEADING GROUP conomconenconencanonennanoninnos 267 DECZRAD TAE TA Vreni n TEES A mer rere 268 DELETEDIRECTORYC MAME atacada 269 REVISION 12 PAGE IX TABLE OF CONTENTS CRIMSON USER MANUAL DELETE cabida 270 DEVCIRE DEVICE FUNCTION DATA 271 DISABLED ICE DEVICE acid suetietiunies cid 272 ISRO Fir tia aa 2 3 DISPO rara 274 DRVCTRL PORT FUNCTION DATA OR VALUE oooccononnnnananenoncnnanononannanononen
49. Selected REVISION 12 PAGE 169 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL The now reduced image can be moved within the whole primitive by defining values to control 1ts horizontal and vertical position These values are defined together with minimum and maximum limits that specify the values corresponding to the extremes of the image s movement within the primitive s bounding rectangle dor Image Properties x Images Additional Movement Format Action Horizontal Position Minimum General E Edit Maximum General 100 Edit Vertical Position Minimum General E Edit Maximum General 100 Edit Set s Defaults In this example setting XPos to 0 will place the image at the left of the primitive while setting it to 100 will place it at the far right Similar behavior in respect of the up and down limits of the primitive can be obtained via the value stored in YPos The fourth tab of the primitive s properties is used to control basic formatting or Image Properties y xi Images Additional Movement Format action Fill Format Fill Style Solid Color be Fill Color 1 Fixed mu Black Pick Fill Color 2 Fixed a white Pick Line Format Line Style nio Line Line Color Fixed a white Pick Set As Defaults PAGE 170 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING A COLOR USER INTERFACE PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS e T
50. THE SIMPLE BAR PRIMITIVES The Simple Vertical Bar primitive allows an expression to be drawn as a vertical bar graph between specified limits Additional properties allow the primitive s fill color and border style be defined The Simple Horizontal Bar primitive allows an expression to be drawn as a horizontal bar graph between specified limits Additional properties allow the primitive s fill color and border style be defined http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING A COLOR USER INTERFACE PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS The properties are accessed by double clicking the primitive cor Simple Vertical Bar Properties i x Fill Style A Defaut Edit Minimum General 0 Edit Maximum Ff General 100 Edit O Solid Color Fill Color 1 Fixed O Gray Pick Fill Color 2 Fixed L Black Pick Line Format Lime Style Sold Color Line Color Fixed O white Pick Set As Defaults e The Value property is used to specify the value to be displayed In the example given above the primitive is configured to display the level of a tank e The Minimum and Maximum properties are used to specify the range of values to be shown In the example above a range of 0 to 100 is specified e The Fill Format properties are used to define the fill color for the primitive The filled area of the bar is drawn in the pattern and colors indicated while the unfilled area is drawn wit
51. TOOLBOX at ica 92 THE FILL FORMAT TOOLBOX mima aaa rana 92 THE EINE FORMAT TOOEBO caia aaa 92 TRE TE FORMAT TODO led e lee Ulloa leds 93 THE FOREGROUND TOOLBO Caidas 93 TAEDBACKEROUND OOO atada 93 ADDING DISPLAY PRIMITIVES c nica 93 SMART ALIGNMEN Derrotado cala ao iones 93 KEYBOARD OPONSE a a a a a a A 94 POCISINSER T MODE sat 94 SELECTING PRIMITIVE S uainne NA E A EANNA AEAN 94 MOVINGAND RESIZING iaria a tae ee te a a alae ce cea teee 95 REORDERING PRIMITIVES cccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccssscscggssesesennususucunuauauaags 95 EDIMANG PRIMITIVES sitet Sickie tite A AOS 96 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS a a o dr cie 96 TRE SINE PRIMITIVA ad 96 THE SIMPLE GEOMETRIC PRIMITIVES ccecececcececccececcacecuaeaceneaeeceaeaseneaeaseneaseseaeaseeeaeeseaeaseeeaeeseaeaseneaeesanes 96 MHE SNUG eT Ty Ny Su dando ees Cro chee re Ravel lote boa ted a acota ora iodo Aleron d ocio aledesp oleada 97 THE SIMPLE BAR GRAPH PRIMITIVES ccececuccececeaceceeeacecuneaceneaeecuaeaseneaeeceaeaseceaeaseeeaeeseaeaseneaeeseaeaseneaeenenes 97 THEFIED PEG RIMDIIN E aaa tidad 98 THEAUTO TAG PRIME NN od 99 TREATED PRIMITIVES ata lid ai EE EEA 100 EDITING Wet IN ty TING TAG men teed esate real aa cancel Merah EE A Mido E Eaa A E 102 THE TIME AND DATE PRIM EMI Beas tir AA AS AS e it dt 103 THE RICH BAR GRAPH PRIMITIVES sai da 104 THE SYSTEM PRIMITIVES A 106 DEFINING PAGE PROPERTIES sassassnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnunnnnnunnnnn
52. The angle in radians to be processed DESCRIPTION Returns the cosine of the angle theta FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE xp radius cos theta PAGE 262 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE CREATEDIRECTORY NAME CREATEDIRECTORY WAME ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Creates a new directory on the CompactFlash card Note that the filing system used on the card does not support long filenames and that if backslashes are included in the pathname to separate path elements they must be doubled up per Crimson s rules for string constants as described in the chapter on Writing Expressions To avoid this complication forward slashes can be used in place of backslashes without the need for such doubling The function returns a value of one if it succeeds and a value of zero 1f it fails FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Result CreateDirectory LOGS LOG1 REVISION 12 PAGE 263 CREATEFILE NAME CRIMSON USER MANUAL CREATEFILE MAME ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Creates an empty file on CompactFlash Note that the filing system used on the card does not support long filenames and that if backslashes are included in the pathname to separate path elements they must be doubled up per Crimson s rules for string constants as described in the chapter on Writing Expressions To avoid this complicatio
53. access the CompactFlash card FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Success SaveCameraSetup 4 0 1 in0O isp Saves the inspection file number 1 from camera device number 0 connected on port 4 Ethernet Protocol 1 under the name in0 1sp REVISION 12 PAGE 363 SCALE DATA R1 R2 El E2 CRIMSON USER MANUAL SCALE DATA R1 R2 E1 E2 ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION data ne The value to be scaled capil int The minimum raw value stored in data el nt The engineering value corresponding to r1 e2 EAL The engineering value corresponding to r2 DESCRIPTION int The maximum raw value stored in data This function linearly scales the data argument assuming it to contain values between r1 and r2 and producing a return value between e1 and e2 The internal math is implemented using 64 bit integers thereby avoiding the overflows that might result if you attempted to scale very large values using Crimson s own math operators FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Data Scale D100 0 4095 O 99999 PAGE 364 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE SENDFILE RCPT FILE SENDFILE RCP7 FILE int The recipient s index in the database s address book The path and file name to be sent DESCRIPTION Sends an email from the operator interface with the file specified attached The function returns immediately having first
54. action to be performed when the primitive is pressed and then held down The action occurs both on the initial depression and on subsequent auto repeats so there 1s no need to define both this property and On Pressed This action may invoke any of the functions from the Function Reference or the data modification operators described in the Writing Actions section or it may run a program e The On Released property is used to define the action to be performed when the primitive is released This action may invoke any of the functions from the Function Reference or the data modification operators described in the Writing Actions section or it may run a program In the example above a user defined action 1s used to implement a momentary pushbutton USING DEFAULT SETTINGS The dialog box used to edit the properties of each type of primitive has a button in 1ts bottom right hand corner labeled Set As Defaults This button can be used to save the current settings of certain properties of the primitive as the default settings to be used when creating a new primitive The same function can be performed by selecting the Save As Defaults command from the Edit menu or by pressing the Ctr1 E key combination Note that not all properties are included in the default settings only those that refer to formatting as opposed to the underlying data presented by the primitive are saved The default settings can be applied to the currently selected primitive or
55. added the required email to the system s mail queue The message will be sent using the appropriate mail transport as configured in the database FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE SendFile 0 LOGS LOG1 260706 csv REVISION 12 PAGE 365 SENDMAIL RCPT SUBJECT BODY CRIMSON USER MANUAL SENDMAIL RCP7 SUBJECT BODY Ene The recipient s index in the database s address book The required subject line for the email The required body text of the email DESCRIPTION Sends an email from the operator interface The function returns immediately having first added the required email to the system s mail queue The message will be sent using the appropriate mail transport as configured in the database Note The first recipient is 0 FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE SendMail 1 Test Subject Line Test Body Text PAGE 366 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE SET TAG VALUE SET TAG VALUE tag The tag to be changed DESCRIPTION This function sets the specified tag to the specified value It differs from the more normally used assignment operator in that it deletes any queued writes to this tag and replaces them with an immediate write of the specified value It is thus used in situations where Crimson s normal write behavior is not r
56. alarms The Event Viewer primitive is used to provide the operator with a method to view the events recorded in the system s event log It will always take up the whole of the display width but can be restricted to less than the full height if required If you use manual accept alarms in your system you should provide a page that contains an alarm viewer to make sure the operator can accept these alarms You may also wish to add the alarm ticker to other pages to make the operator aware of alarms while they are viewing other pages Similarly if you use events you should provide a page that contains an event viewer to allow the operator to see what events have occurred http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING THE G303 USER INTERFACE DEFINING PAGE PROPERTIES DEFINING PAGE PROPERTIES Each page has a number of properties that can be accessed via the Page menu ENT xi Actions On Select Nor On Remove Nor e On Tick None Links Parent Page none SS Next Page None z Previous Page nones rl m Page Timeout Period 0 secs On Timeout N ne Miscellaneous Entry Order Rows Then Columns y Update Rate standard kd Cancel e The On Select and On Remove properties are used to define actions to be performed when the page is first selected for display or when the page is removed from the display Refer to the Writing Actions section and the Function Reference f
57. and related tutorials SELECTING THE HMI When Crimson is started for the first time a new G303 database is created In Crimson and throughout this manual the term database means a complete setup and configuration file for a Red Lion product For this quick start a new database as to be created for a G310 HMI The panel has to be selected before any programming is started Click on File gt New to obtain the New Database dialog box 5 Untitled File G303 Crimson 2 0 10 x File Edit Yiew Link Help Deal4v7 ouax o s e New Database m Product Family Select Model OVER CAPS NUM Select G3 Series HMI in the product family and G310 for the model Click OK to create this new G310 database For most applications only the first three icons are required Communications Data Tags and User Interface COMMUNICATIONS Next you ll want to configure a port to communicate data to your PLC PC etc The ports are configured under the Communications window of the software REVISION 12 PAGE 3 COMMUNICATIONS PAGE 4 CRIMSON USER MANUAL This window displays all the communication ports available on the device In this example as in most applications the G310 will be the communication master thus avoiding extra PLC programming for communication To setup a G3 as a slave please refer to the Communication setup at the end of this chapter or Untitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 File
58. are referring to Further 1f the data in the PLC moves or 1f you decide to switch to an entirely different family of PLC you can simply re map the tags and avoid having to make any other changes to your database e Tags allow you to avoid re entering the same information again and again When you create a tag you specify how the tag 1s to be displayed In the case of an integer tag this means you tell Crimson how many decimal places are to be used and what units 1f any are to be appended to the value When you place a tag on a display page Crimson knows how to format 1t without you having to do anything further Similarly 1f you decide to change the formatting and perhaps switch from one set of units to another you can do this in one place without having to edit each display page in turn e On terminals with color displays tags are used as the basis for color animation The various colors that are defined for a tag can be used to specify the way in which other animation primitives will be displayed Without tags you will have no way of changing the color of anything other than text based data fields e Tags are the key to implementing slave protocols Crimson treats these protocols as mechanisms for exposing data items within the terminal This allows the same data to be accessed via multiple ports so that for example a machine setting could be changed by both a local SCADA package and a similar package working over Ethernet from a
59. by mapping data items into Gateway Blocks This means that the same data item can be exposed via multiple slave protocols without any further configuration e Writes in Crimson are transaction based rather than value based This means that if you write a register to 1 and then to 0 you are guaranteed that two writes will be performed This avoids the need for Pulse Blocks and other horribleness REVISION 12 PAGE 31 NOTES FOR EDICT USERS CRIMSON USER MANUAL e Rather than using the comms update complete event to move values from one device to another or to transform values and write them back to the source device Crimson uses Gateway Blocks as described above e Crimson s communications architecture operates at much higher performance levels than that of Edict 97 It uses multiple tasks and much greater amounts of buffering to ensure that communications updates are kept to a minimum PAGE 32 http www redlion net g3 ADVANCED COMMUNICATIONS USING EXPANSION CARDS ADVANCED COMMUNICATIONS This chapter explains how to use some of the more advanced communications features that are supported by Crimson Simple applications may not require these features and you may thus choose to skip this chapter and return to it later USING EXPANSION CARDS Each G3 panel is capable of hosting an expansion card to provide additional communications facilities Currently available cards offer additional serial ports and CANOpen support More cards wi
60. can be used with strings refer to the Writing Expressions section and the Function Reference at the end of this document e The Simulation property is as described for flag variables THE DATA TAB ARRAYS The Data tab of a string array contains the following properties gar Untitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 File Edit View Tag Link Help Dea DE xa e 2 4 es 3 4 Tags AB StringVar Array Data AB StringForm AB StringArray Mapping iP Elements strings Encoding unpacked l Access JReadandwrte y Storage JNon Retentive gt Length 16 characters Simulation iones t i SOS S m Communications Read Policy Read Adaptively y Read Ahead fo strings Read Behind 1 strings Actions On Write None To include this tag in a custom web page use 2 OVER GAPS NUM e The Length and Encoding properties are as described for string variables e The remainder of the properties are as described for flag arrays PAGE 86 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING DATA TAGS EDITING STRING TAGS THE FORMAT TAB The Format tab of a string tag contains the following properties SPUntitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 101 x File Edit View Tag Link Help DSWU BAXx er F pr m Data Label Label Text SAMLE m Data Format Template 000 000 0000 14 Field Width colors Format Data Justification flere
61. case the Active Alarm color selection below it will be disabled and color selection based on the tag priority will be enabled on the Priority Colors page e The Show End Markers property is used to indicate whether to display a column that contains markers showing the beginning and end of the alarm list If this column is omitted the primitive will take less space but 1t will be harder for the operator to determine the limits of the list http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING A COLOR USER INTERFACE PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS e The Show Alarm Time property is used to indicate whether or not the time at which the alarm occurred should be included in the primitive If the time is displayed the second tab 1s used to define the format to be used e The No Active Alarms Text property is used to override the default text that is displayed when no alarms are present or to enter localized versions of this text on systems that support multiple languages The second tab of the properties 1s used to define the format of the alarm time cor Alarm iewer Properties f x Properties Time Buttons Priority Colors Time Format Field Type Time Format Locale Default Af Suhi Translate PM Sukti Translate Show Seconds Mo j Date Format Locale Default Show Month as Digits Show Years as 2 Digits 7 Set As Defaults The properties are as defined for the time and date primitive REVISION 1
62. date functions described in the Function Reference The Data Entry property is used to indicate whether or not you want the user of the operator interface panel to be able to change the underlying value via this primitive Selecting Local will enable data entry but prevent access via the virtual panel facility of the web server If no value property has been defined this amounts to changing the current time or date If a value property has been entered the expression entered must be capable of being changed For example if a formula is entered data entry will not be permitted The balance of the properties are as described for tag text primitives While it may look odd to have Get From Tag and Flash On Alarm properties remember that the value property may be a tag and so Crimson does have access to the tag label and to the tag s alarm state should you decide to use them PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS The second page contains data entry properties These are as described for text tag primitives The third page is shown below cor Time and Date Properties Properties Data Entry Format x Data Label Label Text Ena Translate Data Format Field Type Time Then Date Time Format 12 Hour Civil AM Suffix Locale Default REVISION 12 PM Suffix Locale Default Translate Show Seconds Yes z Date Format Locale Default Show Month Jas Digits Show Year as 2 Digies Set s Def
63. define how the operator is to use the G3 s keyboard to interact with the system To define the actions to be performed by a key select a zoom level that allows you to see the key in question For example if you want to configure one of the function keys select zoom level one or two as appropriate Then double click the key to display the following der Function Key Fl i E xl This Page al Pages Action Mode Operation no Action No Ac o Action Details Change Integer Value Ramp Integer Value Play Tune Block Default Action Action Control Enable General Edit om You will note that this dialog box has two tabbed pages The first page is used to define what will happen when the key in question 1s pressed when the current page 1s selected The second page is used to define what will happen if the key is pressed when any page is selected The first type of action is called a local action while the second type is called a global action The color used to display the key will change according to which actions are defined F1 If the key is displayed in GREEN a GLOBAL action is defined If the key is displayed in PURPLE a local action is defined for this PAGE http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING THE G303 USER INTERFACE ENABLING ACTIONS If the key is displayed in BLUE local and global actions are BOTH defined Once you have defined an action you can right click on the key and use the
64. download a database containing manipulated images using earlier versions of the Windows operating systems Assuming you are happy to rule out the use of such earlier releases the following dialog box will appear 1 1 l l I l l l l l lm irra Mirror Options Horizontal TF Vertical e Show Center Reset Ge we Cancel 09 a The various sliders can be used to pan zoom and spin the image while the checkboxes can be used to mirror it horizontally or vertically The Show Center checkbox shows or hides the blue lines that mark the center of the image while the Reset button can be used to restore the image to its original state The various manipulation options are typically used to modify an image in order to create various different states for use in animation The second tab of the Picture primitive s properties contains any additional images that could not be displayed on the first page It 1s only required when the Image Count is set to a value greater than four The third tab controls movement of the image within the primitive To enable this facility drag either or both of the shaded rectangular handles in the top left corner of the primitive so as to define a sub region in which the image should reside dar Untitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 File Edit View Insert Arrange Transform Page Link Help Deal tme xla 2 o m e 4 e Pr Position 136 072 496 304 Size 361 233 Image
65. e Holding down the Ctr1 key while dragging out the primitive will keep its horizontal and vertical sizes the same This is useful when you want to be sure that you draw an exact circle or square using the ellipse or rectangle primitives These options are also active when primitives are re sized LOCK INSERT MODE The padlock icon on the drawing toolbox can be used to add a number of primitives of the same basic type without having to click the toolbox icon for each item in turn To cancel lock mode click the padlock icon again or press the Escape key The same operation can be performed by using the Lock Mode command on the Insert menu USING THE IMAGE LIBRARY To add an image from Crimson s extensive image library click on the book icon in the toolbar or select the Picture Image command from the Insert menu The image library will open at the last accessed page allowing an image to be selected Symbol Factory 3 D red button not pressed E5 Edit view Options Help jew 38000099 QOOQLoOGG0 ooa Qe 20200 Q Vibase RO anaes i m ee en Double click on an image to select and then drag out the required size of the image as you would when inserting any other kind of primitive The software will automatically create a Picture primitive containing the selected image You should refer to the later sections of this manual for details on how this primitive might be further manipulated REVISION 12 PAGE 119 S
66. early if another program returns true i 0 i1 lt 10 i Lt LoopAbofti break LoopBody NOTES FOR EDICT USERS Users of Red Lion s Edict 97 software should note e Crimson supports local variables by means of C style declarations within the program body rather than via the local variable table Unlike Edict s local variables Crimson s variables are held on the stack and can thus be used if a program is called recursively This also means that Crimson s local variables do not hold their values between program invocations e Crimson supports passing arguments into functions so there is no need to use global variables to improvise such functionality As with local variables arguments are stored on the stack and can thus be used recursively e Crimson does not support the Dispatch function The decision as to whether to run a program in the foreground or the background is based upon the program s properties and not on the method used for its invocation e Crimson invokes programs using a C style syntax and while the older syntax is still supported does not need the Run function to be used Programs that return values must be invoked using the newer syntax though as the Edict family functions such as RunInteger are not provided e Programs within Crimson run much more quickly than they did within Edict PAGE 192 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING DATA LOGGING BATCH LOGGING CONFIGURI
67. either physical or virtual serial connections to be made to any device connected to the HMI For example you may be using the HMI with a small programmable controller but since the PLC has only a single serial port you may find yourself continually swapping cables when modifying the PLC s ladder program By sharing the operator panel s communications port you can send data directly to the PLC either from another serial port on the HMI or by means of a virtual serial connection made over an Ethernet link ENABLING TCP IP The first configuration step when using port sharing is to enable the panels Ethernet port as described in the previous chapter While you may not choose to use the virtual serial port facility even the local sharing of ports is based upon the TCP IP protocol which will not be available unless Ethernet is enabled To enable Ethernet select the Ethernet icon in the Communications window and select the required configuration mode For installations where Ethernet is not actually being used you can select Manual Configuration and leave the rest of the options at their defaults SHARING THE REQUIRED PORT The next step is to share the required port which is done by selecting Yes in the Share Port property and by optionally entering a suitable TCP IP port number This number represents the virtual port that will be used to expose the serial port for access via TCP IP erUntitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 loj xj
68. for general use For example User Right 1 might be used within your database to control access to production targets only users whom you want to be able to vary such things would then be assigned this right ACCESS CONTROL Objects that are subject to security have an associated access control setting caPEdit Access Control x ccess Mode Allow users with Specific Rights y System Rights Maintenance Access Custom Rights JV User Right 1 User Right 2 M User Right 3 User Right 4 J User Right 5 User Right 6 User Right 7 User Right 8 m Program Access This setting allows you to specify whether the item can be accessed by anyone by any operator whose identity is known or by users with specific user rights The access control setting also allows you to specify whether a tag can be changed by a program running as a result of something other than user action This facility allows you to guarantee that no background changes occur to sensitive data even if a programming error attempts to make such a change WRITE LOGGING Tags also have a write logging property Lo xi Options Cancel This indicates whether changes made to a tag by users or by programs should be logged This facility allows you to create an audit trail of changes to your system thereby simplifying fault finding and providing quality control information as to process configuration No
69. for that element THE RICH BAR PRIMITIVES The Rich Vertical Bar primitive allows you to display a more complex bar graph which includes a label a numeric version of the data being displayed and tick markers to indicate any associated setpoint The Rich Horizontal Bar primitive allows you to display a more complex bar graph which includes a label a numeric version of the data being displayed and tick markers to indicate any associated setpoint The operation of these rich primitives is analogous to that of the various tag text primitives in that they are capable of deriving much of the required formatting information from the tag used as their controlling value Just as with tag text primitives multiple tabbed pages are used to edit the primitives properties The first of these pages is shown below der Rich Yertical Bar Graph Properties xj Properties additional Format Show Label Show Value Yes Flash on Alarm Ma a Value Background Opaque Show Setpoint Mo z Data Source Graph Options Get From Tag Field Label J Data Format e Text Golors Set As Defaults The Value property 1s used to define the value to be displayed http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING A COLOR USER INTERFACE PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS e The Show Label property is used to indicate whether a label should be included with the bar graph For vertical graphs the label is included at the bottom for
70. obvious then why such an action is useful even though at first sight it serves no purpose REVISION 12 PAGE 113 NOTES FOR EDICT USERS CRIMSON USER MANUAL DATA AVAILABILITY Crimson s communications infrastructure reads only those data items that are required for the current page This means that when a page is first selected certain data items may not be available For a display primitive this is no problem as the primitive simply displays an undefined state typically a number of dashes until the data becomes available For actions though things can get more complex For example suppose a local action increases the speed of a motor by 50 rpm If the motor speed is not referenced on the previously displayed page then when the page is first displayed Crimson will not know the current speed and will thus be unable to write the new value To handle this if the operator attempts to perform an action for which the required data is not available the G3 panel will display a NOT READY message until the key in question is released The operator must then wait a short while and try the operation again In practice communications updates normally take place quickly enough that even the most nimble fingered operator will be hard pressed to get the message to appear but since 1t may on occasions be seen it is worth explaining A slightly more complex issue comes about if the action defined by a page s On Select property is unabl
71. only property 1s the style of line to be used In addition to the solid colors shown on the line toolbox a number of dotted styles can also be accessed via the properties dialog box THE SIMPLE GEOMETRIC PRIMITIVES The Rectangle primitive is a rectangle with a defined outline and fill pattern The fill pattern may be set to No Fill to draw the outline alone or the outline may be set to None to draw a figure without a border The Round Rectangle primitive is similar to the rectangle but has rounded corners When the primitive 1s selected an additional handle appears allowing the radius of the corners to be edited by dragging the handle from side to side The Shadow primitive is similar to the rectangle but with a drop shadow located to the bottom right of the figure The primitive 1s often drawn with no fill pattern so as to allow it to act as a frame around text primitives http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING THE G303 USER INTERFACE PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS PROP The Wedge primitive is a right angled triangle located within one quadrant of a bounding rectangle In addition to the outline and fill properties the wedge has a property to indicate which quadrant it should occupy The Ellipse primitive is an ellipse with a defined outline and fill pattern The fill pattern may be set to No Fill to draw the outline alone or the outline may be set to None to draw a figure without a border The Ellipse Quadrant primitive is one q
72. primitives by using the Apply Defaults command from the Edit menu or by pressing the Ctr1 L key combination PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS The sections below describe each primitive found in the drawing toolbox THE LINE PRIMITIVE The Line primitive 1s a line drawn between two points Its only properties are the style of line to be used In addition to the solid colors shown on the line toolbox a number of dotted styles can also be accessed via the properties dialog box THE SIMPLE GEOMETRIC PRIMITIVES The Rectangle primitive is a rectangle with a defined outline and fill pattern The fill pattern may be set to No Fill to draw the outline alone or the outline may be set to None to draw a figure without a border The Round Rectangle primitive is similar to the rectangle but has rounded corners When the primitive 1s selected an additional handle appears allowing the radius of the corners to be edited by dragging the handle from side to side The Shadow primitive is similar to the rectangle but with either a drop shadow or with a shaded 3D effect The primitive is often drawn so as to allow it to act as a frame around text primitives or other groups of elements REVISION 12 PAGE 129 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS PAGE 130 PROP CRIMSON USER MANUAL The Wedge primitive is a right angled triangle located within one quadrant of a bounding rectangle In addition to the outline and fill properties the wedge has a property to indicate
73. register COMPOUND ASSIGNMENT To create an action that sets a data value equal to its current value combined with another value by means of any of the operators defined in the previous section use the syntax Dataop Value where Data is the tag to be changed Value is the value to be used by the operator and op is any of the available operators For example the code Tag 10 will increase Tag by a value of 10 while Tag 10 will multiply the current value by 10 INCREMENT AND DECREMENT To create an action that increases a data value by one use the syntax Data To create an action that decreases a tag by one use the syntax Data Note that the or operators may be placed before or after the data value in question In the former case the value of the expression represented by Data is equal to the value of Data after it has been incremented In the latter case the expression 1s equal to the value before it has changed CHANGING BIT VALUES To change a bit within a tag use the syntax Data Bit 1 or Data Bit 0 to set or clear the bit as required where Data is the tag in question and Bit is the zero based bit number Note again that the value on the right hand side of the operator can be an expression if desired REVISION 12 PAGE 225 RUNNING PROGRAMS CRIMSON USER MANUAL such that an example such as Data 1 Level gt 10 can be used to set or clear a bit depending on whether or not a tank level exceeds a preset value RUN
74. remote site Without tags there would be nothing to expose and this mechanism could not be implemented REVISION 12 PAGE 63 CREATING TAGS CRIMSON USER MANUAL e Tags are used within Crimson to implement many advanced features If you want to use functionality such as alarms triggers data logging or the web server you will have to use tags period The formatting data from the tag definition 1s typically required by all these features so tags are mandatory for their operation In other words tags will automate many tasks during programming saving you time Even 1f you decide not to use tags many of the subsequent chapters of this manual refer to concepts discussed in this chapter You should thus read 1t thoroughly before proceeding CREATING TAGS To create a tag either click on one of the buttons displayed when the Tags icon is selected in the left hand pane of the Data Tags window or use the new tag buttons on the toolbar Either way a new tag will be added to the tag list To edit the tag s name select the tag in the left hand pane and type in the new name Tag names must conform to the following rules e Tag names may not contain spaces or punctuation e Tag names must start with a letter of the alphabet or an underscore e Subsequent characters must be digits letters or underscores e Names must not exceed 24 characters in length EDITING TAGS When a tag is selected in the left hand pane the right hand pane wil
75. resulting menu to select either Make Global or Make Local to change the action type These options will not be available if both types of action have already been defined ENABLING ACTIONS If you want to make a particular action dependent on some condition being true enter an expression for that condition in the Enable field for the action in question This expression may reference a flag tag directly or may use any of the comparison or logical operators defined in the Writing Expressions section If you need more complex logic such that one of several actions is performed based on more complex decision making configure the key in user defined mode and use it to invoke a program that implements the required logic ACTION DESCRIPTIONS The sections below describe each available type of action When each type is selected the Action Details portion of the action dialog box will change to show the available options THE GOTO PAGE ACTION This action is used to instruct the G3 to show a new page The options are shown below car Function Key F1 xj This Page al Pages Action Mode Operation Goto Page Action Details Target Page Show 4s Popup Pagel Pages Previous Page Action Control Enable General TRUE Edit my e The Target Page property is used to indicate which page should be displayed You can either choose a specific one to be displayed or choose Previous Page to return to what was d
76. selected in the left hand pane the right hand pane of the Tags window contains options to control the logging of the messages generated by the alarms and events attached to each tag Event Logging Send to Raw Port No Save to CompactFlash no y New File Every 60 mins Retain Gt Most Files e The Send to Raw Port property is used to indicate which communications port events should be printed to The port in question must have a raw port driver bound to it as described in the Using Raw Ports chapter Note that a serial driver or a TCP IP driver may be used as required by the application e The Save to CompactFlash property is used to enable the writing of events to CSV files on the card fitted to the panel Events are stored using techniques similar to those for data logging The New File Every and Retain at Most properties control how files are allocated Refer to the Configuring Data Logging chapter for information on how the data is written and how files are named NOTES FOR EDICT USERS Users of Red Lion s Edict 97 software should note e Crimson s Data Tags window 1s used to perform all of the various functions that were previously implemented using the Named Data window the Alarm Scanner and the Trigger Table Not present on G303 and other monochrome devices REVISION 12 PAGE 89 NOTES FOR EDICT USERS CRIMSON USER MANUAL e Crimson does not have the concept of constants as a separate tag family Edi
77. stored in different directories on different PCs without the need to browse for each individual image when moving between machines e The Image Directory specifies the root directory to be used when loading images 1f relative paths have been enabled Note that this is a per machine setting not a property of each individual database file You should thus select a directory below which the images for all databases will be stored e The Maintenance buttons can be used to remove unused fonts or images from the database thereby reducing file size and lowering memory usage You should typically use these options before releasing a database for use in the field as they will remove most of the debris that accumulates during development SELECTING LANGUAGES To select the various languages to be supported within your database select the Pages icon within the User Interface window and press the Select Languages button to display the following dialog box REVISION 12 x Languages Language 0 E Korean _ Generic ASCII Language 1 _ Generic Unicode german LE Italian 2 Japanese e HI Mexican Spanish m Russian MA Simplified Chinese Language 2 Language 3 Language 4 Language 5 Language 6 _ Generic ASCII Language Y Generic ASCII PAGE 179 CHANGING THE LANGUAGE CRIMSON USER MANUAL Up to eight different languages can be defined each of which can be chosen from a drop down list Crimson w
78. that no data is lost The PortWrite and PortPrint thus neither provide a return value nor is such a value required e To directly emulate GAF use a program similar to the example shown above but store the received string in a string tag and increment an integer tag Such direct emulation is not recommended as you will nearly always then have a trigger to respond to the change in the sequence number in which case you might as well handle this logic within the communications program e Crimson s enhanced programming support allows much higher performance levels when using raw port drivers Performance typically exceeds that of the equivalent Edict configuration by an order of magnitude or more REVISION 12 PAGE 229 SYSTEM VARIABLE REFERENCE HOW ARE SYSTEM VARIABLES USED SYSTEM VARIABLE REFERENCE The following pages describe the various system variables that exist within Crimson These system variables can be invoked within actions or expressions as described in the previous two chapters HOW ARE SYSTEM VARIABLES USED System variables are used either to reflect the state of the system or to modify the behavior of the system in some way The former type of variable will be read only while the latter type can have a value assigned to it REVISION 12 PAGE 231 ACTIVEALARMS ACTIVEALARMS PAGE 232 DESCRIPTION Returns a count of the currently active alarms VARIABLE TYPE integer ACCESS TYPE Read Only CRI
79. the rainbow window or enter the explicit HSL or RGB parameters The dialog also allows custom colors to be added to the palette These will appear whenever the dialog is invoked and will also appear in the drop down list described above Note that not every color that is displayed in the rainbow will be capable of being rendered on the panel s 256 color display Crimson will choose the nearest color within the abilities of the device EDITING FLAG TAGS You will recall that flag tags represent a true or false value The following sections describe the various tabs that are displayed on the right hand side of the Data Tags window when editing one of the various kinds of flag tags THE DATA TAB VARIABLES The Data tab of a flag variable contains the following properties Triggers alarms colors Format Data To include this tag in a custom web page use 0 e The Mapping property is used to specify if the variable is to be mapped to a register in a remote device or 1f 1t exists only within the terminal If you press the arrow button and select a device name from the resulting menu you will be presented with a dialog box that will allow a PLC register to be selected REVISION 12 PAGE 67 EDITING FLAG TAGS CRIMSON USER MANUAL e The Bit Number property is used when a flag variable is mapped to a PLC register which contains more than a single bit of information The prop
80. the default setting when possible The Background property is used to define the background color of the display page Note that the background cannot be animated as a change in the color would force the whole page to redraw thereby impairing performance The On Select and On Remove properties are used to define actions to be performed when the page is first selected for display or when the page is removed from the display Refer to the Writing Actions section and the Function Reference for a list of supported actions Refer to the Data Availability section in this chapter for details of a timeout than can occur when using these properties The On Tick property is used to define an action that will run every second while this page is displayed Refer to the Writing Actions section and the Function Reference for a list of supported actions If a lack of data availability results in this action being unable to execute it will be skipped and retried one second later The On Update property is use to define an action that will be run each time the page is redrawn Refer to the Writing Actions section and the Function Reference for a list of supported actions If a lack of data availability results in this action being unable to execute it will be skipped and retried on the next http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING A COLOR USER INTERFACE DEFINING SYSTEM ACTIONS update You should note that you can severely reduce system performance by perf
81. the first character in the lowest order bits Selecting high to low packed mode will store one character in each 8 bits of the target register storing the first character in the highest order bits The Length property is used to indicate how many characters of storage should be allocated for this string A value need only be entered 1f you have configured the variable for retentive storage Strings that are kept in the terminal s RAM and not committed to FLASH have no practical limit on their length PAGE 85 EDITING REAL TAGS EDITING STRING TAGS CRIMSON USER MANUAL e The remainder of the properties are as described for flag variables THE DATA TAB FORMULAE The Data tab of a string formula contains the following properties ear Untitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 File Edit Yiew Tag Link Help OSE iBRX ar 443 GF 2 4 Tags AB StringYar AB StringForm AB StringArray Formula Data Tag Value y General Hello World Simulation None f pu lu a Ec 5 pra a f To include this tag in a custom web page use 1 OVER GAPS rua e The Tag Value property is used to specify the value represented by this tag It is typically set to a combination of other tags linked together using math operators or functions In the example above the tag is set equal to the combination of two strings variables separated by a space For more information on the operators and functions that
82. to display or otherwise manipulate This is done by selecting the Data Tags icon from the main screen Note that this chapter is written on the assumption that you are configuring an operator terminal with a color graphics display If you are working with a G303 you will notice that tags do not have the Colors tab and that certain other facilities might not be present Features that are not supported on a G303 are marked with an asterisk ALL ABOUT TAGS Data Tags are named entities that represent data items within the operator terminal Tags may be mapped to registers in remote devices in which case Crimson will automatically read the corresponding register when the tag is referenced or displayed Similarly if you change a mapped tag Crimson will automatically write the new value to the remote device TYPES OF TAGS When you first open the Data Tags window you will see that the right hand pane contains an apparently bewildering number of buttons that can be used to create different kinds of data tags While all these buttons may seem a little intimidating at first the fifteen different kinds of tag can be broken down into three families each containing five members 5PUntitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 o x DSGHA I DAx ear 20314 Pr Create New Variable Flag Integer Multi Real String Create New Formula Flag Integer Multi Real String Create New Array Flag Integer Multi R
83. to multiple devices from the same PC downloading to each via its respective programming package all without plugging or unplugging a single cable This feature is extremely valuable when you have many devices in a complex system PURE VIRTUAL PORTS In some circumstances you may want to use a spare serial port on a G3 to provide access to a remote device that is not otherwise connected to the HMI Or you might want to use such a port to connect to a dedicated programming port on a device even though the G3 1s using another port to perform communications with that device For example if you have a Red Lion Modular Controller connected to a G3 you will typically communicate using Ethernet or via the Modular Controller s RS 232 port If you wish to use port sharing to remotely reconfigure the Modular Controller you may wish to connect the device s programming port to a spare RS 232 port on the G3 so that you may then share this port via TCP IP To do this PAGE 36 http www redlion net g3 ADVANCED COMMUNICATIONS USING ELECTRONIC MAIL configure the port in the usual way selecting the Virtual Serial Port driver for that port Then share the port as described above This Virtual Serial Port driver performs no communications activity of 1ts own but still allows the device to be shared for remote access LIMITATIONS Note that some PLC programming packages may not work with virtually or physically shared ports Issues to watch out for a
84. v v m Log Files over cars num PAGE 53 USING TIME MANAGEMENT CRIMSON USER MANUAL The properties are detailed below e The Enable Time Manager property is used to control access to the other facilities If it is not checked Crimson will operate in local time and will have no knowledge of time zones or other time management information TIME SERVER Crimson 2 0 can act as an SNTP server by selecting yes in the Time Server Enable SNTP drop down selection box This will allow other Red Lion products to synchronize their own clocks to the clock of this unit The IP address of the server when programming the client is the Ethernet port IP address programmed in Crimson 2 0 Note that Crimson s implementation of SNTP is not fully RFC compliant and is not supported as a source of synchronization for non Red Lion clients TIME CLIENT Crimson 2 0 can act as an SNTP client by selecting yes in the Time Client Enable SNTP drop down selection box The operator interface will then attempt to synchronize its clock with another Red Lion product or to another SNTP time source such as a server on the network For example Windows XP Pro is an SNTP server e The Linked DST property is used to instruct the SNTP client to attempt to read the current Daylight Savings Time setting from the SNTP server As this facility is not a standard part of the SNTP protocol it will only operate if another Master or G3 operator pane
85. variety of sources The time manager is also capable of maintaining information about the G3 s current time zone and whether daylight saving time is currently enabled In fact having accurate time zone information available is a vital to proper synchronization as the various synchronization methods are all designed to work with Universal Coordinated Time also known as UTC or Greenwich Mean Time This protocol works over Ethernet The operator interface can then either act as a client requesting the time and or a server providing the time Note that the server implementation does not currently support third party clients CONFIGURING THE TIME MANAGER The various properties associated with configuring the time management facilities are accessed via the Time Manager icon in the Communications window epUntitled File CSMSTRSX Crimson 2 0 lol x File Edit view Link Help Dee 4 7s oax s pr Communications er me Settings Programming Port REVISION 12 RS 232 Comms Port R5 485 Comms Port Jad Ethernet Y Protocol 1 Y Protocol 2 W Protocol 3 Y Protocol 4 By Services E Mail Manager Ty OPC Server A Time Manager JV Enable Time Management m Time Server Enable SNTP m Time Client Enable SNTP Linked DST SNTP Server Enable GPS Enable GSM Frequency Yes No 129 6 No No 480 mins ba v SNTP Mode Manual Configuration hd I 28
86. which quadrant it should occupy The Ellipse primitive is an ellipse with a defined outline and fill pattern The fill pattern may be set to No Fill to draw the outline alone or the outline may be set to None to draw a figure without a border The Ellipse Quadrant primitive is one quadrant of an ellipse In addition to the outline and fill properties the ellipse quadrant has a property to indicate which quadrant it should occupy The Ellipse Half primitive is one half of an ellipse In addition to the outline and fill properties the ellipse half has a property to indicate which of the four possible halves think about it will be drawn The properties for these primitives need little further explanation other than to point out that the quadrant or half rendered by the Wedge Ellipse Quadrant or Ellipse Half primitives can also be edited via the command found on the Transform menu THE TANK PRIMITIVES The Conical Tank primitive is a conical tank with a defined outline and fill pattern When the primitive is selected additional handles appear allowing the exact shape of the tank to be modified by dragging the handles as required The Round Bottomed Tank primitive is a tank with a defined outline and fill pattern When the primitive is selected an additional handle appears allowing the exact shape of the tank to be modified by dragging the handle as required The properties for these primitives need little further explanation
87. www redlion net g3 ADVANCED COMMUNICATIONS USING TIME MANAGEMENT discontinuities when switching in and out of Daylight Savings Time The setting 1s global and will effect all log files within the system SELECTING AN SNTP SERVER When configuring the SNTP client you have several options when selecting a server If you have a Windows or Unix based time server as part of your network infrastructure you should ultimately synchronize to this source to ensure enterprise wide synchronization If you have several G3s on the same network though you will find it better to nominate one of these as the master device for the purpose of setting Daylight Savings Time and then have that G3 alone synchronize to the enterprise time source You can then configure the other devices to synchronize to the master device and enable the Linked DST facility to propagate the Daylight Savings Time setting around your factory If you have no enterprise time source available you may choose to nominate a single G3 as the point where an operator will set the time and then have other G3s synchronize to that source Alternatively if your installation provides TCP IP access to the Internet via either Ethernet or a modem connection you may configure the SNTP client to synchronize to a public time server An example of this would be 192 6 15 28 which is the current IP address of a public time server provided by NIST A list of other servers can be found at http s
88. 0 File Edit View Link Help DSH r ibax 2 loj xj Lo Communications ES BB 63 Programming Port RS 232 Comms Port PPP Server RS 485 Comms Port ad Ethernet Y Protocol 1 Y Protocol 2 7 Protocol 3 Y Protocol 4 2 Mail m Driver Selection Driver PPP and Modem Server Edit Connection Connect Using Generic Landine Modem y Activity Timeout 20 secs Additional Init nos Disabled sMs Support Authentication Logon Username None Logon Password None SA A IP Configuration 2 2 Local Address 192 168 200 1 Remote Address 192 168 200 2 Remote Mask 255 255 255 255 IjIAA A A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 2 Clear Port Settings NOME EAS SA The modem has the following configuration options e The Connect Using property is used to select the physical device to be used to make the connection The devices supported at this time are direct serial connections to computers running the Microsoft Windows operating system generic landline modems which implement the Hayes command set and the Telit GM 862 GSM mode For dial in connections the Telit device must be configured in Circuit Switched Data mode e The Activity Timeout property is used to define how long a period must pass without the G3 sending a packet over the PPP link in order for the connection to be terminated For dial in connections it is assum
89. 16228248 15 ae f 25 96 0016 2006 08 01 16 28 4 S 52 52 T5 29 0015 2006 08 01 16 28 50 55 13 4 65 35 0016 2006 08 01 16 28 51 Ss 13 3 65 35 0017 2006 08 01 16 28 52 13 45 a2 37 A 0018 2006 08 01 16 28 53 E 50 28 ob AC mom ov m A THE REMOTE DISPLAY PRIMITIVE display to an external large display such as the BFD Big Flexible display or EJ The Remote Display Primitive 1s used to send part of the operator interface LFD Large Flexible display This primitive sends the graphical information within its area to the slave large display It is used in combination with the Red Lion Big Flexible Display serial port driver This driver 1s selected in Communication Each pixel on the graphic area represents an LED on the remote display matrix Remote displays being monochrome in the case of a color unit controlling the display any colors will be a lit LED only black will be an off LED http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING A COLOR USER INTERFACE PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS More than one remote display is programmable on a single screen as each can have a single unit address The properties of the remote display are available when double clicking the primitive cor Remote Display Properties X Configuration Fort 1 Address 0 e The Model defines the type of slave display the graphical area will be sent to The big flexible display will cover an area of 128 x 64 pixels on the s
90. 1s stopped and the later stages do not get a chance to process the key The sequence is as follows 1 If a display primitive is selected for user interaction it is given a chance to process the key Active data entry fields will consume the Raise Lower Exit and Enter keys plus whatever other keys are appropriate to the operation being performed For example integer entry fields will also consume the numeric keys 2 Ifa display primitive is selected for user interaction and the Next or Prev keys are pressed Crimson will attempt to find the next or previous display primitive that also desires user interaction If any such field exists the key will be consumed and that primitive will be activated 3 Ifa local action is defined the action is performed and the key consumed 4 Ifa global action is defined the action is performed and the key consumed 5 Ifthe key remains unconsumed the default actions are implemented Next Key Pressed Displays the page s Next Page if one is defined Prev Key Pressed Displays the page s Previous Page if one is defined Exit Key Pressed Displays the page s Parent Page if one is defined Menu Key Pressed Displays the fist page in the page list Mute Key Pressed Silences the G3 s internal alarm sounder As mentioned above configuring a key for any global or local action even one that does nothing such as Block Default Action prevents this sequence from proceeding It should be
91. 2 PAGE 149 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL The third tab of the properties is used to control how the primitive s buttons are labeled cor Alarm Yiewer Properties xj Properties Time Buttons Priority Colors Button Format Alarm Help Enable Help Button On Help Button Labels PREY PREV Translate NEXT NEXT Translate MUTE MUTE Translate ACCEPT ACCEPT Translate HELP HELF Translate Set As Defaults e The Font property is used to select the required font e The Enable Help property activates a Help button to be displayed on the primitive This Help button can be used to provide the operator with information on specific alarms as explained in Using the Help button below e The Button Labels properties are used to override the default label that is shown on each of the four buttons or to enter localized versions of this text on systems that support multiple languages Setting all four of the text items to a single will disable the buttons and blank that area on the display The fourth tab of the properties is used to select the colors of the alarm text when Active Alarm Use Priority Colors is set to YES on the Properties page PAGE 150 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING A COLOR USER INTERFACE PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS cor Alarm Yiewer Properties X Properties Time Buttons Priority Colors Priority Color Selection P
92. 4 CREATING THE SITE sakerna EAE A A S 204 EMBEDDING DATA a 204 DEPLOYING THE TEO 204 COMPACT FLASH ACCES Saa ao 204 ACCESSING THE WEB SERVER casta or Ae 205 USING ETHERNET coi ca 205 USING MODEMS cr ro aiaa 205 WEB SERVER SAMPLES aniston O T 206 USING THE SECURITY SYSTEM csccsccccnncccneccncccnecceneennneusneunneecneecnseceseeesseessseeesen QL SECURELY BASICS rai n 211 OBJECT BASED SECURITY errio enaa vive a tive vcd sace men AA E 211 NAMED USERS cncsensasduanaceanatanadataauns ndaniauadadadsuataaacanadndsdionabaadnuasuaonanadaneanaatnsanguatedansuc acaamuseacanuanamat 211 USER RICA TS naaa AAEE AONE AONO 211 ACGESS CONTRO cb 212 WRITE LOGGING A A AAA AAA A 212 DEFAULT ACCESS oda E E 212 ON DEMAND EOGON canas 213 MAINTENANCE ACCESS scott ii 213 SECURITY SETTINES da 213 CREATING USER Sarai cia arado coli cid vaoupaebar tala 214 SPECIFYING TAG SEGURINY aria ee 215 SPECIFYING PAGE SECURITY sanar 215 REVISION 12 PAGE VII TABLE OF CONTENTS CRIMSON USER MANUAL THE SECURITY MANAGER PRIMITIVE cosida ici 215 SECURITY RELATED FONCTIONS morsio liada 215 WRITING EXPRESSIONS iciucaranacda ra z LO DATA VALUES Sta 216 CONSTANT Ss 216 TAG VALUES oa 217 COMMUNICATIONS REFERENCES aa 218 SIMPLE MA iaa 218 OPERATOR PRIOR MY sescnstacdaseducntenenheadenenhewiatentesdaesauammeseuteccnntmssansadonennemiesanhes 218 TEYPE CONVERSION iia taaan 218 COMPARING VALUES rai 219 TESTING DEI nia asias 219 MULTIPLE CONDE ION Sinai 220 EACOSINEVAMES ra
93. AGE 165 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL PAGE 166 Both primitives are configured using four tabbed pages the first of which 1s shown below corRich 2 State Selector Properties xj Properties additional Data Entry Format Data Source Value Data Entry Yes Switch Options Show Skates Yes T Get From Tag Data Format W Text Colors Text Format Font Swiss 12x16 Pick Foreground Fixed E white Pick Background Fixed C Gray Pick Cancel Set As Defaults e The Value property is used to indicate from where the data for this primitive should be obtained You may select a tag a register in a communications device or an expression that combines a number of such items The data type of the item must be appropriate to the primitive in question eg the Value property for a multi state selector primitive cannot be set equal to a string expression e The Data Entry property is used to indicate whether or not you want the user of the operator interface panel to be able to change the underlying value via this primitive Selecting Local will enable data entry but prevent access via the virtual panel facility of the web server For data entry to be enabled the expression entered for the value property must be capable of being changed For example if a formula is entered data entry will not be permitted e The Show States property is used to indicate whether or n
94. AGE ACTION This action 1s used to instruct the G3 to show a new page The options are shown below corRectangle Properties x Formak Action Action Mode Operation Gato Page Action Details Target Page Pagez i Show 45 Action Control Enable General TRUE Edib Remote Enabled Set s Defaults e The Target Page property is used to indicate which page should be displayed You can either choose a specific one to be displayed or choose Previous Page to return to what was displayed before the current page was called e The Show As property is used to define how the page should be displayed Aside from displaying it as a normal page it can be shown as a popup page or as a popup menu Both types of popup are shown on top of the existing page and while they are displayed the panel keys and touch screen will assume the functions for the new page Popup menus are displayed aligned to the left of the display so as to match up with the soft keys while popup pages are displayed in the position indicated by the page properties Note that a primitive or key on the new page must be assigned the HidePopup action to remove the popup Note Popups are submitted to maximum size due to graphical memory limitation They are created by wrapping around all the objects on the page called as a popup If the external square around all the objects does not follow the rules below the popup will be truncated
95. AL GETMINTAGREAL INDEX ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION Ene Tag index number DESCRIPTION This function returns the minimum value from the data limits The index can be found from the tag label using the function FindTagIndex This function will only work if the target tag 1s an real floating point FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE Data GetMinTagReal 1 PAGE 304 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE GETMONTHDAYS Y M GETMONTHDAYS y M int The year to be processed in four digit form ne The month to be processed from 1 to 12 DESCRIPTION Returns the number of days in the indicated month accounting for leap years etc FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Days GetMonthDays 2000 3 REVISION 12 PAGE 305 GETNETGATE PORT GETNETGATE PORT ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION PAGE 306 CRIMSON USER MANUAL The index of the Ethernet port Must be zero DESCRIPTION Returns the IP address of the port s default gateway as a dotted decimal text string FUNCTION TYPE The function is passive RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE gate GetNetGate 0 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE GETNETID PORT GETNETID POR7 ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION int The index of the Ethernet port Must be zero DESCRIPTION Reports an Ethernet port s MAC address as 17 character text string FU
96. AL In the example above holding the primitive will raise MotorSpeed by until it reaches 100 THE PLAY TUNE ACTION This action plays a selected tune using the G3 s internal sounder corRectangle Properties x Formak Action Action Mode Operation Play Tune Action Details Tune Marne naGaddaDavida w Mone BadMoonRising BitesThebust ComeOnEileen Dixie InagaddaDawida E IshotTheSheriFf JailhouseRock Action Control i Enable F Remote Enabled Edit Cancel Set s Defaults e Tune Name selects the tune to be played Customized tunes may be played using the PlayRTTTL function THE USER DEFINED ACTION This action 1s used to do anything else you desire The options are shown below corRectangle Properties x Formak Action Action Mode Operation On Pressed Output 1 On 4uto Repeat Mone On Released Output 0 Action Control Enable 9 General TRUE Edit Remote Enabled Cancel Set s Defaults e The On Pressed property is used to define the action to be performed when the primitive 1s pressed This action may invoke any of the functions from the Function Reference or the data modification operators described in the Writing Actions section or 1t may run a program PAGE 128 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING A COLOR USER INTERFACE USING DEFAULT SETTINGS e The On Auto Repeat property is used to define the
97. AMPLE PortClose 6 REVISION 12 PAGE 347 PORTGETCTS PORT CRIMSON USER MANUAL PORTGETCTS POR 7 PAGE 348 ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION int The raw port to get the CTS state from DESCRIPTION Returns the CTS state of the specified port The port must be one of the serial ports configured to use a raw driver Note The communication port number can be identified in Crimson s status bar when the port is selected FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE CtsState PortGetCTS 2 In this example the function returns the CTS state of the RS232 communication port in the variable CtsState http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE PORTINPUT PORT START END TIMEOUT LENGTH PORTINPUT POR7 START END TIMEOUT LENGTH ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION end int timeout int length int DESCRIPTION The raw port to be read The start character to match if any The end character to match if any The inter character timeout in milliseconds if any The maximum number of characters to read if any Reads a string of characters from the port indicated by port using the various other parameters to control the input process If start is non zero the process begins by waiting until the character indicated by this parameter is received If start is zero the receive process begins immediately The process then continues until one of the following conditions has been met e en
98. APPING DATA Once the Communications settings are completed click close to go back to the main menu and enter the Data Tags window Data tags are variables that can be mapped linked to PLC registers and then available anywhere in the database Create an integer variable by clicking the Integer button in the Create New Variable group or Untitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 File Edit View Tag Link Help DSH stax a 2 m g Data Tags lt Tags X vari Create New Variable Flag Es Multi Real String m Create New Formula Flag integer Multi Real String m Create New Array Variable Mappings Logging Main Export to File Import from File m Maintenance Validate All Tags Remap Retentive Tags Show Tag Viewer Manipulate Multiple Tags OVER CAPS Num This creates a new variable called Var That variable can be renamed to a more meaningful name for your application Select the variable to show its settings and make sure you are on the data tab Click on the Internal button next to Mapping A drop down menu shows the devices previously created in communication REVISION 12 PAGE 5 MAPPING DATA PAGE 6 or Untitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 File Edit View Tag Link Help DSa ri DAxja 2 m 2 Data Tags 2 4 Tags X Varl To include this tag in a custom web page use 0 OVER G amp PS NUM
99. Ax os lms e Target device memory usage is 2K OVER caps num The Security properties are used to restrict web server access to hosts whose IP address matches the mask and data indicated All access may be restricted or the filter may be used to restrict only attempts to use the remote control facility The filter works in the following way Permitted IP Data 192 168 100 1 Permitted IP Mask 255 255 255 0 Range of IP authorized Permitted IP Data amp Permitted IP Mask Range of IP authorized 192 168 100 X This means any PC with IP addresses starting with 192 168 100 are allowed to access the restriction selected It is your responsibility to use an external firewall to prevent unauthorized access if the remote control facility is enabled as the IP filter may be defeated by certain advanced hacking techniques and is not warranted by Red Lion Controls http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING THE WEB SERVER ADDING WEB PAGES e The Authentication properties are used to restrict access to any user connecting onto the web server when Authenticated Users 1s selected Upon connection the user will be required to enter the Username and Password defined under Logon Username Max 31 characters and Logon Password Max 15 characters Both are case sensitive It is your responsibility to use an external firewall to prevent unauthorized access if the remote control facility is enabled as the login c
100. CKING DEFAULT ACTIONS vndvcencueitece tees ten wedu setae ie temas ee ee et ie eu te cee 181 DATA AVATLABI Toei 182 NOTES FOR EDICT USERS rias 182 CONFIGURING PROGRAMS BERBER BBR RRB RBBB RRP RP RRR RRR RRR RRR RRR RRR RRR RRR RR RRR RRR RRR RRR RRR RRR eee eee eee eee eee 183 USING THE PROGRAM LL e is 183 EDITING PROGRAMS e e a e 183 PROGRAM PROPERTIES an INIR 183 ADDING COMMENTS a 185 RETURNING VALUES ds 186 HERE BE DRAGONS perra os taaatade 186 PASSING ARGUMENTA de dl ed ba 186 PROGRAMMING MP ai 187 MUETIPLE ACTION Sud a aa E ia tedden eens 187 PAGE VI http www redlion net g3 TABLE OF CONTENTS IF STATEMENTS AAA AAA 187 SWITCH STATEMENTS india 188 LOCAL ARTABLES jc 2iase ceceatseta inn aaa 189 LOOP ONU Tie 189 NOTES FOR EDICTUSERS tasas abolida 192 CONFIGURING DATA LOGGINGocccococcoonooronoronnoronornnnnrnnnrn rn LOO BATCH LOGIN ad 193 CONTROLLING A BAT Cia 194 CREATING DATA LOS ias 194 USING THE LOG LIST ista icon 194 DATA LOG PROPER MES ira 195 LOG FILE STORAGE ado 196 PAE EOGGING PROCESS ridad iii 197 ACCESSING LOG FILES quinta 197 STING ESSE orina E 198 O 198 OPTIONAL SWITCHES e dee ee de anaes 198 EXAMPLE USAGE cra IA 199 NOTES FOR EDICT WER Siniaciteecteecsecie idoteieereceett meat neraeteeolen eee iole eae 199 CONFIGURING THE WEB SERVER ocssccccnnccnneccneccnneucneccnneeuseccnneunecenneensecenseenseesns QOL WEB SERVER PROPERTIES ura aia 201 ADDING WEB PAGES idad 203 USING A CUSTOM WEB SITE acer a ai area kepe daie 20
101. D IN NO CASE BE CALLED ON A REGULAR BASIS AS FREQUENT WRITING TO THE FLASH MEMORY WILL END UP IN A FAILURE THIS FUNCTION IS TO BE USED IN COMBINATION WITH SetPortConfig AND SetNetConfig SO NEW PARAMETERS ARE SAVED AND SHOULD ONLY BE CALLED ONCE FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE Commi tAndReset REVISION 12 PAGE 257 COMPACTFLASHEJECT CRIMSON USER MANUAL COoMPACTFLASHEJECT ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Ceases all access of the CompactFlash card allowing safe removal of the card FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE CompactFlashE ject PAGE 258 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE COMPACTFLASHSTATUS COMPACTFLASHSTATUS ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Returns the current status of the CompactFlash slot as an integer Empty Either no card is installed or the card has been ejected via a call to the CompactFlashEject function Invalid The card is damaged incorrectly formatted or not formatted at all Remember only FAT16 is supported Checking The G3 is checking the status of the card This state occurs when a card is first inserted into the G3 Locked The operator interface is either writing to the card or the card is mounted and Windows is accessing the card Mounted A valid card is installed but it is not locked by ei
102. DERING PRIMITIVES usada 121 GROUPING PRIMITIVES din 122 EDITING PRIMITIVES siciliana 122 DEFINING COLORS a lis atts a SR Gaede aN wlohe ieee 122 DEFINING FIL PATTERNS a A 123 DEFINING ACTIONS sisi aiii 124 ENABIING ACTIONS aa 124 ACTON DESCRIPHON Sita ion 124 THE GOTO PAGE ACTION ti AAA AAA AAA 125 THE PUSH BOTTON ACTION uriuri OEE E EOE OE OAAS Wa 126 THE CHANGE INTEGER VALDE ACTION 2 ii id 127 HE RAMP INTEGER VALUE ACTION oda 127 TAERA TUNEACTION a iii 128 THE USER DEFINED ACTION aia 128 USING DEFAULT SETTINGS sa 129 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS veuxcoucediunssaretudavanslemcouseneeavaediawengsuueeedorermeniareuereneonmes 129 THE EINE PRIMITIVE tala ux counts a aaa nes aaa an a aaa aa va 129 THE SIMPLE GEOMETRIC PRIMITIVES aaa A ci 129 THE TANK PRIMITIVES csacnnaccusatanctansdaqdtodsduantadebaactunetendaudanssenanadundsanedoncaucdmnadaadunnadaumsanasmanemaadnotanans 130 THE SIMPEE BAR PRIMITIVES rarr a Aia 130 THE BAR GRAPHPRIMUPIVES ee 131 REVISION 12 PAGE V TABLE OF CONTENTS CRIMSON USER MANUAL THE SCATTER GRAPH PRIM NE aaa 132 THE SCALE PRIMITIVES add caa 135 TREFIXED VEXT PRIM VE 10 0d A AAA os 136 THE AUTO TAG PRIMITIVE e a dd 137 THE TAG TEXT PRIMITIVES es 138 EDITING THE UNDERLYING TAG riei taua rividia edevcdaicded CANA KAA cael KANA LAWA VANA CANA KAMA CUMA KAKA CAKA enue eben ia ae ae 141 THE MULTI LINE TEXT PRIMITIVES wecsccscsdacerncuasadencwnsneedcencaaeedsaewadvauaueudnsedueadudednsadadudasadenunnddes
103. E DATA TAB FORMULA ariii inai a A tet 75 THE DATA TABLARRI Saa a odode ae desea aden a a a 76 THE FORMAL TAB sajna late Line hates asin aCe ualiuies dun Caa aa aa aha eha aa e a eo ea 76 EHE COLOR a EEE 78 RAEALARM TABS oeron a a a a E EET 78 THETRIGGERS IAB otiia T T T TE TE E A tale E A A 79 EDING MUCA TAGS aora 80 THE DATA TAB VARTABLES dada 80 THE DATA TAB FORMULAE ataco 81 PAE DATA TAB ARRAYS putita 81 THE FORMAT TAB 0 anio 82 NRE COUORS LAB tia 83 PAE ALARM TABS ritos poe les alli ve biie Pome vies Prue tous olaaa 84 THE TRIGGERS TAB sciscaannnnccnnaaantansanentacsuisnataananeananaacmancnanannaacamunmansaanmaunanmasauannaunnanennanuanbnnoneacanhaias 84 EDITING REAL TAGS corria 85 EDEFING STRING TAGS ati oat Seas astaets chosen ahaa canton teamanaatenmmeimandtentnenet 85 TRE DATA TAB VARTABLES talla 85 TRE DATA TABA FORMULA ao oca 86 TRE DATA PAB ARRAYS sonda nidad 86 THE ROR MAT TABA Ear adas 87 REVISION 12 PAGE III TABLE OF CONTENTS CRIMSON USER MANUAL TECOS tes 88 MORE THAN TWO ALARMS sotisciancadtsc iii ieitndia 88 VALIDATING TAGS e de ed E 89 EXPORTING TAG MAPPINGS annnannannannannannunnnnnannannannannansnnnunnaninnnannanassasnssnsssnonn 89 LOGGING EVENT MESSAGES csi 89 NOTES FOR EDICT USERS aia ines 89 CONFIGURING THE G303 USER INTERFACE AAA AAA a CONTROLLING THE VIE Wisiscaniaa incidir br dads 91 OTHER VIENTO PIO Susana eee RU 91 USING THE PAGE LS e eee 92 DISPLAY EDITOR TOOLBOXES ii 92 TREDRAWINE
104. ELECTING PRIMITIVES CRIMSON USER MANUAL SELECTING PRIMITIVES To select a display primitive simply move your mouse pointer over the primitive in question and perform a left click You will notice that while your pointer 1s hovering over a primitive a bounding rectangle is drawn in blue to help show what will be selected When the actual selection is performed the rectangle will change to red and handles will appear so as to allow you to re size the primitive as required If you find that the primitive you want to select is hidden below another primitive press the Alt key to allow the selection to be made To select several primitives either drag out a selection rectangle around the primitives you want to select or select each primitive in turn holding down the Shift key to indicate that you want each primitive to be added to the selection If multiple primitives are selected the red rectangle will surround all of the primitives and the handles can then be used to resize the primitives as a group The relative size and position of the primitives will be maintained as long as Crimson can do so without violating minimum size requirements MOVING AND RESIZING PAGE 120 Primitives can be moved by first selecting them and then by dragging them to the required position on the display page If Smart Align is turned on guidelines will appear to help you align the primitives with other items on the page Holding down ctr1 while moving a primi
105. ESCRIPTIONS PAGE 164 The first of these tabs 1s shown below der Rich Button Properties x Properties Additional Images Data Entry Format Data Source Value Ta Data Entry 5 Type Toggle hal Button Options Style 3D Rectangle v Layout Text at Top and Bottom Show Label ves T Show Value Yes k ek From Tag v Field Label Data Format Text Colors Set s Defaults e The Value property is used to indicate from where the data for this primitive should be obtained You may select a tag a register in a communications device or an expression that combines a number of such items The data type of the item must be an integer or a flag e The Data Entry property is used to indicate whether or not you want the user of the operator interface panel to be able to change the underlying value via this primitive Selecting Local will enable data entry but prevent access via the virtual panel facility of the web server For data entry to be enabled the expression entered for the value property must be capable of being changed For example if a formula is entered data entry will not be permitted Most buttons will have data entry enabled e The Type defines the action to be taken when the button is pressed and released Toggle Change the data state when the primitive is pressed Momentary Set the data to 1 when the primitive 1s pressed Set the data to 0 when the primitive is released
106. FLASH The preferred method of formatting a card is via the Format Flash command on the Link menu Selecting this command will explain that the formatting process will destroy all the data stored on the CompactFlash card and offer you a chance to cancel the operation If you elect to continue the operator panel will be instructed to format the card Note that this process may take several minutes for a large card Slow formats on panels that are performing data logging may therefore result in gaps in the recorded data A less attractive method of formatting a card is via a dedicated CompactFlash drive connected to your PC If you use this method be sure to instruct Windows to format the card using FAT16 For very small or very large cards Windows will most likely choose the wrong format by default Worse still some versions of Windows Explorer will not allow you to override the default format forcing you to use the command line version FORMAT instead SENDING THE TIME AND DATE The Link Send Time command can be used to set the G3 s clock to match that of the PC on which Crimson is executing Obviously make sure your clock is right before you do this USING THE EMULATOR PAGE 20 Crimson 2 0 features an Emulator capable of reproducing some of the devices locally on a PC This feature will only work on PCs with Windows XP or 2000 The only supported devices are the graphical color G3 range of operator interfaces The rest of the product li
107. File DESCRIPTION Returns a handle to the file name located on the CompactFlash card This function is restricted to a maximum of four open files at any given time The CompactFlash card cannot be unmounted while a file is open Note that the filing system used on the card does not support long filenames and that if backslashes are included in the pathname to separate path elements they must be doubled up per Crimson s rules for string constants as described in the chapter on Writing Expressions To avoid this complication forward slashes can be used in place of backslashes without the need for such doubling Note also that this function will not create a file that does not exist To do this call CreateFile before calling this function FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE hFile OpenFile LOGS LOG1 01010101 csv 0 REVISION 12 PAGE 343 PIO CRIMSON USER MANUAL P1 DESCRIPTION Returns pi as a floating point number FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE Scale Pi 180 PAGE 344 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE PLAYRTTTL TUNE PLAYRTTTL 7UNE ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION The tune to be played in RTTTL representation DESCRIPTION Plays a tune using the terminal s internal beeper The tune argument should contain the tune to be played in RTTTL format the format used by a number of cell phones for custom ri
108. G3 and enter the TCP IP port number that you allocated when sharing the port The example below 1s configured as required by the previous samples in this document Finally ensure Raw TCP Connection is selected and close the Serial IP dialog _ Serial IP Control Panel 4 1 2 xi Tac 71501 ONES Fa re MN IP Address of Server Port Number fi 92 9 200 52 aood Configuration Wizard Credentials No Login Required Use Windows Credentials Prompt at Login Prompt Now C Use Credentials Below Username Password i lt 4 Connection Protocol C Telnet Telnet with CR Padding Patios Ports Raw TCP Connection Port Monitor m COM Port Options l DTR is modem escape Licensing M DSR always high DCD always high __ Advanced V Restore Failed Connections Help About You will now be able to configure any Windows based software to use the newly created COM port for download When the software opens the connection the G3 will suspend communications on the shared port and then data will be exchanged between the PC software and the remote PLC ust as if they were connected directly When the port is closed or if no data is transferred for a minute communications will be resumed Note that assuming you ve purchased the appropriate number of licenses for Serial IP you will be able to create as many virtual ports as you need This means that you can be connected
109. Horizontal Bar primitive allows an expression to be drawn as a horizontal bar graph between specified minimum and maximum values An additional property allows the primitive s border to be displayed or hidden PAGE 97 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL The properties are accessed by double clicking the primitive cor Simple Yertical Bar Graph Properties TankLevel Pick Minimum General fo Edit Maximum General 1000 Edit Format Show Border vas e The Value property is used to specify the value to be displayed In the example given above the primitive is configured to display the level of a tank e The Minimum and Maximum properties are used to specify the range of values to be shown In the example above a range of 0 to 1000 1s specified e The Show Border property is used to display or hide the primitive s border THE FIXED TEXT PRIMITIVE The Fixed Text primitive is used to add unchanging text to a page The text 1s displayed in a specified font and color and with a specified justification The text can also be translated for international applications When the text 1s created a cursor will appear allowing the text to be entered AN File Edit View Insert Format Arrange Transform Page Link Help Di ul saax S O H alBle 1 Ar s PAGE 98 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING THE G303 USER INTERFACE PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS Only the U
110. ION int The device to be enabled DESCRIPTION Enables communications for the specified device The number to be placed in the device argument to identify the device can be viewed in the status bar of the Communications category when the device name is highlighted FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE EnableDevice 1 REVISION 12 PAGE 277 ENDBATCH CRIMSON USER MANUAL ENDBATCH ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Stops the current batch Note Starting a new batch within less than 10 seconds of ending or starting the last one will produce undefined behavior To go straight from one batch to another call NewBatch without an intervening call to EndBatch FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE Result EndBatch PAGE 278 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE EXP VALUE EXP VALUE ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Returns e 2 7183 raised to the power of value FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE Variable2 exp 1 609 REVISION 12 PAGE 279 EXP10 VALUE CRIMSON USER MANUAL EXP10 VALUE ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Returns 10 raised to the power of value FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE Variable4 exp10 0 699
111. ION 12 PAGE 361 RIGHT STRING COUNT CRIMSON USER MANUAL RIGHT S7RING COUNT ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION int The number of characters to return DESCRIPTION Returns the last count characters from string FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE Local Right Phone 7 PAGE 362 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE SAVECAMERASETUP PORT CAMERA INDEX FILE SAVECAMERASETUP PORT CAMERA INDEX FILE ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION int The port number where the camera is connected camera nt The camera device number E Inspection file number in the camera file cstring Path and filename for the inspection file on the operator interface CompactFlash card DESCRIPTION This function saves the inspection file uploaded from the camera on the operator interface CompactFlash card The number to be placed in the port argument is the port number to which the driver 1s bound The argument camera is the device number showing in Crimson 2 0 status bar when the camera is selected More than one camera can be connected under a single driver The index represents the inspection file number within the camera The file is the path and filename where the inspection file should be saved on CompactFlash card This function will return true if the transfer 1s successful false otherwise Note This function should be called in a user program that runs in the background so the G3 has enough time to
112. Include Image Files no id Store Relative Paths no he Image Directory Gy OWS ry Maintenance Purge Unused Fonts Purge Unused Images PAGE 178 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING A COLOR USER INTERFACE SELECTING LANGUAGES e The Error Recovery properties are used to define the behavior of the system when it encounters a software problem or when the display fails to update for a long period of time as a result of a coding error By default the system will reset and display a so called Guru Meditation Code to help the development engineers in tracking down the problem You may disable the display of this code to allow the system to recover more quickly and without user intervention e The Include Image Files property is used to indicate that Crimson should save within the database file a copy of any disk based images that have been imported into the project By default the filename alone of the image is stored thereby requiring you to have the images available on disk whenever you are working on the project If you wish to create a single file that contains all the required data for the project enable this option Note that databases that contain image files will typically be very large and may prevent upload support from working e The Store Relative paths property indicates whether or not image paths should be stored relative to the Image Directory Enabling this setting allows images to be
113. LPO577 CRIMSON 2 USER MANUAL Copyright O 2003 2006 Red Lion Controls All Rights Reserved Worldwide The information contained herein is provided in good faith but is subject to change without notice It is supplied with no warranty whatsoever and does not represent a commitment on the part of Red Lion Controls Companies names and data used as examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise stated No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical without the express written permission of Red Lion Controls All trademarks are acknowledged as the property of their respective owners Written by Mike Granby and Jesse Benefiel TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS iria E dalla 1 INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE arpas 1 CHECKING FORCUPDATEScuviisscadd nico 1 INSTALEING THE USB DRIVERS cota idad 2 SELECTING TAE AM aida 3 COMMUNICATION Ss add 3 MAPPING DATA a oa 5 USER INTERFACE ostia ia 7 DOWNLOADING casei ccs e a a e a a aaa aa 9 CONNECT THE TWO 0d AAA 9 COMMUNICATIONS G3 ASA SIAVE tias 10 CRIMSON BASICS Soano LR MAIN SCREEN ICONS 14 COMMUNICATION Str AAA AAA AA AAA AAA 14 DATA TAGS A PO e OU Pa 14 USER INTERFACE staba 15 PROGRAMMING co 15 DATA LOC A A A sti 15 WEB SERVER AP 15 SECURITY MANAGER aia 15 SELECGUNG A TERMINA daran acia scada lcid cdi 16 USING BALLOON HELP Sucia ici 16 WORKING WITH DATABASES tada 16 DOWNLOADING TOA TERMINAU 20d a
114. MANUAL THE COLORS TAB The Colors tab of an integer tag contains the following properties daPUntitled File 6310 Crimson 2 0 File Edit View Tag Link Help Oe e 7s bexlaer t F pr 3 4 Tags X MotorSpeed m Text Colors Threshold Foreground and Background Default CO and MM elack gt white gt and eck gt white z and eck gt Y MotorStopped Y Flag rray Y Motori X IntFormula Limit 1 X Intarray Limit 2 Limit 3 Limit 4 Limit S Limit 6 Triggers Alarm 2 alarm 1 Colors Format Data i ABE Limit 7 Limit 8 To include this tag in a custom web page use 0 OVER cars rua e The Default property is used to define the color pair that will be used to display the tag when its value is less than the Limit 1 property e The remaining properties define limits and color pairs that will be used to display the tag when its value is greater than the corresponding limit and less than the next limit If the next limit 1s zero the color pair will be used whenever the tag s value exceeds the specified limit THE ALARM TABS Each Alarm tab of an integer variable or formula contains the following properties lt erUntitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 f J x File Edit View Tag Link Help DSGO r DAx ar 24 194 pr Data Tags 3 4 Tags m Alarm One Event Mode ASMA Event Name MotorSpeed Too High Transl
115. MSON USER MANUAL http www redlion net g3 SYSTEM VARIABLE REFERENCE COMMSERROR COMMSERROR DESCRIPTION Returns a bit mask indicating whether or not each communications device is offline A value of 1 in a given bit position indicates that the corresponding device is experiencing comms errors Bit 0 1e the bit with a value of 1 corresponds to the first communication device VARIABLE TYPE integer ACCESS TYPE Read Only REVISION 12 PAGE 233 DISPBRIGHTNESS CRIMSON USER MANUAL DISPBRIGHTNESS DESCRIPTION Returns a number indicating the brightness of the display from 0 to 100 with zero being off VARIABLE TYPE integer ACCESS TYPE Read Write PAGE 234 http www redlion net g3 SYSTEM VARIABLE REFERENCE DISPCONTRAST DISPCONTRAST DESCRIPTION Returns a number indicating the amount of display contrast from 0 to 100 VARIABLE TYPE integer ACCESS TYPE Read Write REVISION 12 PAGE 235 DISPCOUNT CRIMSON USER MANUAL DISPCOUNT DESCRIPTION Returns a number indicating the number of display updates since last reset VARIABLE TYPE integer ACCESS TYPE Read Only PAGE 236 http www redlion net g3 SYSTEM VARIABLE REFERENCE DISPUPDATES DISPUPDATES DESCRIPTION Returns a number indicating how fast the display updates VARIABLE TYPE integer ACCESS TYPE Read Only REVISION 12 PAGE 237 ISSIRENON ISSIRENON PAGE 238 DESCRIPTION Returns true i
116. N 12 PAGE 187 PROGRAMMING TIPS CRIMSON USER MANUAL The example below shows an if statement with two actions if TankEmpty StartPump OpenValue if MotorHot StartFan else StartFan Note that it is very important to remember to place the curly brackets around groups of actions to be executed in the if or else portion of the statement If you omit the brackets Crimson will most likely misunderstand exactly which actions you want to be dependent upon the if condition Although line breaks are recommend between actions they are not used to figure out what is and is not included within the conditional statement SWITCH STATEMENTS A switch statement is used to compare an integer value against a number of possible constants and to perform an action based upon which value is matched The exact syntax supports a number of options beyond those shown in the example below but for the vast majority of applications this simple form will be acceptable The architecture of the switch statement is as follow Switch int var case 1 actionl break case 2 action2 default action3 break PAGE 188 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING PROGRAMS PROGRAMMING TIPS This example below will start a motor selected by the value in the MotorIndex tag Switch MotorIindex case 1 MotorA break case 2 case 3 MotorB break case 4 Motorc break default MotorD break A valu
117. NCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE MAC GetNetId 0 REVISION 12 PAGE 307 GETNETIP PORT CRIMSON USER MANUAL GETNETIP POR7 ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION re The index of the Ethernet port Must be zero DESCRIPTION Reports an Ethernet port s IP address as a dotted decimal text string FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE IP GetNetIp 0 PAGE 308 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE GETNETMASK PORT GETNETMASK POR7 ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION int The index of the Ethernet port Must be zero DESCRIPTION Reports an Ethernet port s IP address mask as a dotted decimal text string FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE mask GetNetMask 0 REVISION 12 PAGE 309 GETNOW CRIMSON USER MANUAL GETNOW ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Returns the current time and date as the number of seconds elapsed since the datum point of 1 January 1997 This value can then be used with other time date functions FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE t GetNow PAGE 310 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE GETNOWDATE GETNOWDATE ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Returns the number of seconds in the days that have passed since 1 of January 1997 FUNCTION TYPE This function is pa
118. NCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE Variablel log 5 0 PAGE 330 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE LOG10 VALUE LOG10 VALUE ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Returns the base 10 log of value FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE Variable3 10g10 5 0 REVISION 12 PAGE 331 LOGSAVE CRIMSON USER MANUAL LOGSAVE ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Forces the data logger to save on the CompactFlash Card Note This function should NOT be called permanently or regularly It is intended only for punctual use An overuse of this function may result in CompactFlash card damage and loss of data FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE LogSave PAGE 332 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE MAKEFLOAT VALUE MAKEFLOAT VALUE ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION int The value to be converted DESCRIPTION Reinterprets the integer argument as a floating point value This function does not perform a type conversion but instead takes the bit pattern stored in the argument and assumes that rather than representing an integer it actually represents a floating point value It can be used to manipulate data from a remote device that might actually have a different data type from that expected by the communications driver FUNCTI
119. NG DATA LOGGING Now that you have configured the core of your application you may decide to make use of Crimson s data logger to record certain tag values to CompactFlash Data recorded in this way 1s stored in industry standard comma separated variable CSV files and can easily be imported into applications such as Excel using a variety of methods To configure data logging select the Data Logger icon from the main screen The right hand pane presents options for Data logging e Batch logging is explained below e The Trend Viewer Support property is used to activate the trend history buffer for the trend viewer primitive If the historical data facility is not used this setting should be disabled so the minimum history buffer memory allocation 1s freed thus reducing memory usage BATCH LOGGING Batch Logging is a utility to create production oriented logging For normal data logging operation the data logger will save the log files under a folder named as the log On the other hand batch logging operation follows a start and end event meaning the data will be recorded only between the start and end event In this case log files included in batch logging are not only saved under the log folder but also the batch folder The batch folder will take an operator given name upon the start event Logs are included with the Include In Batch option present in different places in Crimson such as each data log Data Tag
120. NING PROGRAMS Programs may be invoked within actions by following the program name with a pair of parentheses For example Program1 will invoke the associated program The program will execute in the foreground or background as defined by the program s properties USING FUNCTIONS Crimson provides a number of predefined functions that can be used to perform various operations These functions are defined in detail in the Function Reference They are invoked using a syntax similar to that for programs with any arguments to the function being enclosed within the parentheses For example SetLanguage 1 will set the terminal language to 1 OPERATOR PRIORITY All assignment operators fall into Group 14 In other words they will be evaluated after all other operators in an action They are also unique in that they group right to left This means that code such as Tag1 Tag2 Tag3 0 can be used to clear all three tags at once NOTES FOR EDICT USERS Users of Red Lion s Edict 97 software should note e The operator can now be used instead of the operator PAGE 226 http www redlion net g3 USING RAW PORTS CONFIGURING A SERIAL PORT USING RAW PORTS In order to allow customers to implement simple ASCII protocols without having to ask Red Lion to develop custom drivers Crimson provides a new facility whereby the software s programming language can be used to directly control either serial ports or TCP IP network sockets T
121. NS ooccccooooccoconoonoronnono rro rr OO USING EXPANSION CARDS it id ii n 33 SHARING SERTAL PORTS naar aa 34 ENABUING TCP Pu dale li allioli lll lll lid 34 SHARING THE REQUIRED PORT oia 34 CONNECTING VIA ANOTHER PORT siacucescccecadcdecscedcdedenedatsdacadcdedacedcduccnedadcdatadcdecsdedcduccnedadedatadcdecuacdecseens 34 CONNECTING VIA ETHERNET graean a A AAA 35 PURE VIRTUAL PORTS riran a a a a e nS 36 LIMITA TNON S puro EE EAA ENS 37 USING ELECTRONIC MAT rarioa io aE lidia 37 CONFIGURING SIN PP E O PE O PARE 00 A 37 CONFIGURING SMS astenia e 39 THE ADDRESS BOOK racistas ci AA AAA A Ai 40 WORKING WITH MODEMS 0 ad 40 SOME TYPICAL APPLICATIONS econo adan AA a aa DT A AN AAA N a DE Aa 41 ADDING DIALCIMCONNECTIO Nit ariadna 42 ADDING A DIAL OUT CONNECTION bissiuxct teak omattnchcuehtecbcnabinehewetdndhctehtedhchebinehemabdndbctehendhehabbedhewebendhetabenst 44 ADDING AN SIMS CONNECTION ag teehee o e dolio dl 45 SMS MESSAGE PROCESSING seit s tec aia 46 USING MULTIPLE INTERFACES aca 46 CHECKING THE MODEM STATUS atadas 47 MODEM INITIALIZATION SEQUENCE Siiani Taa ae seen ceccia esac ecatacatace rocio re rare loe A EA 48 TROUBLESHOOTING MODEM COMMUNICATION cccecceeceeceeeeeaeeaeeaeeaeeaeeaesaesaeeaesaeeaesaeeaesaesaesaeeaeeaeeaeeaeegees 49 OPE COMMUNICATION ua dd 50 OPC SERVER SETTINGS vcccccccscesacedencescccecacsaccqactaccdsncesccaacatadcdacedacadanetaccdncdtsacaaecdacedanedaccdacadsacasecancatoas 50 OPC AND SCADA arnes orina aunando w
122. OMMUNICATION surten 404 PROGRAM cresta ico odia ico aiias 405 WEB SERVER and 406 REVISION 12 PAGE XIII CRIMSON 2 USER MANUAL GETTING STARTED SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS GETTING STARTED Welcome to Crimson 2 the latest operator interface configuration package from Red Lion Controls Crimson is designed to provide quick and easy access to the features of the G3 series of operator panels while still allowing the advanced user to take advantage of high end features such as Crimson s unique programming support SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS Crimson 2 is designed to run on PCs with the following specifications e A Pentium class processor as required by the chosen operating system e RAM and free disk space as required by the chosen operating system e An additional SOMB of disk space for software installation e A display of at least 800 by 600 pixels 1024 by 768 for G308 and G310 with 256 or more colors e AnRS 232 or USB port for downloading to a G3 panel Crimson 2 is designed to operate with all versions of Microsoft Windows from Windows 95 upwards If you want to take advantage of the USB port provided by the G3 operator panels you will need to use as a minimum Windows 98 If you intend to use the USB port to remotely access the G3 s CompactFlash card we recommend that you use Windows 2000 or Windows XP While Windows 98 is capable of accessing the card the later versions of the operating system provide more robust operation and
123. ON TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE fp MakeFloat n REVISION 12 PAGE 333 MAKEINT VALUE CRIMSON USER MANUAL MAKEINT VALUE ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Reinterprets the floating point argument as an integer This function does not perform a type conversion but instead takes the bit pattern stored in the argument and assumes that rather than representing a floating point value it actually represents an integer It can be used to manipulate data from a remote device that might actually have a different data type from that expected by the communications driver FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE n MakeInt fp PAGE 334 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE MAx a B MAx 4 B a meri loat The first value to be compared te pelele The second value to be compared DESCRIPTION Returns the larger of the two arguments FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int or float depending on the type of the arguments EXAMPLE Larger Max Tank1 Tank2 REVISION 12 PAGE 335 MEAN ELEMENT COUNT CRIMSON USER MANUAL MEAN ELEMENT COUNT element int float The first array element to be processed Count int The number of elements to be processed DESCRIPTION Returns the mean of the count array elements from element onwards FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE
124. PLE Text Strip Mississippi s Text now contains Miiippi pp REVISION 12 PAGE 385 SUM ELEMENT COUNT CRIMSON USER MANUAL SUM ELEMENT COUNT element int float The first array element to be processed Count int The number of elements to be processed DESCRIPTION Returns the sum of the count array elements from element onwards FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int or float depending on the type of the value argument EXAMPLE Total Sum Data 0 10 PAGE 386 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE TAN THETA TAN 7HETA ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION The angle in radians to be processed DESCRIPTION Returns the tangent of the angle theta FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE yp xp tan theta REVISION 12 PAGE 387 TESTACCESS RIGHTS PROMPT CRIMSON USER MANUAL TESTACCESS RIGHTS PROMPT ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION Ene The required access rights The prompt to be used in the log on popup DESCRIPTION Returns a value of true or false depending on whether the current user has access rights defined by the rights parameter This parameter comprises a bit mask representing the various user defined rights with bit 0 ie the bit with a value of 0x01 representing User Right 1 bit 1 ie the bit with a value of 0x02 representing User Right 2 and so on If no user is currently logged on the sy
125. Properties xi Properties Data Entry Format Data Source Value w Tag Yar2 Pick Data Entry v Flash on Alarm No v Show Label ves bA Show Yalue Yes Get From Tag V Field Label Y Data Format Y Text Colors gt Text Format Font Swiss 12x16 y Pick Foreground Y Fixed Background Fixed Justification Horizontal Right w Vertical Middle Display State Show Item Y General TRUE Edit Cancel Set As Defaults Your G3 setup is now complete and ready for download The entire configuration is done offline so the database has to be downloaded in the HMI to see the result of your setup DOWNLOADING To download to the G3 via serial is trivial Simply make sure you ve selected the proper COM port under Link Options xi Communications Port goonmensonecccnnna cem CIO Cancel If you plan to use the USB port to download to the HMI you should take the time to read the section titled Installing the USB Drivers The Ethernet port isn t configured from the factory so it can t be used as a means to download an initial database CONNECT THE TwO That s it Connect the device to the G3 HMI and if you ve selected a master protocol the G3 will do the rest If the target registers are changing in the device values will automatically be updated on the display By touching the register set up as a data entry Va
126. R CONTINUOUS DATA LOGGING The files are named after the time and date at which the log is scheduled to begin If each file contains an hour or more of information the files will be named yyMMDDhh csv where YY represents the year of the file mm represents the month DD represents the date and hh represents the hour If each file contains less than one hour of information the files will instead be named MMDDhhmm csv with the initial six characters as described above and the tralling mm representing the minute at which the log began These rules ensure that each log file has a unique name The length of each file depends on the Update Rate and Each File Holds properties For example with an update rate of 5 seconds and a number of samples of 360 each file will hold 5 x 360 60 30 minutes of data therefore following the MMDDhhmm csv filename format A new file will therefore be created every 30 minutes FILENAME FOR TRIGGERED SNAPSHOT DATA LOGGING Since triggered data logging does not follow an update rate you might think a file is created every time the number of samples specified is reached However this is not the case the same rules apply for triggered data logging filenames as for continuous data logging This means the Update Rate still has an influence on file creation As soon as a rising edge is detected by the log trigger a set of data is recorded and a new file is created if none exists Every time the log is triggered a
127. RAMMING STATEMENTS MANIPULATING BIT Dra Bitwise OR Data Mask PROGRAMMING STATEMENTS LOCAL VARIABLES IN PROGRAMS a Declare local integer a float Declare local real p Sstrina Ci Declare local string c IF STATEMENT LE condi EVO pi actioni else action2 SWITCH STATEMENT Switch int var case 1 acti ni gt break case 2 ACEON break default action3 break REVISION 12 PAGE 245 PROGRAMMING STATEMENTS CRIMSON USER MANUAL PAGE 246 WHILE LOOP while condition ACTION FOR LOOP for initialization condition control Dd actionl1 Do Loop actionl k while condition LOOP CONTROL Will cause a loop to break if called PRIORITY SUMMARY Group Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 Group 8 Group 9 Group 10 Group 11 Group 12 Group 13 Operators in the lower numbered groups are applied first http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE NOTES FOR EDICT USERS FUNCTION REFERENCE The following pages describe the various standard functions that provided by Crimson These functions can be invoked within programs actions or expressions as described in the previous chapters Functions that are marked as active may not be used in expressions that are not allowed to change values eg in the controlling expression of a display primitive Functions that are marked as passive may be used i
128. RID To select a page either click on the page in the page list or use the up and down arrows in the toolbar Alternatively you can use the Alt Left and Alt Right key combinations to move up and down the list as required These keys will work no matter which pane 1s selected WORKING WITH THE GRID The Show Grid command on the View menu can be used to show or hide an eight pixel grid that is useful for aligning objects Every eighth column of the grid is shown in a brighter color as is every sixth row Various drawing operations may be configured so as to snap to the grid points whether or not the grid is shown The three separate actions of creating objects moving objects and sizing objects may be controlled individually or the Snap for All or Snap for None commands may be used to control all three actions at once THE DRAWING TOOLBOX To edit the contents of a display page first select the page as described xs uma above Then click on the rectangle that represents the G3 s display A m W ag white rectangle will appear around the display to indicate that it has TOS been selected and the drawing toolbox will appear imVUG This toolbox is used to add various elements known as primitives to i Jo Pr a the display page The first two icons control the insertion mode while Ll w the balance of the icons represent individual primitives The primitives Ho shown in yellow are basic geometric and animation items wh
129. S English text can be edited directly The international versions of the text must be edited via the properties dialog box which 1s accessed by selecting the primitive and pressing Alt Enter or by selecting the Properties command from the Edit menu cor Display Element Properties X Translate Font Swiss 12x16 Foreground Black y Background white Justification Horizontal center vertical Middle e The Text property is used to specify the text to be displayed As mentioned above the US English version of the text can also be edited directly on the display page when the primitive is created or by clicking an existing primitive e The Font property is used to specify the font to be used This property can also be edited by using the font button on the toolbar or by using the Format menu e The Foreground and Background properties are used to specify the colors to be used to draw the text Obviously having the same color for both settings will render the text unreadable Selecting None for the background will create transparent text allowing underlying primitives to be seen through the letters e The Horizontal and Vertical justification properties are used to indicate where the text should be placed within the bounding rectangle of the primitive These properties can also be edited via the associated toolbox or via the Format menu THE AUTO TAG PRIMITIVE The Auto Tag primitive allows you to select a tag
130. Speed Pick Data General 100 Edit Action Control Enable General TRUE Edit coca PAGE 110 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING THE G303 USER INTERFACE ACTION DESCRIPTIONS e The Write To property is used to define the data item to be changed e The Data property is used to define the data to be written In the example above the key will set the MotorSpeed tag to 100 THE RAMP INTEGER VALUE ACTION This action is used to increase or decrease a data item The options are shown below x This Page all Pages Action Mode Operation Ramp Integer Value be Action Details Write To f MotorSpeed Pick Data Sererel E Limit ena fio Ramp Mode increase Y e The Write To property is used to define the data item to be changed e The Data property 1s used to define the step by which to raise or lower the item e The Limit property is used to define the minimum or maximum data value e The Ramp Mode property is used to define whether to raise or lower the item In the example above holding the key will raise MotorSpeed by until it reaches 100 THE PLAY TUNE ACTION This action plays a selected tune using the G3 s internal sounder cerFunction Key Fl E a x This Page al Pages Action Mode Operation Play Tune Action Details BadMoonRising BitesTheDust SohemianRhapsody BrownEyedsirl CaliforniaGirls ComeOnEileen Dixie InaGadd
131. Style Solid Color Line Color gt Fixed O white Pick Set s Defaults e The Fill Format properties are used to define the color and pattern to be used to fill the interior of the button For 3D buttons this color is used to draw the button face while the system uses various shades of grey to draw the border so as to get the 3D effect For buttons based on custom images the fill format defines the background that is to be drawn underneath the images e The Line Format properties are used to define the style and color of the lines that make up the outlines of the Round and Flat Rectangle styles The properties are not used when other styles are selected The third tab is used for buttons of the Custom Image style to define the images to be shown when the button is in the release and pressed states Image selection is described in detail under the picture primitive and you are thus referred to those sections The fourth tab is used to define the action to be performed by the button You are referred to the earlier section of this chapter for more details THE RICH BUTTON PRIMITIVE state of a flag tag While the same functionality can be achieved using a general The Rich Button primitive displays an animated button that is used to control the button the rich version automatically obtains data from the underlying tag The properties of the rich button are defined using five tabs REVISION 12 PAGE 163 PRIMITIVE D
132. T TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Returns the name of the current batch FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE CurrentBatch GetBatch PAGE 292 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE GETCAMERADATA PORT CAMERA PARAM GETCAMERADATA PORT CAMERA PARAM ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION int The port number where the camera is connected camera int The camera number on the port int The camera parameter to be read DESCRIPTION This function returns the value of the parameter number param for a Banner camera connected on the operator interface The argument camera is the device number showing in Crimson 2 0 status bar when the camera is selected More than one camera can be connected under the driver The number to be placed in the port argument is the port number to which the driver is bound Please see Banner documentation for parameter numbers and details FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Value GetCameraData 4 0 1 Returns parameter on camera device number 0 connected on port 4 Ethernet Protocol 1 REVISION 12 PAGE 293 GETDATE TIME AND FAMILY CRIMSON USER MANUAL GETDATE 77ME AND FAMILY ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION time int The time value to be decoded DESCRIPTION Each member of this family of functions returns some component of a time date value as previously created by GetNow Time or Date The available functions
133. Text primitive is used to display a multi state condition The String Text primitive is used to display a string expression The properties of a tag text primitive are displayed using two tabbed pages http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING THE G303 USER INTERFACE PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS The first page 1s more or less the same for all five primitive types corInteger Text Properties x Froperties Format Data Source Value TankLevel Pick Data Entry Disabled Y Show Label Yes ad Get Label From Tag Properties Get Format From Tag Properties Text Format Font miss ze o Flash on Alarm No hi Foreground Bak y Background white xl Horizontal center Y Vertical Middle y e The Value property is used to indicate from where the data for this primitive should be obtained You may select a tag a register in a communications device or an expression that combines a number of such items The data type of the item must be appropriate to the primitive in question eg the Value property for an integer text primitive cannot be set equal to a string expression e The Data Entry property is used to indicate whether or not you want the user of the operator interface panel to be able to change the underlying value via this primitive For data entry to be enabled the expression entered for the value property must be capable of being changed For example if a formula is entered data entry will n
134. Tools E al Event Viewer Z System Information El Er Performance Logs and Alerts G Shared Folders 2 Device Manager El Local Users and Groups E Fal Local Users and Groups E Sy Storage E Disk Management S Disk Defragmenter amp Logical Drives 2 Removable Storage S Disk Defragmenter amp Logical Drives Sa Removable Storage b Sound video and game controllers g A as E lt Sound video and game controllers i i icati H 6 Services and Applications EN 7 de Services and Applications H E Storage volumes de ji H Storage volumes E System devices H System devices 8 2 Universal Serial Bus controllers E Universal Serial Bus controllers Generic USB Hub Generic USB Hub SanDisk ImageMate CF MS SanDisk ImageMate CF MS USB Root Hub USB Composite Device USB Root Hub USB Mass Storage Device VIA USB Universal Host Controller VIA USB Universal Host Controller USB Root Hub USB Root Hub VIA USB Universal Host Controller VIA USB Universal Host Controller SETTING THE 1P ADDRESS If you are using a TCP IP connection you should enter the IP address of the target device in the appropriate field in the dialog box If you leave the IP address as 0 0 0 0 Crimson will examine the currently loaded database to see if the panel s address can be determined from the configuration information This feature removes the need to change the IP addresses when switching between d
135. UAL RAD2DEG 7HETA ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Returns theta converted from radians to degrees FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE Right Rad2Deg Pi 2 PAGE 356 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE RANDOM RANGE RANDOM RANGE ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION int The range of random values to produce DESCRIPTION Returns a pseudo random value between 0 and range 1 FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Noise Random 100 REVISION 12 PAGE 357 READDATA DATA COUNT CRIMSON USER MANUAL READDATA DATA COUNT data any First array element to be read int Number of elements to be read DESCRIPTION Requests that count elements from array element data onwards to read on the next comms scan This function is used with arrays that have been mapped to external data and which have their read policy set to Read Manually The function returns immediately and does not wait for the data to be read FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE ReadData array1 8 10 PAGE 358 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE READFILE F LE CHARS READFILE FILE CHARS ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION file int File handle as required by OpenFile chars int DESCRIPTION Number of characters to be read Reads a string up to 512 ch
136. UMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION element int float The first array element to be processed count ne The number of elements to be processed DESCRIPTION Returns the standard deviation of the count array elements from element onwards assuming the data points to represent a sample of the population under study If you need to find the standard deviation of the whole population use the PopDev function instead FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE Dev StdDev Data 0 10 REVISION 12 PAGE 383 STOPSYSTEM CRIMSON USER MANUAL STOPSYSTEM ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Stops the operator interface to allow a user to update the database This function is typically used when serial programming is required with respect to a unit whose programming port has been allocated for communications Calling this function shuts down all communications and thereby allows the port to function as a programming port once more FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE StopSystem PAGE 384 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE STRIP TEXT TARGET STRIP TEXT TARGET ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION text The string to be processed int The character to be removed DESCRIPTION Removes all occurrences of a given character from a text string FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE cstring EXAM
137. UTIONS PROBLEM 99 Values show Values blink between the data and REVISION 12 Port settings do not match Incorrect target device address Incorrect cable Incorrect communication port Communication port connector pins bent inward Incorrect tag mapping Incorrect tag mapping on one of the tags on the display Communications times out Check that the port settings of the Crimson device match the target device 1 e Baud Parity etc Check that the target device address in Crimson in communications on the PLC symbol matches the target device address setup Check the cable part number or cabling to match your protocol Check if the cable is connected to the right communication port If the above is correct check that the protocol settings are on the right communication port in Crimson Although unlikely check the communication port connector pins on the Red Lion device in case some are bent inward resulting in a bad contact with the cable Check that the tag is mapped to an existing register in the target device Delete tags one after another and download in between When the values on the screen stop blinking the last deleted tag was mapped incorrectly or accessed an unknown register in the target device Increase the Slave Response or Device Timeout on the communication port or target device in Crimson PAGE 403 ETHERNET COMMUNICATION
138. Value GetRealTag 10 Returns the floating point value of the tag with index 10 Value GetRealTag FindTagIndex Power Returns the floating point value from the tag with label Power http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE GETSTRINGTAG INDEX GETSTRINGTAG NDE X ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Returns the value of the string tag specified by index The index can be found from the tag label using the function FindTagIndex This function will only work if the targeted tag is a String FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE Value GetStringTag 10 Returns the string value of the tag with index 10 Value GetStringTag FindTagIndex Name Returns the string value from the tag with label Name REVISION 12 PAGE 315 GETTAGLABEL INDEX GETTAGLABEL NDE X ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION PAGE 316 CRIMSON USER MANUAL DESCRIPTION Returns the label of the tag not the mnemonic or tag name specified by index FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE Label GetTagLabel 10 Returns the label of the tag with index 10 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE GETUPDOWNDATA DATA LIMIT GETUPDOWNDATA DA7A LIMIT ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION data int A steadily increasing source value ne The number of values to generate DESCRIPTION This function takes a steadily increasing value a
139. a value EXAMPLE MuteSiren PAGE 340 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE NEWBATCH NAME NEwBATCH WAM ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Starts a batch called name The name must be no more than 8 characters in length and made up of characters that are valid FAT 16 filename Restarting a batch already on the CF card will append the data If a new batch exceeds the maximum number of batches to be kept the oldest batch 1 e The one last changed will be deleted If name is empty the function is equivalent to EndBatch Note Batch status is retained during a power cycle Starting a new batch within less than 10 seconds of ending or starting the last one will produce undefined behavior To go straight from one batch to another call NewBatch without an intervening call to EndBatch FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE NewBatch ProdA REVISION 12 PAGE 341 Nop Nop ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION PAGE 342 CRIMSON USER MANUAL DESCRIPTION This function does nothing FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE Nop http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE OPENFILE NAME MODE OPENFILE WAME MODE mode The mode in which the file is to be opened 0 Read Only 1 Read Write at Start of File 2 Read Write at End of
140. a well known IP address to the MAC address associated with the unit as otherwise users will not be sure how to address the panel If the more common Manual Configuration mode is selected the IP Address Network Mask and Gateway fields must be filled out with the appropriate information The default values provided for these fields will almost never be suitable for your application Be sure to consult your network administrator when selecting appropriate values and be sure to enter and download these values before connecting the G3 to your network If you do not follow this advice it is possible although unlikely that you will cause problems on your network IP ROUTING The IP Routing option can be used to enable or disable the routing of IP packets between the Ethernet port and any PPP connections made to or by the panel You should not enable this option unless you understand the implications of allowing such routing Please refer to the Advanced Communications chapter for more information PHYSICAL LAYER The Physical Layer options control the type of connection that the G3 will attempt to negotiate with the hub to which it is connected Generally these options can be left in their default states but if you have trouble establishing a reliable connection especially when connecting directly to a PC without an intervening hub or switch consider turning off both Full Duplex and High Speed operation to see if this solves the problem
141. abavida Action Control tshotThesheriff make ES Pailhouse ock b Edit Cancel REVISION 12 PAGE 111 ACTION DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL PAGE 112 e Tune Name selects the tune to be played Customized tunes may be played using the PlayRTTTL function THE USER DEFINED ACTION This action 1s used to do anything else you desire The options are shown below xi This Page al Pages Action Mode Operation MESAS Action Details On Pressed Output 1 On 4uto Repeat Mone On Released Output 0 e The On Pressed property is used to define the action to be performed when the key is pressed This action may invoke any of the functions from the Function Reference or the data modification operators described in the Writing Actions section or it may run a program e The On Auto Repeat property is used to define the action to be performed when the key is pressed and then held down The action occurs both on the initial depression and on subsequent auto repeats so there is no need to define both this property and On Pressed This action may invoke any of the functions from the Function Reference or the data modification operators described in the Writing Actions section or it may run a program e The On Released property is used to define the action to be performed when the key is released This action may invoke any of the functions from the Function Reference or the data modification operat
142. ach of these primitives 1s as the associated single line primitive except that they do not support data entry The text string to be displayed is broken into lines by the inclusion of vertical bar E characters wherever a line break is required THE TIME AND DATE PRIMITIVE The Time and Date primitive is used to display the current time and date or to display the contents of a time and date expression It can also be used to edit such an expression or to set the operator panel s real time clock The properties of a time and date primitive are displayed using three tabbed pages The first page is shown below cor Time and Date Properties xj Properties Data Entry Format Data Source Value Current Time Edit Data Entry ho r Flash on Alarm Mo ka Show Label Yes hg Get From Tag P Field Label Data Format P Text Colors Text Format Foreground Fixed Owie Pick Background Fixed E cray amp f ick Justification Horizontal center y Yertical Middle y Set As Defaults e The Value property is used to indicate the time and date value to be displayed If no value is entered the current time and date is shown If an expression 1s entered it is taken to represent the number of seconds that have elapsed since 1 PAGE 142 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING A COLOR USER INTERFACE January 1997 Such values are typically obtained using the various time and
143. address to match the router IP address Check that the tag is mapped to an existing register in the target device Delete tags one after another and download in between When the values on the screen stop blinking the last deleted tag was mapped incorrectly or accessed an unknown register in the target device Increase the Slave Response or Device Timeout on the communication port or target device in Crimson http www redlion net g3 TROUBLESHOOTING PROGRAMS PROBLEM The program does not seem to run Display shows NOT READY Display shows WORKING Display shows TIMEOUT REVISION 12 PROGRAMS POSSIBLE CAUSES POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS Program not launched Some conditions in the program are not met if switch or loops Program is launched but data are not available to run it yet The device is busy working on a program Program was unable to run due to unavailable data Check if the program is called somewhere in the database code ProgramName If the Crimson device has a beeper use the beep function in the program to check if the program does go through the condition Otherwise use a dummy tag and change its value at different places in the program to check where it stops If the message disappears the program was launched successfully however it seems to require time to fetch all the required data Communication is too slow or you
144. ag based allowing units to exchange tag values seamlessly thus avoiding complex programming Note OPC communication can only be used other Ethernet Please make sure the Ethernet port is active OPC SERVER SETTINGS Once the OPC Server is enabled clients are able to access the unit s tags The connection to the server is done via the TCP port setup TCP port 790 is suitable for most applications The Session Limit indicates the maximum number of clients connecting simultaneously on this server The maximum possible 1s four http www redlion net g3 ADVANCED COMMUNICATIONS OPC COMMUNICATION I Enable OPC Server The Security properties are used to restrict OPC server access to hosts whose IP address matches the mask and data indicated All access may be restricted or the filter may be used to restrict only attempts to write data in the server The filter works in the following way Permitted IP Data 192 168 100 1 Permitted IP Mask 255 255 255 0 Range of IP authorized Permitted IP Data amp Permitted IP Mask Range of IP authorized 192 168 100 X This means any PC with IP addresses starting with 192 168 100 is allowed to access the server or write data IP filter may be defeated by certain advanced hacking techniques and is not warranted by Red Lion Controls OPC AND SCADA SCADA packages can access OPC data available in the operator interface using Red Lion Controls software OPCW
145. ag holds a value other than one of those listed in the item states The Navigation slider is used to step through the 512 states that can be defined for a particular tag Moving the slider left and right will update the right hand pane to show the selected states The Export to File button can be used to export state names and values to a CSV file Fe My Recent Documents Desktop 9 Documents or This Computer mm amp The Network Save in 5 Desktop e Ea e Ed This Computer Documents The Network C2 Manual Save as type CSY Files y Cancel http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING DATA TAGS EDITING MULTI TAGS The CSV file will contain a line for each defined state stating the state label the state value and the text assigned to that state If multiple languages are in use an additional column will be provided for each language The file type drop down can be used to select a Unicode format file if you are using languages that cannot be represented in standard ASCII The file can be subsequently re imported using the Import from File button The Copy from Tag button will display the following dialog box xl Tag List f Multivar f Multiarray y Create Tag f multi Variable Cancel This dialog can be used to select another multi tag from which the format information is to be copied This facility will save a lot of typing 1f the same format
146. ain This is useful for drawing symmetrical figures centered on an initial point e Holding down the Ctr1 key while dragging out the primitive will keep its horizontal and vertical sizes the same This is useful when you want to be sure that you draw an exact circle or square using the ellipse or rectangle primitives These options are also active when primitives are re sized LocK INSERT MODE The padlock icon on the drawing toolbox can be used to add a number of primitives of the same basic type without having to click the toolbox icon for each item in turn To cancel lock mode click the padlock icon again or press the Escape key The same operation can be performed by using the Lock Mode command on the Insert menu SELECTING PRIMITIVES To select a display primitive simply move your mouse pointer over the primitive in question and perform a left click You will notice that while your pointer 1s hovering over a primitive PAGE 94 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING THE G303 USER INTERFACE MOVING AND RESIZING a bounding rectangle is drawn in blue to help show what will be selected When the actual selection is performed the rectangle will change to red and handles will appear so as to allow you to re size the primitive as required If you find that the primitive you want to select is hidden below another primitive press the Alt key to allow the selection to be made To select several primitives either drag out a selection rec
147. aining three tags 3 Sample Web Page Microsoft Internet Explorer 3 01 x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back gt O 2 A Gsearch Favorites meda 4 B Sy A Links 2 Address E hetp 192 9 200 163 o dea Sample Web Page Name Value Tank 1 50 gal Tank 2 400 gal Tank3 75 gal BACK O 1993 2003 Red Lion Controls Internet PAGE 206 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING THE WEB SERVER The picture below shows the data log menu REVISION 12 E Directory of Available Logs Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back gt gt O 2 A Asearch GFavortes meda lt 4 Er Ey GS Links gt BACK 1993 2003 Red Lion Controls File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Ea Back gt gt gt O A A Asearch GFavortes meda lt 4 Er SG Links gt Address a http 192 9 200 163 logs Log1 y Go Directory of LOG1 File Size 01030232 cSV 80 01030230 cS 5792 01030228 CSY 4256 BACK 1993 2003 Red Lion Controls F http 192 9 200 163 logs Log1 01030228 CSY Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data GoTo Favorites Help Ea Back gt O A A search Gravorites meda C4 A D S Si E amp Links gt Address E http 192 9 200 163 l0gs Log1 DBZ o GO Al bd Date Tank 1 Tank2 Tank3 50 gal 400 gal 75 gal 50 gal 400 gal
148. al tags represent 32 bit single precision floating point numbers These tags can store values between 10 and 10 with a precision of about 7 significant figures While it is seldom necessary to use real tags to represent physical quantities which typically have more tightly defined ranges they are useful for performing statistical operations or other math functions String tags represent an item of text made up of a number of characters They are used to store such things as recipe names or to process data received using Raw Port device drivers Strings cannot be mapped to PLC registers but can be used to store such data within the Master itself http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING DATA TAGS ALL ABOUT TAGS TAG COLORS The color of the tag depends of its family and mapping with a communication device The table below shows the different colors by family and access for an integer tag The same color scheme is used on all tag types only the symbol 1s then different as shown above X Green N A or Write Only TAGS Mapped as Read only Given all these various options you may wonder why you would want to use tags in the first place After all Crimson allows you to directly place a PLC register on a display page so you can in fact configure a simple database without ever opening the Data Tags icon The basic answers are as follows e Tags allow you to name data items so you know which data item within the PLC you
149. aller to use e The External Data and Timeout properties are used to control how the program interacts with Crimson s communication infrastructure with respect to external data items to which the program makes reference You will recall that Crimson only reads data items when they are used This property is used to control the exact interpretation of this rule with respect to programs Read When Referenced External data used by the program will be added to the comms scan whenever the program is referenced If the program is referenced by a display page the data will be read when that page is displayed if the program is referenced by a global action or a trigger the data will be read at all times This is the default mode and is acceptable for all programs except those that use very large amounts of external data Read Always External data used by the program will be read at all times whether or not the program is referenced This means that the program will always be ready to run and that the operator will not see the NOT READY message that might otherwise occur when the program is first referenced The downside of this mode is that comms performance may be reduced if large amounts of data are referenced by the program Read When Executed External data used within the program will be read only when the program is invoked The program will wait for the period defined in the timeout property for such data to be available If t
150. alue property the label may be obtained from that tag Otherwise 1t must be entered on the Format tab of the dialog box The Show Value property is used to indicate whether the value of the data should be displayed within the gauge If a tag of the appropriate data type is used for the value property the format may be obtained from the tag Otherwise as with the label it must be entered on the Format tab The Get From Tag properties are used to indicate from where the label text the field format and the text colors should be obtained The options presented depend on what was entered for the Value property In each case you may manually enter the data in the appropriate properties or assuming a suitable expression has been defined you may instruct the primitive to get the required information from the underlying data tag The Orientation property is used to indicate the direction in which the scale s minor tick marks should point The major tick marks always point inwards PAGE 173 SYSTEM PRIMITIVES CRIMSON USER MANUAL e The Major Divisions property is used to indicate into how many major divisions the scale should be divided Large tick marks are drawn at each division The lowest number of major divisions is one in which case large tick marks will be drawn at the extremes of the scale but not along its arc e The Minor Divisions property 1s used to indicate into how many minor divisions each major division should be divided S
151. an be used to view the current contents of a G303 s display This facility is very useful when remotely diagnosing problems that an operator may be having with the operator panel or the machine it controls REVISION 12 PAGE 201 WEB SERVER PROPERTIES CRIMSON USER MANUAL PAGE 202 The Remote Control property 1s used to enable or disable an option by which the remote viewing facility 1s extended to allow a web browser to be used to simulate the pressing of keys on the operator panel thereby allowing remote control of the panel or the machine it controls While this feature is extremely useful care must be taken to use the various security parameters to avoid unauthorized tampering with a machine The use of an external firewall is also strongly recommended if the panel is reachable from the Internet The Custom Site property 1s used to enable or disable a facility by which files stored in the WEB directory of the CompactFlash card are exposed via the web server This facility 1s described in more detail below The Remote Refresh property represents the frequency at which the web browser connected to the G3 Web Server will refresh the remote view web page A value of zero will refresh as quick as possible For slower connections such as modems a higher value is recommended The maximum 1s 60 seconds Under the Security tab File G306 Cri File Edit View Page Link Help 6 Crimson 2 0 UNREGISTERED COPY 101 x DSalIr mDa
152. and colors indicated while the unfilled areas are drawn with solid Fill Color 2 e The Line Format properties are used to define the border for the primitive THE SCATTER GRAPH PRIMITIVE a The Scatter Graph Primitive displays up to four sets of data values Each set is m composed of two data arrays plotted against each other with optional data point markers and regression line PAGE 132 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING A COLOR USER INTERFACE PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS The properties are split over five tabbed pages one general and one for each set graph and are accessed by double clicking the primitive The Properties tab defines the common features for all the graphs such as the background and outline color or 1f the primitive should be displayed or not using the Show Item field or Scatter Graph Properties x Properties Graph 1 Graph 2 Graph 3 Graph 4 Background Fill Style Outline Line Style Sold Color Line Color gt Fixed O white Pick Cancel Set s Defaults Each graph is composed of the same proprietary set of properties Data sources and scaling are defined directly on the graph tab The format and style are accessible via the Edit button or Scatter Graph Properties i x Properties Graph 1 Graph z Graph 3 Graph 4 Data x Values Default Edit Y Values oF General Default Edit Count 10 values A Axis Minimum General a Edit
153. and then automatically place E the appropriate text primitive on the display For example selecting an integer tag will allow insertion of an appropriately configured integer text primitive This 1s the icon you will use most often for adding tags to a page It first displays the dialog box shown below to allow tag selection and then creates one of the five tag text primitives described in the next section The new primitive will be configured so as to display the tag in question using its label and its formatting properties as defined when the tag was created REVISION 12 PAGE 99 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL PAGE 100 Select Tag x Tag List X Tanklevel Create Tag Y Flag Variable y Create 7 cons THE TAG TEXT PRIMITIVES The tag text primitives are used to display or edit an expression in textual form Primarily they are used to display tags in which case the default format 1s taken from the Format tab associated with that tag in the Data Tags window If a non tag expression 1s entered or if you want the formatting to differ from the default values for a tag the format data can be overridden as required There 1s one type of tag text for each tag family The Flag Text primitive 1s used to display a true or false condition The Integer Text primitive is used to display an integer expression The Real Text primitive is used to display a floating point expression The Multi
154. ansform Page Link Help DSE DBXxX 2 4 m o m E E lla m lt v User Interface Menu BB Pages E Menu E Water E HeatCool E Filing E MainControl aS Water Control X Li dl g k Origin 039 173 Position 119 231 OVER CAPS NUM OTHER VIEW OPTIONS As well as controlling the zoom the View menu contains the following options e The Page List command can be used to show or hide the left hand pane of the User Interface window If the page list is disabled even more space is made available for editing the display The F4 key toggles the page list on and off e The Hold Aspect command can be used to control whether or not Crimson attempts to maintain the aspect ratio of the display If aspect holding is enabled a figure that would appear as say a circle on the G303 will appear as a perfect circle on your PC If this mode is not selected Crimson can expand the display page to use more of the PC s screen but at the expense of some distortion Other options are available during page editing and are described below USING THE PAGE LIST To create rename or delete display pages click on the left hand pane of the User Interface window The various commands on the Page menu can then be used to make the desired changes Alternatively right click on the required display page and select from the menu PAGE 116 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING A COLOR USER INTERFACE WORKING WITH THE G
155. ar Untitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 File Edit view Insert Arrange Transform Page Link Help E B jo Toolbar v Status Bar User 1 Toolbox L e SE Alt 2 Zoom Function Keys Soft Keys Alt 3 gt v Page List v Hold Aspect Grid v Smart Align Edges v Smart Align Center Show Mapping Refresh Simulate Language Show the display alone Click on the black screen so the Drawing toolbox appears To insert the tags on the screen simply click the tag icon in the drawing toolbox In the Select Tag dialog box select one of the tags and click ok REVISION 12 PAGE 7 USER INTERFACE CRIMSON USER MANUAL Sort Tags by original Order Y Create Tag e Flag Variable y Create F The tag is ready to be inserted Just click hold and drag the mouse cursor across the screen to insert the tag Repeat the same operation for all the tags you whish to display in that page To be able to change the data in the PLC from the G310 HMI screen for example Var2 double click Var2 in the User Interface to access the primitive properties and change Data Entry to yes on the Properties Tab as shown below NOTE Nothing else is required to enable data entry on this tag DO NOT put any information in the Data Entry tab these are for data entry checking only Double click the primitive PAGE 8 http www redlion net g3 QUICK START DOWNLOADING der Integer Text
156. aracters in length from the specified file This function does not look for a line feed and carriage return therefore allowing line read of more than 510 characters ReadFileLine limit If a file as multiple lines the string returned by ReadFile will be as many lines as required to reach the number of characters to be read Line feed and carriage return will be part of the returned string FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE Text ReadFile hFile REVISION 12 PAGE 359 READFILELINE FILE CRIMSON USER MANUAL READFILELINE AILE ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION re File handle as returned by OpenFile DESCRIPTION Returns a single line of text from file FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE Text ReadFileLine hFile PAGE 360 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE RENAMEFILE HANDLE NAME RENAMEFILE HANDLE NAME handle int File handle DESCRIPTION Returns a non zero value upon a successful rename file operation The file handle is the returned value of the Openfile function After the rename operation the file stays open and should be closed if no further operations are required The file name is maximum 8 characters long excluding the extension which is 3 characters long maximum FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Result RenameFile File NewName txt REVIS
157. arameters are 32 bit integers that can optionally be formed from strings using the TextToAddr function Note that setting all three of the IP values to zero will reset the port s settings to the database defaults Note also that the unit must be power cycled before the new values will take effect FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE SetNetConfig 0 0 0 0 PAGE 370 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE SETNOW TIME SETNOW 77M ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION int The new time to be set DESCRIPTION Sets the current time via an integer that represents the number of seconds that have elapsed since 1 January 1997 The integer is typically generated via the other time date functions FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE SetNow 252288000 REVISION 12 PAGE 371 SETPORTCONFIG PORT PARAM VALUE CRIMSON USER MANUAL SETPORTCONFIG POR7 PARAM VALUE IOL Number of the port to be set Ine Port parameter to be set int Value of the parameter DESCRIPTION Sets the serial port parameter to value The port number starts from the programming port with value 1 The table below shows the parameter number and associated possible values panam Ne 1 The actual baud rate e g 115200 0 none 1 odd or 2 even Physical Mode 1 RS232 2 422 Master 3 422 Slave 4
158. arden ee deeds Ad AE NENE NENEN 51 OPC LINK RED LION PRODUCTS DATA EXCHANGE cotos iii iio 51 USING TIME MANAGEMENT ads 53 CONFIGURING THE TIME MANAGER edad 53 SELECTING AN SN TP SERVER ociosa 55 TIME ZONE CONFIGURATION orori tae ide A tod tab edl 55 PAGE II http www redlion net g3 TABLE OF CONTENTS CONFIGURING THE SYNCHRONIZATION MANAGER FTP O Mudmenealwunr 56 SYNCHRONIZATION MANAGER SETTINGS eee reee aria roe 56 AUTOMATIC LOG SYNCHRONIZATION ed dede dedos da 57 ADVANCED FTP EXCHANGE FUNCTION Sitsciarataaiadad la muevn mann 58 CONFIGURING THE FTP SERVER 0ooccoocooconccocconocanoranrnnoranoranrnnornnrnnoranoranrnnaranarannano 58 PEP SERVER SE TRING Soo arta e i EU E A 58 PP SECURIT inc tah ante eth tithes tet he alike E eh nko 59 ACCESSING THE SERVER cita 59 CONFIGURING DATA TAGS ina n OL PINOy IMACS arera aaa 61 TPES OFP TAC Se one role raras 61 TAC E A A E A A A A A A A A P E E E E A 63 CREATING TAGS ad A 64 EDITING TAGS sicriu aenn N A a E 64 EDITING PROPERTIE S dorir i E 64 EXPRESSION PROPERTIES vrai ds 65 TRANCA GABLE S ROS mininiai Traa nE EEEE E E EEE 65 COLOR PROPERTIES EE sdacede ences 66 EDITING FLAG TAGS es cl boda 67 PE DATA TAB VARIABLES Murat tasaci n 67 THE DATA TAB FORMULAE dia 69 THE DATA TAB ARRAYS isa 69 THE FORMAT TAB A ETTA AE ATE AA E A T 70 THE COLORS AB aa a E A EEEE 71 THEALARMS TAB oriei a a a a odiosa 72 MAE TRIGGERS TAB sata EN 73 EDING INTEGER TAGS A a s 73 RN A A A 74 TR
159. are as follows Note that GetDays and GetWeeks are typically used with the difference between two time values to calculate how long has elapsed in terms of days or weeks Note also that the year returned by GetWeekYear is not always the same as that returned by GetYear as the former may return a smaller value if the last week of a year extends beyond year end FUNCTION TYPE These functions are passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE d GetDate GetNow 12 60 60 PAGE 294 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE GETDISKFREEBYTES DRIVE GETDISKFREEBYTES DRIVE ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION ine The drive number always 0 DESCRIPTION Returns the number of free memory bytes on the CompactFlash Card Note This function requires time to calculate free memory space as a long CompactFlash access 1s necessary Do NOT call this function permanently with on tick on update or in a formula Call it upon an event such as OnSelect on the page you want to display the resulting value FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE FreeMemory GetDiskFreeBytes 0 REVISION 12 PAGE 295 GETDISKFREEPERCENT DRIVE CRIMSON USER MANUAL GETDISKFREEPERCENT DRIVE ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION int The drive number always 0 DESCRIPTION Returns the percentage of free memory space on the CompactFlash Card Note This function requires time to calculate free memory space as a long CompactF
160. are much better about when they choose to lock the card thereby preventing the C2 runtime from writing data INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE If you downloaded the Crimson software from Red Lion s website simply execute the download file and follow the instructions If you received a copy of Crimson on CD place the CD in your system s CDROM drive and follow the instructions that will appear If no instructions appear you may have auto run disabled In that case select the Run option from the Start menu and enter x setup where x is the drive letter of your CDROM drive Again follow the resulting instructions and the software will be installed CHECKING FOR UPDATES If you have an Internet connection you can use the Check for Update command in the Help menu to scan Red Lion s web site for a new version of Crimson If a later version than the one you are using is found Crimson will ask if it should download the upgrade and update your software automatically You may also manually download the upgrade from Red Lion s website by visiting the Downloads page within the Support section Either way when the upgrade package executes be sure to select the Repair option to update your installation REVISION 12 PAGE 1 INSTALLING THE USB DRIVERS CRIMSON USER MANUAL INSTALLING THE USB DRIVERS PAGE 2 When you first connect a G3 panel to your PC using a USB cable Windows will prompt you for the location of the drivers for the device The d
161. ariables THE FORMAT TAB The Format tab of a flag tag contains the following properties dar Untitled File Crimson 2 0 Data Label alarms Format Data Triggers Data Format On State Running Translate Off State Stopped Translate e The Label Text property is used to specify the label that can be shown next to this tag when including the tag on a display page The label differs from the tag PAGE 70 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING DATA TAGS EDITING FLAG TAGS name in that the former can be translated for international applications while the latter remains unchanged and is never shown to the user of the panel e The On State and Off State properties are used to specify the text to be displayed when the tag contains a non zero and zero value respectively When you enter the text for the on state Crimson will attempt to generate corresponding text for the off state by referring both to previously created flag tags and to 1ts internal list of common antonymic pairs THE COLORS TAB The Colors tab of a flag tag contains the following properties File Edit View Tag Link Help Deul stax eat tl e x lad A o Foreground and Background Tag On C Eek y and mu Lime y TEXTO Tag Off m white y and mu Red y Triggers Alarms Colors Format Data To include this tag in a custom web page use 1 e The Tag On property is used t
162. atabases intended for different terminals SENDING THE DATABASE Once the link is configured the database can be downloaded using either the Link Send or Link Update commands The former will send the entire database whether or not individual objects within the file have changed The latter will only send changes and will typically take a much shorter period of time to complete The Update command is typically the only one that you will need as Crimson will automatically fall back to a complete send if the incremental download fails for any reason As a shortcut note that you can access Link Update via the lightning bolt symbol on the toolbar or via the F9 key on the PC Download Database p i x Status Item 0000 Writing data block 3 Note that downloading via TCP IP relies on a CompactFlash card being installed in the panel if the device s firmware is to be upgraded Since you may want to perform such upgrades at some point in time it is highly recommended that you install a CompactFlash card in any device to which TCP IP downloads are likely to be performed EXTRACTING DATABASES The Link Support Upload command can be used to instruct Crimson whether or not it should include the information necessary to support database upload when sending a database to a G3 panel Supporting upload will slow the download process somewhat and may fail with extremely large databases containing many embedded images but 1t will ensure that
163. ate Value Y General foo ti s S Eat Hysteresis ven fo e Trigger flevelalrm Delay oj ms Accept manua y Priority HE Mail oisabled y X MotorSpeed Y MotorStopped Y Flag rray Y Motori X IntFormula X Intarray Triggers alarm 2 Alarm 1 Colors Format Data To include this tag in a custom web page use 0 OVER cars ura e The Event Mode property is used to indicate the logic that will be used to decide whether the alarm should activate The tables below list the available modes Not present on G303 and other monochrome devices PAGE 78 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING DATA TAGS EDITING INTEGER TAGS Move remun aerae mm Data Match The value of the tag is equal to the alarm s Value Data Mismatch The value of tag is not equal to the alarm s Value Absolute High The value of the tag exceeds the alarm s Value Absolute Low The value of the tag falls below the alarm s Value The following modes are only available when a setpoint is defined moo armario nen Deviation High The value of the tag exceeds the tag s Setpoint by an amount equal to or greater than the alarm s Value Deviation Low The value of the tag falls below the tag s Setpoint by an amount equal to or greater than the alarm s Value Out of Band The tag moves outside a band equal in width to twice the alarm s Value and centered on the tag s Setpoint In Band The tag moves insid
164. aults The Label Text property is used to define an optional label for the primitive The Field Type property is used to indicate whether the field should display the time the date or both In the last case this property also indicates in which order the two elements should be shown The Time Format property 1s used to indicate whether 12 hour civil or 24 hour military time format should be used As with other properties leaving this set to Locale Default will allow Crimson to pick a suitable format according to the language selected within the operator panel PAGE 143 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS PAGE 144 CRIMSON USER MANUAL e The AM Suffix and PM Suffix properties are used with 12 hour mode to indicate the text to be appended to the time field in the morning and afternoon as appropriate If you leave the property undefined Crimson will use a default e The Show Seconds property is used to indicate whether the time field should include the seconds or whether 1t should just comprise hours and minutes e The Date Format property is used to indicate the order in which the various date elements 1e date month and year should be displayed e The Show Month property is used to indicate whether the month should be displayed as digits ie 01 through 12 or as its short name ie Jan though Dec e The Show Year property is used to indicate whether the date field should include the year and if so how many digits should be shown
165. avoid transmitting or receiving plaintext password but will fallback to using PAP if the remote server does not support CHAP e The Route Type property is used to define the data that will be transferred via this interface For on demand connections this effectively defines when the connection will be activated If Default Gateway is selected any packets that do not match the address and netmask of the Ethernet connection will be sent to this interface Note that in this mode the Ethernet port must have a gateway setting of 0 0 0 0 or it will take all the packets and leave none to activate the modem If Specific Network is selected you must provide the address and netmask that defines the network to which packets will be routed ADDING AN SMS CONNECTION SMS connections are used when text messaging functionality is required but where neither dial in nor dial out PPP connections will be established They are configured as described above except that the SMS via GSM Modem device should be selected for the required port The configuration options for this modem are shown below cePUntitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 3 Ioj x File Edit view Link Help DSH riDEXxX 4 Pr Communications o 63 Driver Selection Programming Port RS 232 Comms Port SMS Modem Driver SMS via GSM Modem Edit R5 485 Comms Port 4 Ethernet Connection 7 Protocol 1 W Protocol 2 Connect Using elit GSM Mode
166. cecseeeeseeaeseseteeneeeenens 363 SCALE DATA RT RAEE EZ ad 364 SENDRILECRCA FILE a ds 365 SENDMAIL RCP SUBIECT BOO 366 SENA IMD ia 367 SETINT WAGUINOEX VALUE aras 368 SETLANGUAGE CODE dais 369 SETNETCONFIG PORT ADDR MASK GATE scccecececcceccceccccesenenenetenseseenenererarsnsenenens 370 SE INOW TE aid 371 SETPOR FCONEIG PORT PARAM VALUE ia 372 SETREALTACUNDE VALUE EE EASA AER 374 SETSTRING TAGUINDEX VALUE iii 375 SONCVALOE asiaani E 376 SROWMENUCNAME a ia 377 SHOWPOPUP WAME aeececatusrarencumencacuciaictectdniatauesasecname cakes ear eincieuass eeveueeaeanies 378 SING EIA rrna A 379 RENO Nils 380 SEER ER OD erat 381 SORT VALUE ais 382 SIDD EV CEL EMEN TE CON Did 383 STOP SEM 384 STRIPC IX T TARGET ornin A A ie cosneuaracmuaneeaaaiaemanetemiaienes 385 SUMMEN T COUNTY aid 386 TANC IMETA ico 387 TESTACCESS RICHI S PROMPT oo 388 TEXTLOADOR ADDR aa 389 TEXTTOFLOAT STRING sisarien N a 390 TEXTTOINT STRING RADO Jia 391 TIME a 392 USECAMERASETUP PORT CAMERA INDEX ooconononnononenonnnnanenonnnnanono nan ran ene nannananenens 393 PAGE XII http www redlion net g3 TABLE OF CONTENTS WSERIOGOEF asociaciones dlrocds 394 WSEREOGON PA nn ian cries ucneiu sande tue uct deal aaa Oeuds 395 WAITDATACDATA COUNT TIME ia 396 WRITEFILECILE TO T sito 397 WRIECIELINE ELE TE narco its aa 398 TROUBLESHOOTING Guri 399 GENERAL uste os ooo 399 ERIMSON MESSAGES atando eve dd 402 SERIAL COMMUNICATION an 403 ETHERNET C
167. cept that the PPP and Modem Client driver should be selected for the required port The configuration options for this modem are shown below aP Untitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 loj x File Edit View Link Help D Sal sax p Communications 63 Driver Selection Programming Port RS 232 Comms Port PPP Client Driver PPP and Modem Client Edit RS 485 Comms Port 1 4 Ethernet Connection Y Protocol 1 W Protocol 2 ise Connection Type On Demand r BA Mail Activity Timeout 240 secs one Additional Init Connect Using Generic Landline Modem I No Firewall Number or APN sMs Support Authentication Logon Username Logon Password IP Configuration Route Type Default Gateway y Remote Network Remote Mask Clear Port Settings OVER CAPS um The modem has the following properties that are distinct from those for dial in connections e The Connect Using property is as for dial in connections with the addition of support for GPRS connections via a GSM modem These connections differ from CSD connections in that they achieve much higher speeds and are typically charged on the basis of how much data is transferred rather than how long the connection is maintained GPRS connections may thus be configured for permanent connection unless there is a need to provide downtime to allow SMS messages to be transferred e Th
168. comment line 1 of the comment line 2 of the comment line 3 of the comment A single line comment may also be placed at the end of a line that contains code REVISION 12 PAGE 185 RETURNING VALUES CRIMSON USER MANUAL RETURNING VALUES As mentioned above programs can return values Such programs can be invoked by other programs or by expressions anywhere in the database For example 1f you want to perform a particularly complex decode on a number of conditions relating to a motor and return a value to indicate the current state you could create a program that returns an integer like this it MotorRunning return 1 else 1f MotorTooHot return 2 LE MotorToocolad return 3 return 0 You could then configure a multi state formula to invoke this program and use that tag s format tab to define the names of the various states The invocation would be performed by setting the tag s Value property to Name where Name is the name of the program in question The parentheses are used to indicate a function call and cannot be omitted HERE BE DRAGONS Note that you have to exercise a degree of caution when using programs to return values In particular you should avoid looping for long periods of time or performing actions that make no sense in the context in which the function will be invoked For example if the code fragment above called the GotoPage function to change the page the display would c
169. creen where the Little Flexible Display will cover 128 x 16 pixels e The Port points to the serial communication port number where the large display for this primitive will be connected Port numbers starts at one with the communication port e The address is the large display node address this primitive will send the information to Please refer to the large display documentation to find the address required THE CAMERA PRIMITIVE The Camera Primitive 1s used to display the incoming image from a Banner PresencePlus series camera This primitive is used in combination with the Banner PresencePlus Camera Ethernet port driver This driver is selected in Communication More than one camera can be connected to the operator interface Properties are accessed by double clicking the primitive cor Camera Properties ha xj Source Camera A Scale Increase zl Fill Style la Solid Color Fill Color 1 gt Fixed O Gray Pick Fill Color 2 Fixed C Black Pick Line Format Line Style solid Color Line Color gt Fixed E White Pick Display State Show Item General TRUE Edit Cancel Set As Defaults REVISION 12 PAGE 157 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL e The Camera property is used to select the camera the primitive will display the image from e The Scale property defines the ratio the source image should be scaled before being displayed on the o
170. ct used constants to help 1t perform certain optimizations that Crimson 1s now able to perform automatically Constants can thus be implemented using formulae e Crimson associates alarms and triggers with tags rather than allowing them to be defined on the basis of arbitrary expressions If you need to have an alarm or trigger monitor a general expression define a formula to be equal to that expression and set the alarm and or trigger on that tag instead PAGE 90 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING THE G303 USER INTERFACE CONTROLLING THE VIEW CONFIGURING THE G303 USER INTERFACE Now that you have configured your communications options and created data tags for the various items that you wish to display you can create display pages to allow the user to view or edit these data items These pages are manipulated by selecting the User Interface icon from the main screen Please note that this chapter refers specifically to monochrome operator panels such as the G303 If you are using an operator panel with a color display please refer to the next chapter for configuration details CONTROLLING THE VIEW By default the User Interface window shows the entire front panel of the G303 including the display and all the available keys If you want to allocate more of your PC s screen to show the G303 s display you can use the four different zoom levels as shown below Link Help Link Help Dee 4 smaxl al t o s Pr OSa r BRx a
171. ction Programming Port a RS 232 Comms Port Driver No Driver Selected R5 485 Comms Port E 4 Ethernet S Protocol 1 Y Protocol 2 Y Protocol 3 W Protocol 4 E Key Services Driver Picker for Ethernet Port xj EJ Mail Manager Maree n Ty OPC Server a a a E Time Manager No Driver Selected a IP Master Version 1 02 Gg Sync Manager AC Tech TCP Cancel Help The properties available on HMII are the server s OPC and Ethernet settings The ZP Address and TCP Port should match the server s The Browse button provides access to a dialog box where the server database should be identified Using this method Crimson knows the tags available in the server unit The tag list is pulled from the server database so it can be available when mapping new tags in the client Communications El EME 63 Programming Port RS 232 Comms Port RS 485 Comms Port Device Settings JV Enable Device jade Ethernet Device Identification ES Protocol 1 OPC TCP IP Master IP Address 192 168 1 168 1 1 EM HMI W Protocol 2 TCP Port 790 W Protocol 3 y Protocol 4 Device Address Space E By Services TT 5 Mail Manager Filename U Desktop OPC Server cd2 Srowse 3 Ty OPC Server GE Time Manager Protocol Options n Sync Manager a Link Type fuse Dedicated Socket y ICMP Ping Disabled y Co
172. d be performed when the trigger is activated Refer to the Writing Actions section for a description of the syntax used to define the various actions that Crimson supports EDITING MULTI TAGS PAGE 80 You will recall that multi tags represent a 32 bit signed value but are used to select between one of a number of text strings The following sections describe the various tabs that are displayed on the right hand side of the Data Tags window when editing a multi tag THE DATA TAB VARIABLES The Data tab of a multi variable contains the following properties cerUntitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 loj x File Edit Yiew Tag Link Help Deel4smaxi a 4 4 Ets Triggers alarm 2 Alarm 1 Colors Format Data To include this tag in a custom web page use 0 e The Mapping property is used to specify if the variable is to be mapped to a register in a remote device or 1f 1t exists only within the terminal If you press the arrow button and select a device name from the resulting menu you will be presented with a dialog box that will allow a PLC register to be selected e The remainder of the properties are as described for the Data tab of flag tags http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING DATA TAGS EDITING MULTI TAGS THE DATA TAB FORMULAE The Data tab of a multi formula contains the following properties dar Untitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 File Edit View Tag Link Help Dem i
173. d map a different data item to each bit To do this right click on the element in question and select Expand from the resulting pop up menu The right hand pane will be updated to show the individual bits that make up the register and these can be mapped using the drag and drop process described above REVISION 12 PAGE 29 PROTOCOL CONVERSION CRIMSON USER MANUAL PROTOCOL CONVERSION In addition to exposing internal data tags via slave protocols Gateway Blocks can also be used to expose data that is obtained from other remote devices or to move data between two such master devices This unique protocol conversion feature allows much tighter integration between elements of your control system even when using simple low cost devices MASTER AND SLAVE A File Crimson 2 0 Ioj x Eile Edit View Link Help Dese 47 rs nax s Pr BB 6303 Available Mappings Programming Port BB 6303 RS 232 Comms Port Ml Sic B A RS 485 Comms Port DH485 X Outputs m sic X Inputs ead Ethernet X Status E Y Protocol 1 Modbus TCP IP Slave X Bits Em mB X Integers E m Block 1 X Timers Xx 40001 lt SLC NOO7 0000 X Counters X 40002 SLC NOO7 0001 l Tags X 40003 SLC N007 0002 Not Mapped X 40004 SLC NOO7 0003 X 40005 SLC N007 0004 X 40006 SLC NOO7 0005 X 40007 SLC NOO7 0006 X 40008 SLC N007 0007 Y Protocol 2 Y Protocol 3 Y Protocol 4 OVER caps num Exposing data from other device
174. d to display the content of a file saved on the CompactFlash card The primitive can display different files residing under the same folder but only one at a time This 1s particularly handy to visualize Data Log files allowing the user to move from one file to another for the desired log Only files with CSV TXT and LOG extensions are supported The properties are accessed by double clicking the primitive corFile Viewer Properties xj Properties Format Viewer Font Line Numbers Shown Sort Order New Files First Button Font Swiss Ful Pick Contents Root Directory rossoi File Types Jw SY Files FF THT Files LOG Files Set As Defaults e The Font property is used to select the font to be used to draw the primitive A fixed pitch font should ideally be used to ensure that the various data fields remain in the correct alignment e The Line Numbers property defines if the line number should be shown or not in front of each file line e The Sort Order property is used to choose whether files residing under the folder should be displayed or not and if the order is from the newest or the oldest file The selection New File First will display the files from the newest to the oldest when moving through the folder with the primitive The selection Old Files First will do the contrary REVISION 12 PAGE 155 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL PAGE 156 e The Button Font propert
175. d to display the value embedded in the graph if such a value 1s enabled via the Show Value property The second page contains the label and formatting information for the field der Rich Yertical Bar Graph Properties x Properties Format Data Label Label Text ankLeve Translate Minimum value Y General s Per Format Maximum value General s Per Format Data Format Number Base Decimal Sign Mode Unsigned Digits Before DP 5 Digits After DP 0 Leading Zeros Yes a Group Digits No Prefix Mone Translate Suffix Mone Translate cor The properties shown are as described for an integer tag and you are thus referred to the earlier section of the manual that refers to Data Tags for more information Note that the existence of this primitive explains why one must enter minimum and maximum values for formulae when such tags can never be the subject of data entry If such limits were not defined how would Crimson know how to scale the bar THE SYSTEM PRIMITIVES view and accept active alarms It will always take up the whole of the display EH The Alarm Viewer primitive is used to provide the operator with a method to width but can be restricted to less than the full height if required The Alarm Ticker primitive scrolls through the active alarms in the system It E takes up a single line and the whole of the display width It does not allow the operator to accept the
176. dd 17 CONFIGURING THE LINK aaa 17 VERIFYING THE USB LINK 17 SETTING THE IP ADDRESS i ctensaatvecacedecieancere ceanceseveaese ducuarau duce eneedeceaneedecsneneecestundsunscuneunetancienewantucesusn 18 SENDING THE DATABASE aora IT do 18 EXTRACTING DATABASES tii bd 18 MOUNTING THE COMPACT REAS Hispasonic acapara 19 FORMATTING THE COMPACTAS a wen eee 20 SIDA AIN tases 20 USING THE MUA TO Rara marcara 20 UPDATING VTA COMPACTFLASH Masia al olaa 21 GURU MEDITATION CODESSarsiaa ainia 22 CONFIGURING COMMUNICATIONS cccoocoococooonoonononnnonnn nn 2d SERIAL PORT USAGE surtron en O 23 SELEGHING A PROTOCOL macanan a a NEN 24 PROTOCOL OPTION Santi 24 WORKINGAMITH DEVICES 30d alada ein 25 REVISION 12 PAGE 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS CRIMSON USER MANUAL ETHERNET CONFIGURATION atocrerida ida 25 IPPARAMETER S A EA 26 ARON G oe eS 26 PHYSICAL TAYER ideda a E a a E A N 26 REMOTE UPDATE a a a a a a a E E E 26 PROTOCOL SELECTION E EE aa eee aera araEnS 26 SIAVE PROTOCOLS zs aE NEAN A AA AENA EEA ANS 27 SELECTING THE PROTOCOL raro a E tet ecuedeenetondecte eeeeanetendenteeeees 28 ADDING GATEWAY BLOCKS autirdattadadaaddadade 28 ADDING ITEMS TOA BLOCK costado onin EEEE 29 ACCESSING INDIVIDUAL DIS renea anaE EA AEE EEEE EROE 29 PROTOCOL CONVERSION austin A ANES 30 MASTERAND SLAVE e 30 MASTERAND MA TR a a a a E 30 WHICH WAY AROUND foarren oniran A AAE EAA OEA OAA 31 DATA TRANSFORMATIO Nucia na 31 NOTES FOR EDIC USE Sade ao is 31 ADVANCED COMMUNICATIO
177. dis non zero and a character matching end is received e timeout is non zero and that period passes without a character being received e length is non zero and that many characters have been received The function then returns the characters received not including the start or end byte This function is used together with Raw Port drivers to implement custom protocols using Crimson s programming language It replaces the RYOP functionality found in Edict FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE Frame PortInput 1 REVISION 12 13 100 200 PAGE 349 PORTPRINT PORT STRING CRIMSON USER MANUAL PORTPRINT PORT STRING Ene The raw port to be written to The text string to be transmitted DESCRIPTION Transmits the text contained in string to the port indicated by port The port must be configured to use a raw driver such as the raw serial port driver or either of the raw TCP IP drivers The data will be transmitted and the function will return The port driver will handle handshaking and control of transmitter enable lines as required FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE PortPrint 1 ABCD PAGE 350 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE PORTREAD PORT PERIOD PORTREAD PORT PERIOD int The raw port to be read int The time to wait in milliseconds DESCRIPTION Attempts
178. e Operation Goto Page bi Mo Action y User Defined Change Integer Value Ramp Integer Value Show As Play Tune Action Control Enable General TRUE Edit Remote Enabled Set s Defaults The drop down list is used to select the action mode each of which is described below ENABLING ACTIONS If you want to make a particular action dependent on some condition being true enter an expression for that condition in the Enable field for the action in question This expression may reference a flag tag directly or may use any of the comparison or logical operators defined in the Writing Expressions section If you need more complex logic such that one of several actions is performed based on more complex decision making configure the primitive in user defined mode and use it to invoke a program that implements the required logic In addition the Remote property can be used to enable or disable this action via the web server s virtual panel facility In order for remote access to be allowed the Enable expression must evaluate to a non zero value and the Remote property must be set to Enabled ACTION DESCRIPTIONS The sections below describe each available type of action When each type is selected the Action Details portion of the action dialog box will change to show the available options PAGE 124 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING A COLOR USER INTERFACE ACTION DESCRIPTIONS THE GOTO P
179. e as Crimson will poll each device in turn rather than talking to both devices at the same time It will however conserve Ethernet protocols allowing more complex applications without running out of resources SLAVE PROTOCOLS For master protocols ie those where the G3 initiates communication there is no further configuration required under the Communications icon For slave protocols ie those where the G3 receives and responds to remote requests however the process is slightly more complex as you must also indicate what data you wish to expose for remote access REVISION 12 PAGE 27 SLAVE PROTOCOLS CRIMSON USER MANUAL PAGE 28 SELECTING THE PROTOCOL As with master protocols the first stage 1s to select the protocol for the communications port that you wish to use The example below shows the G3 s RS 232 port configured for operation with the Modbus ASCII Slave protocol m Driver Selection Programming Port E RS 232 Comms Port Modbus ASCII Slave Driver my PLCI RS 485 Comms Port Driver Settings Drop Number 0 m Port Settings Baud Rate 9600 hd Data Bits Eight Stop Bits ne Parity Note that a single device has been automatically created for the protocol In the case of master protocols this represents the remote device that the G3 will access In this case though the device represents the Modbus slave that the G3 will itself embody This means tha
180. e AND operator must already be zero While this property makes little difference in the examples given above if the left hand or right hand expressions call a program or make a change to a data value this behavior must be taken into account CHOOSING VALUES PAGE 220 You may find situations where you want to select between two values be they integers floating point values or strings depending on the value of some condition For example you may wish to set a motor s speed equal to 500 rpm or 2000 rpm based on a flag tag This operation can be performed using the operator which is unique in that it takes three arguments as shown in the example below OPERATOR PRIORITY EXAMPLE Selection Group 13 Fast 2000 500 This example will evaluate to 2000 if Fast is true and 500 otherwise The operator can be thought to be equivalent to the IF function found in applications such as Microsoft Excel http www redlion net g3 WRITING EXPRESSIONS MANIPULATING BITS MANIPULATING BITS Crimson also provides operators to perform operations that do not treat integers as numeric values but instead as sequences of bits These operators are known as bitwise operators AND OR AND XOR These three bitwise operators each produce a result in which each bit is defined to be equal to the corresponding bits in the values on the operator s left hand and right hand sides combined using a specific truth table SHIFT OPERATORS
181. e No Firewall property is used to turn off the firewall protection that is otherwise provided for dial out connections This protection prevents incoming connections from being made to this interface and prevents the G3 from sending certain diagnostic packets that might either provide a hacker with information about the system or might be used by an attacker to keep a connection active in the absence of actual data transfer If you are connecting directly to the Internet by means of this connection you should not normally turn off the firewall The firewall should be disabled only for connections to corporate networks or to other controlled environments e The Connection Type property is used to indicate whether you want this connection to be permanently maintained or whether you want it to be established automatically when an attempt is made to transfer data to hosts that are reachable via this interface If you select an on demand connection you must PAGE 44 http www redlion net g3 ADVANCED COMMUNICATIONS WORKING WITH MODEMS specify the timeout after which the link will be terminated 1f no packets have been transmitted by the G3 e The Logon Username and Logon Password properties are used to define the credentials that will be passed to the remote server when attempting to initialize this connection The username is not case sensitive while the password is Crimson s PPP implementation will ask its peer to use CHAP authentication to
182. e a band equal in width to twice the alarm s Value and centered on the tag s Setpoint e The Value property is used to define either the absolute value at which the alarm will be activated or the deviation from the setpoint value The exact interpretation depends on the event mode as described above e The Hysteresis property is used to prevent an alarm from oscillating between the on and off states when the process 1s near the alarm condition For example for an absolute high alarm the alarm will become active when the tag exceeds the alarm s value but will only deactivate when the tag falls below the value by an amount greater than or equal to the alarm s hysteresis Remember that the property always acts to maintain an alarm once the alarm is activated and not to modify the point at which the activation occurs e The remainder of the properties are as described for the Alarms tab of flag tags THE TRIGGERS TAB The Triggers tab of an integer variable or formula contains the following properties dar Untitled File Crimson 2 0 steresis y General foo Eat 0 ms PLC1 D0101 1 Triggers Alarm 2 Alarm 1 Format Data Disabled y w Genera REVISION 12 PAGE 79 EDITING MULTI TAGS CRIMSON USER MANUAL e The Trigger Mode property is as described for the Alarm tabs e The Delay property is as described for a flag tag s Alarms tab e The Action property is used to indicate what action shoul
183. e able to read and write data items exposed via this block ADDING TEMS TO A BLOCK Once the block has been created and 1ts size defined entries appear in the left hand pane of the window to represent each of the registers that the block exposes to remote access When one of these entries is selected the right hand pane shows a list of available data items comprising both tags from within your database and data registers from any master communications devices that you have configured t RS 232 Comms Port Modbus ASCII Slave PLCI X 40002 Tank2 X 40003 Tank3 7 Not Mapped X 40004 Tank4 X 40005 X 40006 X 40007 RS 485 Comms Port over caps yum To indicate that you want a particular register within your gateway block to correspond to a particular data item simply drag that item from the right hand pane to the left hand pane dropping it on the appropriate gateway block entry The example above shows how the first four registers in the block have been mapped to tags called Tank1 through Tank4 indicating that accesses to 40001 through 40004 should be mapped to the respective variables ACCESSING INDIVIDUAL BITS De elr7ivax s EE Block 1 X 40001 Tanki Not Mapped X 40008 RS 485 Comms Port Close over caps yum If your application requires it you can expand individual elements within a Gateway Block to their constituent bits an
184. e alarm s Value The value of tag is not equal to the alarm s Value e The Value property is used to define the comparison data for the alarm e The remainder of the properties are as described for the Alarms tab of flag tags THE TRIGGERS TAB The Triggers tab of a multi variable or formula contains the following properties EA AN M Trigger One Trigger Mode SA Value Y General 2 Edit Delay O ms Action GotoPage Page1 M Trigger Two Trigger Mode Disabled y ale Genera Y MotorFail Triggers alarm 2 Alarm 1 Format Data PAGE 84 over CAPs NUM The Trigger Mode property 1s as described for the Alarm tabs The Delay property is as described for a flag tag s Alarms tab The Action property is used to indicate what action should be performed when the trigger is activated Refer to the Writing Actions section for a description of the syntax used to define the various actions that Crimson supports http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING DATA TAGS EDITING REAL TAGS You will recall that real tags represent a single precision floating point value All the tabs displayed for real tags are exactly the same as those displayed for integer tags with the exception that data entered for items such as the value and hysteresis properties of alarms and triggers may contain decimals You are thus referred to the sections on integer tags You will notice some selections for
185. e command will create a Crimson database image file with a CDI extension It will also save a copy of the current G3 firmware to a file with a BIN extension The image file must be given the name DBASE CDI and both it and the BIN file must be placed in the root directory of a CompactFlash card To update a G3 panel power down the unit insert the CompactFlash card bearing the two files and reapply power to the unit The G3 s boot loader will first check whether it needs to upgrade the unit s firmware and once this process has REVISION 12 PAGE 21 GURU MEDITATION CODES CRIMSON USER MANUAL been completed the Crimson runtime application will load the database stored on the card The CompactFlash card can then be removed or left in place as required GURU MEDITATION CODES PAGE 22 If a problem with the Crimson runtime application within the G3 operator panel results in the panel being reset the condition that caused the fault will be logged When the panel restarts this information will be displayed in the form of a Guru Meditation Code A typical code will have the format 03 2004 1BE4 205 The message can be accepted by pressing the F1 key at which point the terminal will resume normal operation Note that communications data logging and the web server are still active when the GMC is displayed only the user interface is interrupted This means that system disruption 1s minimized and functions such as protocol conversion contin
186. e made your selection use the Align command on the Arrange menu to display the following dialog box Align to Reference Object Ea O left Center Right Vertical None Top Middle Bottom Operation ie Move Size cne The Horizontal and Vertical settings can be used to indicate what type of alignment is to be performed while the Operation setting indicates whether the primitives should be resized or moved to achieve the desired result As an example in Move mode selecting Left for Horizontal will align the left hand edges of all the primitives with the left hand edge of the reference primitive Similarly selecting Middle for vertical will align the primitives so that the horizontal line through the center of each are aligned with the same line through the center of the reference primitive In Size mode the edge alignment operations work by growing the non reference primitives in order to achieve the desired results while the center alignment operations work by changing the height or width of the primitives to make them match the reference primitive You may want to experiment with Size mode to get a better idea of its operation SPACING PRIMITIVES If you have a number of primitives that you wish to space equally on the page you may use the Space Equally Vertical or Space Equally Horizontal commands on the Arrange menu The commands work on the currently selected primitives and attempt to reallocate the free
187. e modem is being initialized If the connection remains in this state there are probably errors in the init strings being sent to the modem The link is idle GSM modems will return a number at the end of the string to indicate signal strength The next table explains how to interpret these values The modem is sending SMS messages or polling the modem to see if new SMS message are available If SMS messaging is enabled for a modem you will see this state appear for a short period every five seconds CONNECTING The modem is establishing a connection This state typically appears only for client connections and indicates that a call is being placed LISTENING The modem is waiting for a call This state appears only for server connections Note that GSM modems will also return an IDLE state while waiting for a call in order to show signal strength ANSWER The modem is answering a call and trying to negotiate the Baud rate for the connection This state appears only for server connections If the connection is established the modem will enter the CONNECTED state REVISION 12 PAGE 47 WORKING WITH MODEMS CRIMSON USER MANUAL CONNECTED The modem has established a connection This state will persist for only a short time as the LCP negotiation process will begin after a small delay NEG LCP The connection is negotiating LCP options This process decides on a set of link protocol settings that are acceptable to both the client and
188. e now ready refer to the chapter User Interface above to finish this Quick Start tutorial REVISION 12 PAGE 13 MAIN SCREEN ICONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL CRIMSON BASICS To run Crimson select the Crimson icon from the Red Lion Controls folder on the Programs section of your Start Menu The main C2 screen will appear showing the icons that are used to configure the various aspects of the operator panel s behavior File Crimson 2 0 File Edit View Link Help DSa shax over caps num The software 1s designed such that the first three icons are the only ones required for the majority of simple applications The remainder of the icons provide access to the terminal s more advanced features such as programming data logging and the G3 s web server MAIN SCREEN ICONS PAGE 14 The sections below provide an overview of each icon in turn COMMUNICATIONS This icon is used to specify which protocols are to be used on the G3 s serial ports and on the Ethernet port Where master protocols are used ie protocols by which the G3 initiates data transfer to and from a remote device you can also use this icon to specify one or more devices to be accessed Where slave protocols are used ie protocols by which the G3 receives and responds to requests from remote devices or computer systems you can specify which data items are to be exposed for read or write access You can also use this icon to move data between o
189. e occurs after a download with a new version of C2 interrupted before the database was downloaded The database in the device is corrupted or there are no databases in the device No communication with target device The tag on the screen is not linked correctly Not enough digits before the decimal point to show the number For example data is 1000 5 and format is three digits before the decimal point and one after The tag format is not correct Incorrect tag type Incorrect data mapping Incorrect primitive on the display Data received is not what s expected For example bytes reversed in the word Download the database from Crimson again Download a database from Crimson See Serial Communication or Ethernet Communication Check the tag mapping making sure the target device PLC etc register is correct Check the primitive Data Source in the user interface in case the word WAS is displayed Re link the tag in this case Increase the number of digits before the decimal point in the tag format Change the decimal point position in the tag format Check if the tag type corresponds to the data type Is the data a floating point number and thus the tag a real P1 symbol and not an integer X symbol Check if the tag is accessing the correct target device register Check if the primitive corresponds to the tag type For example primitive is a Text Integer s
190. e of 1 will start motor A a value of 2 or 3 will start motor B and a value of 4 will start motor C Any value which is not explicitly listed will start motor D Things to note about the syntax are the use of curly brackets around the case statements the use of break to end each conditional block the use of two sequential case statements to match more than one value and the use of the optional default statement to indicate an action to perform if none of the specified values is matched by the value in the controlling expression If this syntax looks too intimidating a series of if statements can be used instead to produce the same results but with marginally lower performance and somewhat less readability LOCAL VARIABLES Some programs use variables to store intermediate results or to control one of the various loop constructs described below Rather than defining a tag to hold these values you can declare what are known as local variables using the syntax shown below a Declare local integer a float Declare local real Yp CString C Declare local string c Local variables may optionally be initialized when they are declared by following the variable name with and the value to be assigned Variables that are not initialized in this manner are set to zero or an empty string as appropriate Note that local variables are truly local in both scope and lifetime This means that they cannot be referenced o
191. e or the data modification operators described in the Writing Actions section or may run a program e The Keypad Type property is used to select the type of keypad to be displayed when the value is edited By default a full keypad with raise and lower keys will be shown The options available will vary according to the primitive type e The Keypad Style property is used to override the default color scheme associated with the popup keypad and to substitute a high contrast version in its place This is used in low visibility applications such as direct sunlight The third page varies according to the primitive in question and displays the same information as the Format tab of the associated tag type Different sections of the page will be enabled according to the settings provided for the Get Label and Get Format properties The example below shows the Format tab for an integer text primitive cor Integer Text Properties xj Properties Data Entry Format Data Label Label Text ankleve Translate Minimum Value General PO Edit Maximum Value General PO Edit Data Format Number Base Decimal y Sign Mode unsigned y Digits Before DP osl Digits After DP HZ Leading Zeros Yes E Group Digits Flo Prefix None Translate Suffix None Translate Cancel Set As Defaults As can be seen the properties shown are indeed identical to those shown on the Format tab of an integer tag
192. e set of data will be recorded at the time of change the expression has to return to false and back to true again to save another set Each set is a line of data in a CSV file e The Update Rate property is used to indicate how often Crimson will take a sample of the data items to be logged The fastest sample rate 1s one second but note that using such a high rate will produce very large amounts of data All of the tags in the log will be sampled at the same rate e The Each File Holds property is used to indicate how many samples will be included in each log file When this many samples have been recorded a new log file will be created using a different name Typically this value 1s set such that each log file contains a sensible amount of data For example the log shown above 1s configured to use a new log file each day e The Retain At Most property is used to indicate how many log files will be kept on CompactFlash before the oldest file is deleted This property should be set so as to allow whatever is consuming the logged information to extract the data from the G3 panel before the information is deleted The log shown above is configured to retain a week s worth of data e The Log Enable property is used to allow or inhibit logging If the entered expression is true logging will be enabled If the expression is false logging will be disabled If no expression is entered logging will be enabled by default e The Log Trigger prop
193. e to proceed because it also finds that required data is not available Here Crimson will wait up to thirty seconds for the data to arrive If it does not the action will not be performed and a TIMEOUT message will be displayed for the operator This timeout mechanism is required to avoid problems should a communications link become severed NOTES FOR EDICT USERS PAGE 114 Users of Red Lion s Edict 97 software should note e Pages no longer have text and graphic layers as all primitives are graphical in nature This means that the concept of a page format is similarly redundant e Page categories have been replaced with system primitives Where Edict would use an entire page for its alarm viewer for example the corresponding system primitive can be used to allocate as little or as much of the display as is required e The actions defined by double clicking a key replace the global and local event maps If your application used more than one row per event you will most likely need to use a program to implement the required logic e Events such as comms update complete and one second tick have been removed as most of the actions performed by such events can now be handled via other mechanisms For example comms update complete was often used to move data between devices This can now be performed using the protocol conversion functionality of the Communications window Also these events were often misused and lead to the crea
194. e user interface will result in the unit s clock changing to take account of the new settings For example enabling Daylight Savings Time will move the clock forward one hour while disabling it will move it back A typical database will only need to expose UseDST for editing by REVISION 12 PAGE 55 CONFIGURING THE SYNCHRONIZATION MANAGER FTP CRIMSON USER MANUAL the user and even this may not be necessary 1f the Linked DST facility described above is in use CONFIGURING THE SYNCHRONIZATION MANAGER FTP PAGE 56 Crimson s synchronization manager can be used to exchange files between the G3 and a server Therefore log files can be synchronized on a server computer either automatically or on demand The synchronization manager 1s configured in the Sync Manager icon under Services in the Communications window The communication standard used for the exchange is FTP FTP stands for File Transfer Protocol It 1s used on TCP IP networks to exchange files between devices An exchange 1s always made in a client server way 1 e a client connects to a server to access information by uploading transfer to the server or downloading transfer from the server files The G3 FTP support 1s a client and therefore has to connect to a server for the function to work Numerous FTP servers are available on the market some free others at a charge Windows IIS is an example of an FTP server embedded in the OS SYNCHRONIZATION MANAGER SETTINGS
195. e viewer for each division Selecting a value of one for this property disables it Note that each tag displayed is scaled according to its own format properties and that different tags may thus have different scaling You ideally should define gridlines that make sense for all tags that are to be shown and ensure that you label the display page to let the operator know what scaling you have selected e The Minor Data Gridlines property is used to indicate into how may minor divisions each major division should be divided A thin line will be drawn across the viewer at each division Selecting a value of one for this property disables it e The Show Divisions property is used to indicate whether gridlines should be drawn for the time axis The major and minor divisions to be used are chosen by the system according to the current zoom level The Cursor page is used to activate the history cursor and define its color The cursor is useful in combination with the Show Data property to view the value of a trace at a specific time When displayed on the viewer the cursor indicates its time position for reference REVISION 12 PAGE 161 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL THE GENERAL BUTTON PRIMITIVE The properties of the general button are defined using four tabs The General Button primitive displays an animated button that can respond to user input Several different button styles are provided including one that uses custom images fr
196. eal String Variable Mappings Export to File Import from File Maintenance Validate All Tags Event Logging Send to Raw Port no y Save to CompactFlash no y New File Every Retain At Most 7 files mare TAG FAMILIES The three families of tags are listed below e Variables represent a single data item within the terminal Variables may be mapped to PLC registers and may be configured as retentive in which case their values will be kept in memory even when the operator panel is powered off The defining characteristics of a variable are that they contain a single item and that it is in theory possible to write to this item even if in practice the variable is REVISION 12 PAGE 61 ALL ABOUT TAGS PAGE 62 CRIMSON USER MANUAL configured as read only If this seems confusing read on and you ll see how this contrasts to a formula which does not have this property Formulae represent derived values They are a combination of other data items typically combined using one or more math operations For example a formula might represent the sum of two tank levels While a formula can be set to be equal to the contents of a PLC register it 1s not truly mapped to that register in that it can never be written to and thus cannot be considered to be equivalent to that register The need for this restriction is obvious if you consider a formula such a Ta
197. eanacsuacds 142 THE TIME AND DATE PRIMITIVE uunsssasnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 142 THE RICH BAR PRIMIFIVES a a nri 144 MAHE RICH SLDER PRIMITIVES castidad a a AA ia 146 THE ALARM VIEWER PRIMITIVE e cede 148 THE ALARM TICKER PRIMITIVE a a dedo 153 THE EVENT VIEWER PRIMITIVEsartoridi did edi tance edo dato weave asco cane ch 155 THE FILE VIEWER PRIM DID Es 07 AS E E A 155 THE REMOTE DISPLAY PRIMITIVE ii A AAA AAA A AAA Ai 156 THE CAMERA PRIME AAA 157 THE TRENDING PRIMITIVES sueros arcada bt abia beta bal addon 158 THE GENERAL BUTTON PRIMITIVE vin cdas 162 THE RICH BUTTON PRIMITIVE qeda ada 163 THE SELECTOR PRIMITIVES cocaina iaa aaa 165 THE PICTURE PRIMITIVE 0d O A aeueN as 167 THE CF IMAGE PE ese eo led 171 TAE DIAL GAUGE PRIMIENVES oda ndne 172 SYSTEM PRIMITWES vial 174 THE TOUCH TEST PRIMIFIVE Said ias a aiat 175 THE TOUCH CALIBRATION PRIM WE ia 175 DEFINING PAGE PROPERTIES sssseeeeeececcccccccccccccaccacaeaeaaaacaaaaaaaanaaaaaanaarrsrrrerngggs 176 DEFINING SYSTEM ACTIONS ccccccccccccccccnnsencucccccceeeecnnnnnanannceeessetettnnnnnnnnnnnannegs 177 ADDITIONAL SYSTEM PROPERTIES ida 177 SELECTING LANGUAGES ads 179 CHANGING THE LANGUAGE Sui did 180 SIMULATING LANGUAGES IN CRIMSON cccccccccccccccesscccccccccceeeennnnnsnaaceeeestttttsnnngnas 180 DEFINING KEY BEHAVIOR asassassannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnunnnnnunnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnno 181 BLO
198. ecific and are documented separately FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Refer to comms driver application notes for specific examples REVISION 12 PAGE 271 DISABLEDEVICE DEVICE CRIMSON USER MANUAL DISABLEDEVICE DEVICE ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION int The device to be disabled DESCRIPTION Disables communications for the specified device The number to be placed in the device argument to identify the device can be viewed in the status bar of the Communications category when the device name is highlighted FUNCTION TYPE The function is passive RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE DisableDevice 1 PAGE 272 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE DISPOFF DISPOFF ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Turns backlight to display off FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE Dispoff REVISION 12 PAGE 273 DISPON DISPON ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION PAGE 274 CRIMSON USER MANUAL DESCRIPTION Turns backlight to display on FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE DispOn http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE DRVCTRL PORT FUNCTION DATA OR VALUE DRVCTRL PORT FUNCTION DATA OR VALUE int The index of the driver to be controlled in The requir
199. ect X3 Sets result codes AT amp CI amp DO amp HO amp IO amp RI amp SO C1 Normal CD operations D0 DTR override amp HO Flow control disabled 10 software flow control disabled amp R1 Modem ignores RTS amp SO DSR override always on This string can be modified within C2 ATS0 052 43812 25 SO 0 auto answer disabled S2 43 set Escape Character to 43 decimal S12 25 Sets the duration in fiftieths of a second of the guard time for the escape code sequence TROUBLESHOOTING MODEM COMMUNICATION The PPP and Modem Client and PPP and Modem Server protocols provide a Log File property to log communication exchange with the modem to a file on the CompactFlash card This file is used for debugging purpose during initial modem setup Be sure to disable this feature once the correct modem configuration sequence has been established REVISION 12 PAGE 49 OPC COMMUNICATION CRIMSON USER MANUAL The codes in the table below are modem replies recorded in the file eto er onoare OO a ha O o one OPC COMMUNICATION PAGE 50 Crimson s OPC support provides two different features First with the combination of Red Lion s software OPCWorx OPC becomes a standard and user friendly communication tool to exchange data with SCADA packages Second OPC can be used as a data exchange protocol between Red Lion Controls products such as G3s Modular Controllers and Data Station Plus series The protocol is t
200. ed function to be executed DESCRIPTION This function is used to perform a special operation on a communications driver The number to be placed in the port argument to identify the driver is the port number to which the driver is bound The specific action to be performed is indicated by the function parameter the values of which will depend upon the driver itself The data parameter may be used to pass addition information to the driver Most drivers do not support this function Where supported the operations are driver specific and are documented separately FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Refer to comms driver application notes for specific examples REVISION 12 PAGE 275 EMPTYWRITEQUEUE DEV CRIMSON USER MANUAL EMPTYWRITEQUEUE DEV ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION dev int The device number DESCRIPTION Empties the writing queue for the device identified with the argument dev This will remove any pendant writes to the device from the queue therefore the removed information will not be transferred to the device Note The device number can be identified in Crimson s status bar when a device is selected in Communication FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE EmptyWriteQueue 1 PAGE 276 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE ENABLEDEVICE DEVICE ENABLEDEVICE DEVICE ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPT
201. ed otherwise in the text operators within a group are evaluated left to right The default order of evaluation can be overridden by using parentheses TYPE CONVERSION Normally Crimson will automatically decide when to switch from evaluating an expression in integer math to evaluating it using floating point For example if you divide an integer PAGE 218 http www redlion net g3 WRITING EXPRESSIONS COMPARING VALUES value by a floating point value the integer will be converted to floating point before the division is carried out However there will be some situations where you want to force a conversion to take place For example suppose you are adding together three integers that represent the levels in three tanks and then dividing the total by the tank count to obtain the average level If you use an expression such as Tank1 Tank2 Tank3 3 then your result may not be as accurate as you demand as the division will take place using integer math and the average will not contain any decimal places To force Crimson to evaluate the result using floating point math the simplest technique 1s to change the 3 to 3 0 thereby forcing Crimson to convert the sum to floating point before the division is performed A slightly more complex technique is to use syntax such as float Tank1 Tank2 Tank3 3 This invokes what is known as a type cast on the term in parentheses manually converting it to floating point Type casts may also be u
202. ed that the connecting device is http www redlion net g3 ADVANCED COMMUNICATIONS WORKING WITH MODEMS friendly so no effort will be made to filter out optional packets that might result in the link staying active for long periods Note that even if you want a permanent connection you must enter a suitable timeout so as to allow the detection of dead links This implies that so called permanent connections may still drop on occasions but since the client will immediately reestablish the link this 1s not an issue e The Additional Init string is used with non direct links and provides a series of AT commands to be used to initialize the modem The initial AT prefix is not required Several commands may be combined by simply placing one after the other The exact string that will be required for your modem is dependent upon its internal software so if you contact Technical Support for assistance be sure to have exact make and model information available e The SMS Support property is used to enable Short Message Service messaging when using a GSM modem In order for SMS messaging to operate properly you will also have to enable the SMS Transport using the Mail icon in the Communications window as described above e The Logon Username and Logon Password properties are used to define the credentials that the remote client must provide in order to be allowed to connect to this device The username is not case sensitive while the password i
203. eeaxiar t 4 4 pr lt Tags F Multivar f MultiForm f Multiarray Y Flagi Y Flag2 Y Flag3 Formula Data Tag Value Y General ag1 Flag2 Flag3 3 2 1 0 Simulation 0 Triggers Alarm 2 Alarm 1 colors Format Data To include this tag in a custom web page use 1 OVER cars NUM e The Tag Value property is used to specify the value represented by this tag It is typically set to a combination of other tags linked together using math operators In the example above the tag is set equal to a value of one two or three depending on the state of three different flags For more information on the operator used in this example refer to the Writing Expressions section e The Simulation property is a described for flag tags THE DATA TAB ARRAYS The Data tab of a multi array contains the following properties cerUntitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 File Edit View Tag Link Help Ose 4 Z i bmaxla t 4 4 pr Data Tags ES Tags Multivar p Array Data f MultiForm Mapping f Multiarray Y Flagi Elements 16 integers Y Flag2 Y Flag3 Access Read and Write y Storage Non Retentive v Simulation a m Communications Read Policy Read Adaptively y Read Ahead 3 registers Read Behind 3 registers Actions On Write None To include this tag in a custom web page use 2 over cars NUM All of t
204. efault Gateway making 1t the route for any packets for IP addresses that do not match the network defined for the Ethernet port The SMTP server 1s configured as 24 104 0 39 resulting in a dial out connection when an attempt is made to send a message http www redlion net g3 ADVANCED COMMUNICATIONS WORKING WITH MODEMS IP ROUTING The Ethernet icon in the Communications window contains a property called ZP Routing If this facility 1s enabled incoming packets from non firewalled modem interfaces will be compared against the IP address and netmask for the Ethernet interface and will be forwarded to that interface should a match occur This facility is most often used with dial in connections and allows IP access to all devices connected to the Ethernet port provided a suitable route is defined by the client CHECKING THE MODEM STATUS In order to help debug modem connections Crimson provides the GetInterfaceStatus function This function takes a single argument which is the numeric index of the required interface Interface zero 1s always the panel s loopback interface Next comes the Ethernet interface if it is enabled such that the first PPP interface is numbered 1 when Ethernet is disabled and 2 when it 1s enabled The function returns a string which can be interpreted according to the following table CLOSED The interface has not yet been initialized This state will only occur for a short time during system start up Th
205. efault location for these drivers 1s C Program Files Red Lion Controls Crimson 2 0 Device When the Hardware Setup Wizard appears choose the Browse option and either point the Wizard at that location or whatever other location you specified during installation of the software It is important that you perform this step correctly or you may have to manually remove the drivers using the Device Manager and repeat the installation once more Windows XP users should note that Crimson s USB drivers have not been digitally signed by Microsoft and you will therefore a dialog offering you the chance to stop the installation You should be sure to select the Continue option to indicate that you do indeed wish to install the drivers http www redlion net g3 QUICK START SELECTING THE HMI QUICK START G3 HMIs are versatile operator interfaces truly requiring a 300 page manual However you ll no doubt want to jump right into programming before reading it in its entirety The following section provides you with enough information to develop a basic working system This quick start is using a G310 color touchscreen HMI with an Allen Bradley PLCs as an example Other HMI setup would be very similar Tutorials can be found on http www redlion net g3features to easily set up other basic features such as protocol conversion Ethernet communication and multiple languages Just click on the All G3 Features Link to get to the selection of features
206. egister name and a closing square bracket An optional device name may be prefixed to the register name and separated by a period The device name need not be specified for registers in the first or only device within the database Examples of this syntax are shown below Bann anne O O D100 Register D100 in first device AB N7 0 Register N7 0 in device AB FX D100 Register D100 in device FX SIMPLE MATH As mentioned above expressions often contain more than one data value with their values being combined mathematically The simplest of these expressions may add a pair of values while a more complex expression might obtain the average of three values These operations are performed using the familiar syntax you will have seen in applications such as Excel The examples below show the basic operations that can be performed Oren Although the examples show spaces surrounding the operators these are not required OPERATOR PRIORITY You will have noticed the Priority column in the above table As you no doubt recall from your algebra classes when several operators are used together they are evaluated in a defined order For example multiplication is always evaluated before addition Crimson implements this ordering by means of what are known as operator priorities with each operator being put in a group and with operators being applied in order from the lowest numbered group to the highest Except where not
207. el work iK Note that some caution is required when mounting the CompactFlash card e When the card is mounted the G3 will periodically inform the PC if data on the card has been modified This means that both the PC and the G3 will suffer performance hits if the card is mounted during data logging operations for longer than necessary e If you write to the CompactFlash card from your PC the G3 will not be able to access the card until Windows releases its lock on the card s contents This may take up to a minute and will restrict data logging operations during that time and prevent access to custom web pages Crimson will use the G3 s RAM to ensure that no data is lost but if too many writes are performed such that the REVISION 12 PAGE 19 USING THE EMULATOR CRIMSON USER MANUAL card is kept locked for four minutes or more data may discarded Note that Windows 98 1s particularly bad at keeping the card locked when there 1s no need for 1t Windows 2000 or Windows XP is thus the operating system of choice when using this feature e You should never attempt to use Windows to format a CompactFlash card that you have mounted via the G3 whether 1t be via Explorer or from the command prompt Windows does not correctly lock the card during format operations and the format may thus be unreliable and lead to subsequent data loss See below for details of how to format a card in a reliable manner FORMATTING THE COMPACT
208. elected as the protocol oxi File Edit View Link Help DS H s ne xX m es a 63 Driver Selection Programming Port RS 232 Comms Port Driver No Driver Selected R5 485 Comms Port 4 Ethernet m Port Settings W Protocol 1 Y Protocol 2 Baud Rater 19200 y g A Data Bits Jeighe z Key Services Stoo Bits Tone 1 Ty OPC Server i FTP Server ga Time Manager n Sync Manager Version 1 01 i Version 1 01 Mitsubishi Electric version 1 01 Version 1 04 MP Electronics MTS Pacific Scientific PLC Direct Koyo PQ Systems Port 2 over caps NUM By doing so a device called PLCT has been created When the communication port is selected the right hand pane displays the communication driver properties for this port e g the parity baud rate G3 address etc You should verify that the driver properties make sense for your application http www redlion net g3 QUICK START COMMUNICATIONS G3 AS A SLAVE To expose data for the master device for read and write access you ll need to create two so called Gateway Blocks one so the master can only get data from the G3 and one so the master can get and change data in the G3 To create a Gateway Block click PLCI and then click the Add Gateway Block button on the right hand pane This creates a single gateway block for mapping data cer Untitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 File Edit View Link
209. elow initializes a pair of local variables and then uses the first to loop through the contents of an array totaling the first ten elements and returning the total value to the caller The architecture of the while loop statement is as follow while condition Action return t The example below shows the same program but rewritten in a compressed form Since the loop statement now controls only a single action the curly brackets have been omitted int i 0 t 0 while i lt 10 t Data it t return t http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING PROGRAMS PROGRAMMING TIPS THE FOR LOOP Y ou will notice that the while loop shown above has four elements 1 The initialization of the loop control variable 2 The evaluation of a test to see if the loop should continue 3 The execution of the action to be performed by the loop 4 The making of a change to the control variable The for loop allows elements 1 2 and 4 to be combined within a single statement such that the action following the statement need only implement element 3 This syntax results in something similar to the FOR NEXT loop found in BASIC and other such languages The architecture of the for loop statement 1s as follow for initialization condition control actionl1 Using this statement the example given above can be rewritten as t i t 0 i lt 10 i t Datal1 return t Y
210. ep requests are not queued so calling the function will immediately override any previous calls For those of you with a musical bent the freq argument is calibrated in semitones On a more serious note the Beep function can be a useful debugging aid as it provides an asynchronous method of signaling the handling of an event or the execution of a program step FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE Beep 60 100 PAGE 254 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE CLEAREVENTS CLEAREVENTS ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Clears the list of events displayed in the event log FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE ClearEvents REVISION 12 PAGE 255 CLOSEFILE FILE CRIMSON USER MANUAL CLOSEFILE FILE ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION re File handle as returned by OpenFile DESCRIPTION Closes a file previously opened in a call to FileOpen FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE CloseFile hFile PAGE 256 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE COMMITANDRESET COMMITANDRESET ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION Pone DESCRIPTION This function will force all retentive tags to be written on the internal flash memory and then will reset the unit NOTE THIS FUNCTION SHOUL
211. ept the alarms REVISION 12 PAGE 153 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL The properties of the alarm ticker are displayed on three tabbed pages The first of these pages 1s shown below cor Alarm Ticker Properties x Properties Time Priority Colors Ticker Format Ticker Colors No Active Alarms C Black and E Lime TEXTO Active Alarm Use Priority Colors ho Active Alarm E white and Red TEXT Accepted Alarm C Black and O Yellow TEXTO Ticker Contents No Active Alarms Shown v Show Alarm Count Yes bl Show Alarm Time Yes Cancel Set As Defaults e The Font property is used to select the font to be used to draw the primitive A fixed pitch font should ideally be used to ensure that the various data fields remain in the correct alignment e The Ticker Colors properties are used to define the foreground and background colors used to display each alarm state The default values should be acceptable for most applications The selection Active Alarm Use Priority Colors can be set to YES in which case the Active Alarm color selection below it will be disabled and color selection based on the tag priority will be enabled on the Priority Colors page e The No Active Alarms property is used to indicate whether a message should be displayed when no alarms are present or whether the bar should be left blank in these circumstances e The S
212. equired FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE Set Tag1 100 REVISION 12 PAGE 367 SETINTTAG INDEX VALUE CRIMSON USER MANUAL SETINTTAG NDEX VALUE ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION PAGE 368 value int The value to be assigned DESCRIPTION This function sets the tag specified by index to the specified value The index can be found from the tag label using the function FindTagIndex This function will only work if the target tag 1s an integer FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE SetIntTag 5 1234 Set the tag of index 5 with value 1234 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE SETLANGUAGE CODE SETLANGUAGE CODE ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION int The language to be selected DESCRIPTION Set the terminal s current language to that indicated by code FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE SetLanguage 1 REVISION 12 PAGE 369 SETNETCONFIG PORT ADDR MASK GATE CRIMSON USER MANUAL SETNETCONFIG POR7 ADDR MASK GATE IOL The index of the Ethernet port Must be zero AE The required IP address for the port ini The required netmask for the port mt The required default gateway for the port DESCRIPTION Overrides the database settings for the Ethernet port The various IP p
213. er Link Help Oeel 4Zimax t sim eo er User Details Real Name John Doe m Credentials Password ASP J Override Existing System Rights I Change Own Password J Change All Passwords FF Maintenance Access m Custom Rights 7 User Right 1 J User Right 3 J User Right 5 J User Right 7 Each user has the following properties e The Real Name property is used to record the user s identity in security logs and in the Security Manager primitive that is used to change passwords from the operator terminal If maximum security is required the user name should not be easily derived from the real name e The Password property is used to specify an initial password for this user The password is case sensitive and comprises alphanumeric characters Note that if the Override Existing box is checked any changes made to this password from the operator panel itself will be overridden when this database is downloaded to the panel http www redlion net g3 USING THE SECURITY SYSTEM SPECIFYING TAG SECURITY e The System Rights properties are used to grant a user the ability to perform certain system actions The properties relating to password changes are self explanatory while the user of Maintenance Mode is described above e The Custom Rights properties are used to grant a user certain rights which may then be used within the database to allow access to groups of tags or display
214. erty 1s then used to indicate which bit within the register is to be accessed by the tag e The Access property is used to specify what sort of data transfers should be performed for a mapped variable You may indicate that data is to be both read and written or just read or written as appropriate Write only tags can be used to avoid unnecessary read operations on data that can only be changed by the terminal They will typically be set to retentive as their value cannot be obtained from the PLC and must therefore be stored by the terminal e The Storage property is used to indicate whether Crimson should allocate FLASH memory within the panel in order to retain the value of the tag during power down Mapped tags that are not write only cannot be set to retentive as their values will in any case be read from the PLC and it does not therefore make sense to waste local storage to retain data that will be overwritten e The Simulation property is used to select the value that Crimson will assign to this tag when displaying it within the display page editor This facility can be useful for documenting databases in that it allows a display page to be configured to represent a particular machine state such that a screen capture can then be pasted into an operator manual or other documentation e The Setpoint properties are used to indicate whether a setpoint will be specified for this tag and what that setpoint will be Setpoints are used by certa
215. erty is used to log a single set of data when the expression changes from false to true REVISION 12 PAGE 195 LOG FILE STORAGE CRIMSON USER MANUAL e The History Buffer property is used to indicate how much RAM should be allocated for the history buffer for this data logger The history buffer is used to support the historical trending user interface primitive and allows the user to scroll backwards to view older data than would otherwise be available No more than a total of 256K should be allocated to all data logs This property is ignored on G303s and other panels that lack the historical trending primitives e The Contents property is used to indicate which tag should be logged The first list shows the selected tags while the second shows those that are available within the database Tags can be added to the log by double clicking them in the right hand list they can be removed by double clicking them in the left hand list or by pressing the Del key while the tag is selected The Up and Down buttons can be used to move tags within the list One day someone may even get around to implementing drag and drop to allow easier manipulation of this list LOG FILE STORAGE PAGE 196 As mentioned above a data log stores its data in a series of files on the Master s CompactFlash card These files are placed in a subdirectory named after the data log with this directory being stored under a root directory entry called LOGS FILENAME FO
216. es have elapsed no data will be lost e Writes to the CompactFlash achieve a much higher level of performance by avoiding the need to continually update the card s file system data structures for every single sample For logs configured to sample at very high data rates the bandwidth of a typical CompactFlash card would not allow data to be written reliably in the absence of such a buffering process Note that because data is not committed to CompactFlash for up to two minutes up to this amount of log data may be lost when the terminal is powered down Further if the terminal is powered down while a write is in progress the CompactFlash card may be corrupted To ensure that such corruption is not permanent the G3 panel uses a journaling system that caches writes to additional non volatile memory within the terminal If the panel detects that a write was interrupted during power down the write will be repeated when power is reapplied thereby reversing any corruption and repairing the CompactFlash card This means that if you want to remove a CompactFlash card from a panel performing data loggin ou must observe the procedure described above with respect to the activity LED and only remove power when the activity has ceased If you are not sure if the terminal was powered down correctly reapply power allow a CompactFlash write sequence to complete and power down according to the correct procedure The card can then be removed safely Si
217. escribed for integer data tags and you are referred to that section for further details SYSTEM PRIMITIVES The sections below describe each system primitive These primitives are used to troubleshoot the interface To insert one of the primitives click Insert and select System as shown below PAGE 174 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING A COLOR USER INTERFACE SYSTEM PRIMITIVES SPUntitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 101 x File Edit View Insert Arrange Transform Page Link Help Do vier x m 5 3 09 m E e m gt e a A ile Viewer Touch Calib N Remote Display THE TOUCH TEST PRIMITIVE This primitive is used to test the operator interface s touch screen Once the primitive is inserted on the display touching the primitive draws a square dot at the position the touch screen was pressed This provides control of the touch screen precision as the dot should appear under the finger If this is not the case please proceed with the touch calibration primitive Double clicking the primitive accesses the format properties to define colors and line format THE TOUCH CALIBRATION PRIMITIVE This primitive is used to calibrate the operator interface s touch screen Once the primitive is inserted on the display and downloaded in the terminal the page with the Touch Calib will display a set of instructions to calibrate the screen It is required that you touch each of the squares shown on the display The primitive will
218. eta FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE yp radius sin theta REVISION 12 PAGE 379 SIRENON CRIMSON USER MANUAL SIRENON ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Turns on the operator panel s internal siren FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE SirenoOn PAGE 380 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE SLEEP PERIOD SLEEP PERIOD ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION int The period for which to sleep in milliseconds DESCRIPTION Sleeps the current task for the indicated number of milliseconds This function is normally used within programs that run in the background or that implement custom communications using Raw Port drivers Calling it in response to triggers or key presses 1s not recommended FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE Sleep 100 REVISION 12 PAGE 381 SQRT VALUE SQRT VALUE ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION PAGE 382 CRIMSON USER MANUAL int float The value to be processed DESCRIPTION Returns the square root of value FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int or float depending on the type of the value argument EXAMPLE Flow Const Sqrt Input http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE STDDEV ELEMENT COUNT STDDEV ELEMENT COUNT ARG
219. ether it should just show the label Since the primitive might be capable of reflecting the state of the underlying data item by means of color alone the actual value may sometimes be omitted e The Get From Tag properties are used to indicate from where the label text the field format and the text colors should be obtained The options presented depend on what was entered for the Value property In each case you may manually enter the data in the appropriate properties or assuming a suitable PAGE 139 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL expression has been defined you may instruct the primitive to get the required information from the underlying data tag e The Flash on Alarm property is used to indicate whether or not you want the text on the G3 s display to flash if the tag entered in the value property is currently in an alarm state This property is not available for string text primitives or for those primitives that have a non tag value defined for the value property e The balance of the properties control the font colors and justification to be used when drawing the primitive These properties require no further explanation The second page 1s only used for fields that are selected for data entry x Properties Data Entry Format Control Enable General I Edit Validate fF General TRUE Edit Actions On Selected None On Deselected Mone On Entry Complete Mone On Entry Error
220. f the panel s sounder is on or false otherwise VARIABLE TYPE integer ACCESS TYPE Read Only CRIMSON USER MANUAL http www redlion net g3 SYSTEM VARIABLE REFERENCE PI PI DESCRIPTION Returns pi as a floating point number VARIABLE TYPE Floating point ACCESS TYPE Read Only REVISION 12 PAGE 239 TIMEZONE CRIMSON USER MANUAL TIMEZONE DESCRIPTION Returns the Time Zone in hours from 12 to 12 Using the Link Send Time command in Crimson will set the unit time and time zone to the computer s values Changing the Time Zone afterwards will increment or decrement the unit time Note TimeZone can only be viewed or changed if the Time Manager is enabled VARIABLE TYPE integer ACCESS TYPE Read Write PAGE 240 http www redlion net g3 SYSTEM VARIABLE REFERENCE TIMEZONEMINS TIMEZONEMINS DESCRIPTION Returns the Time Zone in minutes from 720 to 720 Using the Link Send Time command in Crimson will set the unit time and time zone to the computer s values Changing the Time Zone afterwards will increment or decrement the unit time Note TimeZoneMins can only be viewed or changed if the Time Manager is enabled VARIABLE TYPE integer ACCESS TYPE Read Write REVISION 12 PAGE 241 USEDST CRIMSON USER MANUAL UseDST DESCRIPTION Returns the unit daylight saving time state This variable will add an hour to the unit time 1f set to true Note UseDST can only be v
221. fine the background color of the primitive and whether or not an outline should be drawn around its outer edge The Colors tab defines the colors of the various chart elements for this graph cor Edit Graph Properties f x Format Colors Data Points Fill Style olid Colo Fill Color i oF Fixe Fill Color 2 Fixed C Black Pick Data Line Lime Style Solid Color gt Line Color gt Fixed E white Pick Regression Line Line Style Solid Color gt Line Color gt Fixed Jm White Y Pick coca PAGE 134 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING A COLOR USER INTERFACE PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS e The Data Points properties are used to define the pattern and colors used to create the data point markers These properties will only be accessible 1f the chart has these data point markers enabled e The Data Line properties are used to define the format and color of the line drawn between the data points These properties will only be accessible 1f the chart has this line enabled e The Regression Line properties are used to define the format and color of the line drawn as a best fit to the data points These properties will only be accessible if the chart has this line enabled THE SCALE PRIMITIVES The Horizontal Scale primitive displays a scale with a specified number of minor PTT ana major divisions It is often used to label other primitives such as bar graphs The Vertical Scale p
222. for the connection http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING DATA LOGGING NOTES FOR EDICT USERS e num lt num gt can be used to override the phone number for the connection EXAMPLE USAGE As an example the following command line websync poll 10 path C Logs 192 9 200 52 will read the log files for all data logs on the terminal with the IP address of 192 9 200 52 and will store these logs under subdirectories of the C Logs directory WebSync will continue to execute and will repeat the polling process every ten minutes The polling interval must obviously be set such that it is much less than the sampling rate times the number of samples in a file times the number of log files to be retained If this constraint 1s met the directory on the PC will accumulate copies of all the log files from the terminal NOTES FOR EDICT USERS Users of Red Lion s Edict 97 software should note e Logs within Crimson record the time and date of each sample and do not need to store the empty values used by Edict to mark power down periods When a G3 panel is powered down this will show simply as a gap in the log files REVISION 12 PAGE 199 CONFIGURING THE WEB SERVER WEB SERVER PROPERTIES CONFIGURING THE WEB SERVER Crimson s web server can be used to expose various data via the G3 panel s Ethernet port allowing remote access to diagnostic information or to the values recorded by the Data Logger The web server is configured b
223. formatting information and is as described for the general button primitive The third page is used to define the custom images to be used to reflect the button states and 1s as described for the general button except that different images can be specified depending on whether the underlying tag 1s on or off You should again refer to the picture primitive for information on selecting images The fourth page defines a number of properties specific to data entry These are as defined for the flag tag text primitive and you should refer to that section for details The fifth and final page defines the label and format to be used for the primitive and is as defined for flag tags THE SELECTOR PRIMITIVES m The Rich 2 State Selector primitive displays a rotary style switch that can be used to turn on and turn off a flag tag As with all rich primitives most of the configuration data can be obtained from the underlying tag The Rich Multi State Selector primitive displays a rotary style switch that can be used to turn on and turn off a multi tag As with all rich primitives most of the configuration data can be obtained from the underlying tag Each of these primitives displays a circular selector switch within the area used to define the primitive If the primitive is tall enough that the circular switch has sufficient space above it labels can be added to the primitive to allow the various states to be identified REVISION 12 P
224. g s value If a hard sign is selected either a positive or a negative sign will be prefixed as appropriate If a soft sign is selected a positive sign will not be shown but a space will be prefixed instead e The Digits Before DP property is used to indicate how many digits should be shown before the decimal place or if no digits are to be shown after the decimal place to indicate how many digits should be shown in total e The Digits After DP property is used to indicate how many digits should be shown after the decimal place Somewhat obviously decimal places are not supported if a number base other than decimal has been selected e The Leading Zeroes property is used to indicate whether zeros at the beginning of a number should be shown or replaced with spaces e The Group Digits property is used to indicate whether decimal values should have the digits before the decimal place grouped in threes and separated with commas Similar separation is performed on other number bases using groupings and separators appropriate to the selected radix e The Prefix property is used to specify a translatable string that will be displayed in front of the numeric value This is typically used to indicate units of measure e The Suffix property is used to specify a translatable string that will be displayed after the numeric value This is also typically used to indicate units of measure REVISION 12 PAGE 77 EDITING INTEGER TAGS CRIMSON USER
225. g text primitives multiple tabbed pages are used to edit the primitives properties PAGE 146 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING A COLOR USER INTERFACE PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS The first of these pages 1s shown below corRich Yertical Slider Properties xj Properties Data Entry Format Data Source Value Data Entry Yes Type Touch with Buttons Get From Tag J Data Format Line Format Line Style solid Color Line Color Fixed O white Pick Fill Format Fill Style E Solid Color Fill Color 1 gt Fixed Red Pick Fill Color 2 gt Fixed C Gray Pick Cancel Set As Defaults e The Value property is used to indicate from where the data for this primitive should be obtained You may select a tag a register in a communications device or an expression that combines a number of such items e The Data Entry property is used to indicate whether or not you want the user of the operator interface panel to be able to change the underlying value via this primitive Selecting Local will enable data entry but prevent access via the virtual panel facility of the web server For data entry to be enabled the expression entered for the value property must be capable of being changed For example if a formula is entered data entry will not be permitted e The Type property is used to indicate the type of slider to be displayed The three types of sliders all
226. g behind non FTP aware firewalls or when using certain forms of network address translation It is also used when working over a GPRS modem connection e The Keep Alive time is the period for which the FTP connection should be kept alive in case further transfers are required A value of zero will close the connection as soon as the current transfer has been completed Non zero values make for more efficient operation when transferring multiple files e Enable the Record Log File to keep a log of all FTP interactions in the root directory of the CompactFlash card This file can be useful when debugging FTP operations but 1t will tend to degrade performance slightly AUTOMATIC LOG SYNCHRONIZATION The automatic log synchronization feature will enable the G3 to synchronize all log files present on the CompactFlash card with the FTP server on a time base The user does not have to download the log files via the web server anymore but can access them directly on the server or computer the G3 synchronized with To enable Automatic log synchronization check Enable Log File Sync or Untitled File G310 Crimson 2 File Edit View Link Help OSA 4 BX mF e y Settings JV Enable Sync Manager IV Enable Log File Sync M FTP Client ress v Fixed 192 168 200 1 v Fixed 21 ername None O ssword one onnection standard y 0 secs The Log synchronization becomes available and the fo
227. g color pairs are used to show the various alarm states Additional data about the alarms may be displayed if required If you use manual accept alarms in your system you should provide a page that contains an alarm viewer to make sure the operator can accept these alarms You may wish to consider creating a popup page and using it to display the alarm viewer although the size restrictions on popups may cause you to reject this idea The properties of the alarm viewer are displayed on four tabbed pages the first of which is shown below cor Alarm Yiewer Properties 3 x Properties Time Buttons Priority Colors No Active Alarms 1 Black and Lime TEXTO Active Alarm Use Priority Colors ho Active Alarm O white and Red TEXT Accepted Alarm E Black and E Yellow TEXTO Background O white List Contents Show End Markers Show Alarm Time Wes r Mo Active Alarms Text Mo Active Alarms Translate Cancel Set As Defaults e The Font property is used to select the font to be used to draw the primitive A fixed pitch font should ideally be used to ensure that the various data fields remain in the correct alignment e The List Colors properties are used to define the foreground and background colors used to display each alarm state The default values should be acceptable for most applications The selection Active Alarm Use Priority Colors can be set to YES in which
228. ge 1s subsequently selected by the operator Crimson will use the default language in its place Note that Crimson will re configure Windows to use the appropriate Input Method Editor whenever a complex 1e Unicode based language is being edited on a color terminal For information on how to select the languages for the database and on how to configure a key or a menu to select a different language refer to the User Interface section of this manual COLOR PROPERTIES Color properties within tag represent a foreground and a background color that will be used to display the tag s state in textual form Either of these colors can then be used to define the color of other animation primitives The example below shows a color pair being edited Tag On O white y and MM Blue y The drop down list contains the following colors e The sixteen standard VGA colors e The sixteen custom colors defined by the user e Fourteen shades of gray that fall between black and white Not present on G303 and other monochrome devices PAGE 66 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING DATA TAGS EDITING FLAG TAGS The More option at the bottom of the list can be used to invoke the color selection dialog Select Color Basic colors Custom colors Define Custom Colors gt gt Color Cancel Add to Custom Colors This dialog offers several ways of defining a color You can pick from the palette pick from
229. ge return at the end For easier programming refer to WriteFileLine FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE count WriteFile hFile Writing text to file REVISION 12 PAGE 397 WRITEFILELINE FILE TEXT CRIMSON USER MANUAL WRITEFILELINE FILE TEX7 file Ene File handle as required by OpenFile DESCRIPTION Writes a string to the specified file and returns the number of bytes successfully written including the carriage return and linefeed characters that will be appended to each line FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE count WriteFileline hFile Writing text to file PAGE 398 http www redlion net g3 TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING GENERAL This section covers the most common problems encountered while setting up programming or using the product Do not forget to always download in the device after changing settings in Crimson GENERAL PROBLEM Unit screen is blank And PWR LED off And PWR LED on Unit continually cycles on and off Unit cycles power after an operation Touchscreen not accurate CF LED flashing slowly REVISION 12 POSSIBLE CAUSES POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS No power applied to the unit Contrast too low G3 HMI only No primitives on the display Backlight is off Backlight tube is broken Cross references between tags e g Varl uses Var2 as maximum which in tu
230. gt Color Lum 120 Blue er Cancel Add to Custom Colors This dialog offers several ways of defining a color You can pick from the palette pick from the rainbow window or enter the explicit HSL or RGB parameters The dialog also allows custom colors to be added to the palette These will appear whenever the dialog is invoked and will also appear in the drop down list described above Note that not every color that is displayed in the rainbow will be capable of being rendered on the panel s 256 color display Crimson will choose the nearest color within the abilities of the device DEFINING FILL PATTERNS A fill pattern is defined as shown below olid Colo Fill Style E Fill Color 1 Fixed Fill Color 2 Fixed E Black 7 Pick The Fill Style property 1s used to select the hatch or dotted pattern to be used while the two color properties are used to define the colors to be used to form the pattern Each color is defined as explained above The second color 1s not required when a solid fill 1s selected REVISION 12 PAGE 123 DEFINING ACTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL DEFINING ACTIONS Many primitives can be made touch sensitive such that certain actions will occur when they are pressed held down or released To define the actions to be performed by a primitive display the properties of that primitive and select the Action tab corRectangle Properties Ea Formak Action Action Mod
231. h solid Fill Color 2 e The Line Format properties are used to define the border for the primitive THE BAR GRAPH PRIMITIVES mm gt REVISION 12 The Vertical Bar Graph primitive displays a set of values from an array as a number of vertical bars Each value is scaled according to the same minimum and maximum values Between 2 and 400 values can be shown The Horizontal Bar Graph primitive displays a set of values from an array as a number of horizontal bars Each value is scaled according to the same minimum and maximum values Between 2 and 400 values can be shown PAGE 131 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL The properties are accessed by double clicking the primitive cor Yertical Bar Graph Properties x General Estao Edit Count 0 values Minimum General o Edit Maximum General 500 Edit Fill Format Fill Style E sota Color xl Fill Color 1 Fixed E arar rl Fick Fill Color 2 Fixed Meek si Pick Line Format Line Style soidColor Lime Color Fixed Owie e Pick Set s Defaults The Value property 1s used to specify the first array element to be shown e The Count property 1s used to specify the number of values to be shown e The Minimum and Maximum properties are used to specify the scaling e The Fill Format properties are used to define the fill color for the primitive The filled areas of the bars are drawn in the pattern
232. hange every time the program was invoked Imagine what would happen if you say tried to log data from the associated tag and you ll realize that this would not be a good thing Therefore keep programs that return values simple and always consider the context in which they will be run If in doubt avoid doing anything other than simple math and if statements PASSING ARGUMENTS PAGE 186 As also mentioned above program can accept arguments As an example suppose you want to write a program called FindMean to take the average of two values The program could be configured to accept two integer arguments a and b as shown in the example given when defining the purpose of the Arguments property The program would also be configured so as to return a integer value The code within the program would then be defined as return a b 2 Once this program has been created and translated you will be able to enter an expression such as FindMean Tag1 Tag2 to invoke it with the appropriate arguments In this case the expression will be equal to the average of Tag1 and Tag2 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING PROGRAMS PROGRAMMING TIPS PROGRAMMING TIPS The sections below provide an overview of the programming constructions supported by Crimson The basic syntax used is that of the C programming language Note that the aim is not to try and teach you to become a programmer or to master the subtleties of the C language Such topics a
233. he Fill Format properties are used to define the background pattern for the primitive Note that if you want to animate the primitive in any way you should specify some sort of background color so that the system can erase old images e The Line Format properties are used to define the primitive s outline style The final tab of the primitive s properties is used to define an optional action that can be triggered when the operator touches the image You are referred to the earlier section on assigning actions to primitives for more details of how to configure this functionality THE CF IMAGE PRIMITIVE The CF Image primitive is only available via Insert gt Picture gt CF Image menu This primitive is used to display images saved on the CompactFlash card thus saving internal memory on large databases Images have to be converted before their transfer on the CompactFlash card using the makepic utility the primitive is not made to display BMP or other image formats straight from the card Please refer to Converting Images for the CompactFlash below for more information on the makepic utility Moreover converted images HAVE TO be saved under the PICS folder on the CompactFlash card to be available to the primitive The properties of the CF Image primitive are displayed on two tabbed pages the first of which is shown below cor CompactFlash Image Properties xj Format Action Control Image Selection befaat sis Edi
234. he G3 will decide where to send each packet of data INTERFACE SELECTION Each interface has an IP address and a network mask which are used to decide whether to forward packets to that interface For example if the Ethernet interface 1s configured with an IP address of 192 168 1 0 and a network mask of 255 255 255 0 any packets for IP addresses starting with 192 168 1 will be sent to this interface Likewise 1f an on demand modem connection has a remote IP address of 192 168 2 2 and a netmask of 255 255 255 255 sending a packet to address 192 168 2 2 will result in the connection being established DEFAULT ROUTE In addition one single interface may also define a default route which will be used to handle packets that do not specifically match any other interface The method used to configure the route varies according to the interface type as shown in the table below INTERFACE TO DEFINE DEFAULT ROUTE Ethernet Enter a non zero value for the Gateway property Dial In Enter 0 0 0 0 for the Remote Mask Dial Out Select Default Gateway for the Route Type property Note again that only a single interface may define a default route For example a G3 panel may be connected to a number of Ethernet devices using an IP address of 192 168 1 0 and a netmask of 255 255 255 0 with no gateway defined An on demand modem connection may be configured to access an Internet Service Provider so as to send alarm emails Its Route Type 1s set to D
235. he data cannot be read perhaps because a device is offline the program will not execute This mode is typically used with globally referenced programs that consume large amounts of data that would otherwise slow down the communications scan Read But Run Anyway External data will be treated as described for Read Always mode but the program will execute whether or not the data has been read successfully The operator will PAGE 184 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING PROGRAMS ADDING COMMENTS therefore never see the NOT READY message but ifa device 1s offline there is no guarantee that the program s data items contain valid data The Arguments property is used to specify up to five arguments that can be passed into the program Each argument has a name and a data type as specified by the dialog box that 1s displayed when the Edit button 1s pressed xi r Arguments Type Argument 2 Argument 3 Argument Argument 5 OK Cancel Passing arguments to programs 1s described in more detail below ADDING COMMENTS You can add comments to your programs in two ways Firstly you can use the sequence to introduce a comment which will continue for the rest of the current line Secondly you can use the sequence to introduce a single or multi line comment This comment will continue until the sequence appears The sample below shows both commenting styles a single line
236. he drop down window More colors are available at the end of the list or Data Logger Properties j xj Properties Pens Color ja Red Z Set s Defaults REVISION 12 PAGE 159 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL The trend viewer primitive is similar but includes more pages The first page of the properties is shown below for Trend Yiewer Properties x Properties Time Gridlines Fens Cursor Log Options Data Log One Viewer Width a mins Show Channels General All Edit Show Data Mo B Label Format Label Font miss 12x16 Fick Label Color Fixed O white amp f Fick Fill Format Fill Style Misoidcoor Fil Color 1 Fixed Wes sf Fick Fil Color 2 e rived MB Pick Display State Show Item General TRUE Edit Set 45 Defaults e The Data Log property 1s used to select the data log to be displayed If you want the operator to be able to scroll backwards through historical data be sure to enable the log s history buffer Refer to the Data Logging chapter for details e The Viewer Width property is used to define the default amount of data to be shown when the primitive 1s first displayed Note that the operator can zoom in or out as required and may thus choose to show more or less data e The Show Channels and Show Item properties are as defined for the data logger primitive e The Show Data property indicates whe
237. he error If no errors exist a dialog box will be displayed to confirm this fact and the program will be translated into Crimson s internal format for subsequent execution by the operator panel PROGRAM PROPERTIES The various fields at the bottom of the right hand pane are used to edit program properties e The Return Type property is used to indicate whether this program should simply perform a series of actions or whether it will perform a calculation and return REVISION 12 PAGE 183 PROGRAM PROPERTIES CRIMSON USER MANUAL the value of that calculation to the user Programs that return values are described in more detail below e The Run In Background property is used to indicate whether Crimson should walt for the program to complete execution before continuing with processing whatever task invoked the program For example 1f this property 1s set to No running a program in response to a key being pressed will result in a pause in display updates until the program completes Since most programs take very little time to execute this may not even be noticeable If this property is set to Yes display updates will continue immediately and the program will execute at a lower priority in the background Only one background program will run at once so subsequent requests are queued for later execution Note also that programs that return values cannot be run in the background as their return value would then not be available for the c
238. herefore change depending on the tag status The tag colors are defined on each tag in the Data Tags module Please refer to the Configuring Data Tags section of the manual for more details e The Contents property is used to indicate which tags should be included on the page The first list shows the selected tags while the second shows those that are REVISION 12 PAGE 203 USING A CUSTOM WEB SITE CRIMSON USER MANUAL available within the database Tags can be added to the page by double clicking them in the right hand list they can be removed by double clicking them in the left hand list or by pressing the Del key while the tag is selected The Up and Down buttons can be used to move tags within the list Drag and drop operation may one day be implemented to allow easier manipulation of this list USING A CUSTOM WEB SITE While the standard web pages provide quick and easy access to the data within the terminal you may find that your inability to edit their precise formatting leaves your artistic capabilities somewhat frustrated You may thus use the terminal s custom site facility to create a completely custom web site using your favorite third party HTML editor and by inserting certain special sequences and storing the resulting files on the panel s CompactFlash card expose this site using the panel s web server CREATING THE SITE The web site may use any HTML facilities supported by your browser but must not use ASP CGI o
239. hese properties are as described for flag arrays REVISION 12 PAGE 81 EDITING MULTI TAGS PAGE 82 THE FORMAT TAB CRIMSON USER MANUAL The Format tab of a multi tag contains the following properties gar Untitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 File Edit view Tag Link Help OSA YseRXl ar 414 S Data Label Label Text Gia m Item States Default State 0 State 1 State 2 State 3 Triggers Alarm 2 Alarm 1 colors Format Data State 4 State 5 State 6 State 7 Not Usec Navigation al m Management Import from File Export to File To include this tag in a custom web page use 1 over caps rua e The Label Text property is used to specify the label that can be shown next to this tag when including the tag on a display page The label differs from the tag name in that the former can be translated for international applications while the latter remains unchanged and is never shown to the user of the panel The tem States properties are used to define up to eight values that represent different states of the tag Each state has an integer value associated with it and a text string to indicate what should be displayed when the tag holds that value At least two states must be defined but the balance may be left in their default condition if they are not needed The Default property is used to define the text to be displayed if the t
240. his functionality known as raw port access replaces the driver and functions used to support the Roll Your Own Protocol facility within Edict 97 It also replaces the General ASCII Frame protocol by providing a function to perform the parsing operations that the driver previously implemented Note that if you are not using custom ASCII protocols but are instead using the standard drivers provided with Crimson you can skip this section CONFIGURING A SERIAL PORT To use a Serial port in raw mode select the Raw Serial Port driver as shown dar Untitled File Crimson 2 0 m Driver Selection Driver Red Lion Raw Serial Port Edit m Driver Settings On Update l Comms m Port Settings Baud Rate 9600 Data Bits Jeight Stop Bits Jone Parity Clear Port Settings Restore Driver Defaults Add Additional Device BWIERS 232 Comms Po R5 485 Comms thernet The port s Baud rate and other byte format parameters should be configured to indicate the required communications settings and the On Update property should be set to specify the program that will be performing the communication This program will be called continually by the port s communications task CONFIGURING A TCP IP SOCKET To use a TCP IP socket in raw mode select the Raw TCP IP Passive driver as shown Driver Selection t RS 232 Comms Port Raw Serial Driver Red Lion Raw TCP IP Passive Edit
241. his manual This function allows you to specify frame delimiters the required frame length and a frame timeout thereby removing the need to write your own receive state machine As sample program is shown below CString Input int value Lords 4 input t POPE LAPUE LS Azp L37 37 OE7 El valve TextTolnt Input Speed value PortPrint 5 Value is PortPrint 5 IntToText value 10 5 Porterintios SAri To PAGE 228 http www redlion net g3 USING RAW PORTS SENDING DATA The example above listens on a TCP IP socket for a frame that starts with an asterisk and ends with a carriage return It then converts the frame to a decimal value stores this in an integer tag and echoes the value back to the client SENDING DATA To send data on a raw port use the PortWrite Or PortPrint functions as documented in the Function Reference section of this manual The first function sends a single byte while the second function sends an entire string To send numeric values use the IntToText function to convert them into strings NOTES FOR EDICT USERS Users of Red Lion s Edict 97 software should note e The raw serial port device driver controls the port s handshaking lines so there is no need to call SetRTS HoldTx or any of the various other port management functions These functions are thus not provided by Crimson e When sending data Crimson automatically handles buffer overflow events and ensures
242. his operation can be useful when making changes to a block of contiguous registers within a remote device as it will allow the comms subsystem to write all the changes in a single operation assuming the driver is capable of same Using the usual assignment operator may result in holes in the written data where changes are not being made forcing the comms subsystem to perform multiple writes FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE Force Var1 10 PAGE 286 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE FORCECOPY DEST SRC COUNT FORCECOPY DEST SRC COUNT int float The first array element to be copied to src int float The first array element to be copied from int The number of element to be processed DESCRIPTION Copies count elements from array element src to array element dest See Force tag value for a description of forced assignment and why it can be useful FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE ForceCopy Save 0 Work 0 100 REVISION 12 PAGE 287 FORMATCOMPACTFLASH CRIMSON USER MANUAL FORMATCOMPACTFLASH ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Formats the CompactFlash card in the terminal thereby deleting all data on the card You should thus ensure that the user is given appropriate warnings before this function 1s invoked FUNCTION TYPE This fu
243. horizontal graphs it is included at the left hand side If a tag is used for the value property the label may be obtained from that tag Otherwise 1t must be entered on the Format tab of the dialog box e The Show Value property is used to indicate whether the value of the data should be displayed within the graph itself If a tag of the appropriate data type 1s used for the value property the format may be obtained from the tag Otherwise as with the label 1t must be entered on the Format tab e The Show Setpoint property is used to indicate whether tick marks should be added either side of the bar to indicate the setpoint for the controlling value This option is only available if a tag has been entered for the value field e The Flash on Alarm property is used to indicate whether or not you want the text on the G3 s display to flash if the tag entered in the value property is currently in an alarm state This property is not available for those primitives that have a non tag value defined for the value property e The Value Background property is used to indicate whether the value should be drawn with a solid or transparent background The choice of format will typically depend upon the visibility of the value against the bar itself e The Get From Tag properties are used to indicate from where the label text the field format and the text colors should be obtained The options presented depend on what was entered for the Value propert
244. how Alarm Count property is used to indicate whether the number of currently active alarms should be displayed in the primitive Unless display space is restricted showing this field typically improves operator readability e The Show Alarm Time property is used to indicate whether or not the time at which the alarm occurred should be included in the primitive If the time is displayed the second tab is used to define the format to be used The second tab is the time format and is as described for the time and date primitive for the alarm viewer The third tab is the priority colors selection and 1s as described in the alarm viewer PAGE 154 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING A COLOR USER INTERFACE PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS THE EVENT VIEWER PRIMITIVE The Event Viewer primitive is used to provide the operator with a method to view the events recorded in the system s event log As with the alarm viewer it 1s sometimes placed on a popup page The properties of this primitive are essentially the same as those for the alarm viewer You are thus referred to the earlier section for more details The only additional property 1s Show Event Type which 1s used to indicate whether or not each row should be labeled with the kind of event that resulted in the log entry The possible event types are alarm activations alarm acceptances alarm deactivations and event activations THE FILE VIEWER PRIMITIVE The File Viewer Primitive is use
245. ht and will only allow numeric characters to be entered for those positions that can be selected e The Length property is used in lieu of the template to indicate how many characters should be reserved on a page when displaying this string If a string variable is marked as retentive it makes sense for this property to be equal to the length entered on the Data tab but this is not obligatory as you may want to allocate more or less space on the display for layout purposes e The Justification property is used when a template is not specified and indicates how strings shorter than the Length property should be positioned within the storage allocated for the string It is distinct from the Justification property of the display format in that it impacts the data that is actually stored THE COLORS TAB The Colors tab of a string tag contains the following properties gar Untitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 To include this tag in a custom web page use 0 The tab 1s used to specify the default colors to be used to display this tag MORE THAN TWO ALARMS If your application requires more than two alarms or indeed triggers for a tag define a formula to be equal in value to the primary tag and set the extra alarms on the alias For example if you have a variable called Level which is mapped to N7 100 in a PLC and you need to create a third alarm for that tag create a variable called say LevelAlias and set its
246. ians such that sin theta is equal to value FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE theta asin 1 0 REVISION 12 PAGE 251 ATAN VALUE CRIMSON USER MANUAL ATAN VALUE ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Returns the angle theta in radians such that tan theta 1s equal to value FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE theta atan 1 0 PAGE 252 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE ATAN2 A B ATAN2 A 5 a Float The value of the side that is opposite the angle theta Do feat The value of the side that is adjacent to the angle theta DESCRIPTION This function is equivalent to atan a b except that it also considers the sign of a and b and thereby ensures that the return value is in the appropriate quadrant It 1s also capable of handling a zero value for b thereby avoiding the infinity that would result if the single argument form of tan were used instead FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE theta atan2 1 1 REVISION 12 PAGE 253 BEEP FREQ PERIOD CRIMSON USER MANUAL BEEP FREQ PERIOD ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION ine The required frequency in semitones int The required period in milliseconds DESCRIPTION Sounds the terminal s beeper for the indicated period at the indicated pitch Passing a value of zero for period will turn off the beeper Be
247. ick on the required display page and select from the menu To select a page either click on the page in the page list or use the up and down arrows in the toolbar Alternatively you can use the Alt Left and Alt Right key combinations to move up and down the list as required These keys will work no matter which pane is selected DISPLAY EDITOR TOOLBOXES PAGE 92 To edit the contents of a display page first select the page as described above Then click on the green rectangle that represents the G3 s display A white rectangle will appear around the display to indicate that 1t has been selected and a number of toolboxes will appear THE DRAWING TOOLBOX The drawing toolbox 1s used to add various elements known as primitives to the display page The first two icons control the insertion mode while the balance of the icons represent individual primitives The primitives shown in yellow are basic geometric and animation items while the ones shown in green are rich primitives that use formatting and other information from a data tag to control their operation The primitives shown in red are system items such as the active alarm viewer All of the commands contained in the toolbox can also be accessed via the Insert menu THE FILL FORMAT TOOLBOX The fill format toolbox is used to control the pattern that will be used to fill a E ME ES display primitive If one or more primitives is selected clicking on a fill patter
248. iewed or changed if the Time Manager is enabled VARIABLE TYPE flag ACCESS TYPE Read Write PAGE 242 http www redlion net g3 PROGRAMMING REFERENCE EXPRESSION OPERATORS PROGRAMMING REFERENCE This section is a summary of all the commands used for programming EXPRESSION OPERATORS For more information on the following operators refer to the Writing Expression Section of this manual LOGICAL CONSTANTS VALUE EXAMPLE EX EN INTEGER CONSTANTS CO CN CHARACTER CONSTANTS Cr vn Y HN Re eins pesao a Pr enone o C E Re ioon ems O Se recon Dema iSO Danan O O ann The octal value represented by nnn LOGIC OPERATORS REVISION 12 PAGE 243 ACTION OPERATORS OPERATOR Less Than Less Than or Equal To Logical AND Logical OR Logical NOT Selection OTHER OPERATORS OPERATOR Grouping Operator Array Access Bit Selection ACTION OPERATORS SIMPLE MATH PAGE 244 OPERATOR Assignment Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Remainder Post Increment Pre Increment Post Decrement Pre Decrement Increment and Assign Decrement and Assign Multiply and Assign Divide and Assign Bit Shift Left and Assign Bit Shift Right and Assign Exclusive OR and Assign Bitwise AND and Assign Modulo and Assign Normal Or and Assign CRIMSON USER MANUAL Group 12 A gt 10 B gt 10 Group 13 Fast 2 2000 500 http www redlion net g3 PROGRAMMING REFERENCE PROG
249. il client will wait for the SMTP server to sent its welcome banner Some Microsoft servers attempt to negotiate Microsoft specific authentication with mail clients thereby delaying the point at which the banner appears You may want to extend this time period to 2 minutes or more when working with such servers CONFIGURING SMS The SMS tab is used to configure the Short Messaging Service This transport is used to send text messages to cell phones via a GSM modem Email addresses for SMS comprise an international format telephone number minus the introductory plus sign An example address in the United States would be 17175551234 while an example in the UK would be 441246555555 In each case the address comprises the country code followed by the area code and the subscriber number The configuration options for SMS are shown below dar Untitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 enable E Message Relay Disabled y es SMS SMTP General 2 Mail R5232 485 Option Card RS5 232 Comms Port RS 485 Comms Port Address e The Transport Mode property is used to enable or disable the transport Note that the mail manager must be enabled via the General tab before the SMS transport can be enabled Note also that either SMTP or SMS must be enabled if the mail manager is to be able to deliver messages e The Message Relay property is used to enable or disable the panel s SMS relay feature If this feature 1s enabled
250. ile the om ones shown in green are rich primitives that use formatting and other information from a data tag to control their operation The primitives BOO ag m shown in red are system items such as the active alarm viewer Primitives shown in blue are typically enhanced versions of other primitives that were added to the software more recently All of the commands contained in the toolbox can also be accessed via the Insert menu REVISION 12 PAGE 117 ADDING DISPLAY PRIMITIVES CRIMSON USER MANUAL ADDING DISPLAY PRIMITIVES PAGE 118 To add a display primitive to a page click on the required icon in the drawing toolbox or select the required option from the Insert menu The mouse cursor will change to an arrow with a crosshair at 1ts base and you will then be able to drag out the required position of the primitive within the display window B gt Untitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 3 Ioj x File Edit View Insert Arrange Transform Page Link Help Dealv is nvnex al t 2 o m E malls 2 Position 064 056 355 296 Size 292 241 SMART ALIGNMENT If you have the Smart Align features of the View menu enabled Crimson will provide you with guidelines to help align a new primitive with existing primitives or with the center of the display In the example shown above the horizontal dotted line indicates that the center of the tank primitive is vertically aligned with the center of the display
251. ill re configure Windows to use the appropriate Input Method Editor whenever a complex ie Unicode based language 1s being edited In order to use this facility you should ensure that you have the required language support installed by referring to the appropriate Windows documentation If you wish to use a Unicode based language that 1s not included in the drop down list select Generic Unicode mode instead You will then be able to enter any Unicode characters although you will have to manually select the appropriate keyboard mode or Input Method Editor CHANGING THE LANGUAGE To configure a key or primitive to change the language displayed by the operator panel select User Defined mode and enter SetLanguage n as the On Pressed property where n is a number between 1 and 8 according to the language to be displayed The display page will be redrawn in the selected language with any text for which translations have been entered including fixed text tag labels and tag formatting information adjusted as appropriate Pages that are subsequently displayed will also be drawn in the selected language SIMULATING LANGUAGES IN CRIMSON PAGE 180 Simulating languages provides a way to simulate how translated text will be shown in different languages Therefore required space for text fields or primitives containing text can be adjusted for all languages directly in Crimson To select the language to display click View and Simulate Language
252. imitive displays an integer value as a pointer with a 270 The Half Dial Gauge primitive functions as does the full dial gauge but displays a pointer with a 180 swing within a half circle All the other formatting and display options remain the same http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING A COLOR USER INTERFACE PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS The Quarter Dial Gauge primitive functions as does the full dial gauge but displays a pointer with a 90 swing within a quarter circle All the other formatting and display options remain the same Just as with other rich primitives the dial gauge primitives are capable of deriving much of the required formatting information from the tag used as their controlling value Just as with tag text primitives multiple tabbed pages are used to edit the primitives properties The first of these pages is shown below REVISION 12 or Whole Dial Gauge Properties xX Data Source Scale Options Orientation Facing uk Major Divisions 10 Minor Divisions zZ Properties Additional Format value Show Label yes Show Value yes et From Tag Field Label W Data Format Text Colors Set s Defaults The Value property 1s used to define the value to be displayed The Show Label property 1s used to indicate whether a label should be included with the gauge The label is displayed in the center of the primitive above the optional value If a tag is used for the v
253. imits Minimum value General As Per Format Edit Maximum Value General As Per Format Elika Data Format Number Base Decimal Sign Mode Unsigned Digits Before DP 5 Digits After DP 0 Leading Zeros Yes K7 Group Digits No Prefix Mone Translate Suffix Mone Translate Set As Defaults The properties shown are as described for an integer tag and you are thus referred to the earlier section of the manual that refers to Data Tags for more information Note that the existence of this primitive explains why one must enter minimum and maximum values for formulae when such tags can never be the subject of data entry If such limits were not defined how would Crimson know how to scale the bar THE RICH SLIDER PRIMITIVES slider that can either display a value or allow 1t to be manipulated by touching a l The Vertical Slider primitive displays a value typically from an integer tag as a specific location on the primitive or by pressing buttons at either end The Horizontal Slider primitive displays a value typically from an integer tag as ja a slider that can either display a value or allow it to be manipulated by touching a specific location on the primitive or by pressing buttons at either end Just as with other rich primitives the slider primitives are capable of deriving much of the required formatting information from the tag used as their controlling value Just as with ta
254. in alarm modes and allow the actual state of a tag to be compared to its intended state For example a tag that represents the state of an input from a speed switch for a motor might have the motor s control output specified as a setpoint This allows an alarm to be programmed to activate if the motor fails to start e The On Write property is used to define an action that will be executed when a change is made to the tag This action may be used to update dependent values or to perform other actions specific to the database Care should be taken not to perform actions that are too complex or system performance may be reduced PAGE 68 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING DATA TAGS EDITING FLAG TAGS THE DATA TAB FORMULAE The Data tab of a flag formula contains the following properties cerUntitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 File Edit View Tag Link Help Dea s saax lat E 3 4 Tags X MotorSpeed Y MotorStopped m Formula Data Tag Value y General MotorSpeed lt 100 Simulation orf m Setpoint Enable mo ha SP Value General Edit Triggers alarms Colors Format Data To include this tag in a custom web page use 1 OVER caps uu e The Tag Value property is used to specify the value that is to be represented by this tag It is typically set to a logical combination of other tags or PLC registers or to a comparison between numeric va
255. int or float depending on the type of the value argument EXAMPLE State Sgn Level 1 PAGE 376 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE SHOWMENU NAME SHOWMENU NAME ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION Display Page Display page to show as popup menu DESCRIPTION Displays the page specified as a popup menu This function is only available with on units fitted with touch screens Popup menus are shown on top of whatever is already on the screen and are aligned with the left hand side of the display FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE ShowMenu Page2 REVISION 12 PAGE 377 SHOWPOPUP NAME CRIMSON USER MANUAL SHOWPOPUP WAME ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Shows page name as a popup on the terminal s display The popup will be centered on the display and shown on top of the existing page The popup can be removed by calling the HidePopup function It will also be removed from the display if a new page is selected by invoking the GotoPage function or by a suitably defined keyboard action FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE ShowPopup Popup1 PAGE 378 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE SIN THETA SIN THETA ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION The angle in radians to be processed DESCRIPTION Returns the sine of the angle th
256. integer tags that are not applicable to real tags EDITING STRING TAGS You will recall that string tags represent an item of text this being made up of a number of individual characters The following sections describe the various tabs that are displayed on the right hand side of the Data Tags window when editing one of the various string tags THE DATA TAB VARIABLES The Data tab of a string variable contains the following properties REVISION 12 cer Untitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 5 Variable Data Mapping v PLCI D0100 oO E 5 Encoding unpacked 4 5 Access Read and Write y o Storage on Retentive Y Length 16 characters Simulation None Actions On Write None To include this tag in a custom web page use 0 The Mapping property is used to specify if the variable is to be mapped to a register in a remote device or 1f 1t exists only within the terminal If you press the arrow button and select a device name from the resulting menu you will be presented with a dialog box that will allow a PLC register to be selected The Encoding property 1s used to specify how text will be packed into mapped registers that contain more than 8 bits of data Selecting unpacked will store one character per register no matter how large the register leaving the high order bits empty Selecting low to high packed mode will store one character in each 8 bits of the target register storing
257. ise too easy to forget which tag you re editing e Selecting a device name will display a dialog box allowing you to choose a register within that remote communications device The various communications devices are listed at the end of the menu in the order in which they were created e Selecting Next will set the property to be equal to the register which follows the last selected register within the last selected device For example if you have used the device name option to set a previous property to N7 10 of PLCI selecting Next will set the current property to N7 11 of the same device TRANSLATABLE STRINGS Crimson databases are designed to support multi lingual operation whereby any string that will be presented to the user of the operator panel is capable of being displayed in one of many different languages To allow you to define these translations properties that contain such strings have a button labeled Translate to their right hand side REVISION 12 PAGE 65 EDITING PROPERTIES CRIMSON USER MANUAL Label Text Translate To enter the translations click the button and the following dialog box will appear coPEdit Translations x Translations 0 Generic Same as Defau 1 Generic 2 Generic 3 Generic 4 Generic 5 Generic 6 Generic C Same as Default C 7 Generic If you do not enter text for a particular language and that langua
258. isplayed before the current page was called e The Show As Popup selection causes the target page to be displayed as a popup on top of the current page While the popup 1s displayed the panel keys will assume the definitions established for that page with the exception of the exit key The exit key is used to remove the popup from the display REVISION 12 PAGE 109 ACTION DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL THE PUSH BUTTON ACTION This action 1s used to emulate a pushbutton The options are shown below LITT x This Page al Pages Action Mode Operation Push Button Action Details Button Type Togale Button Data Tag output Pick Action Control Enable General TRUE Edit GE Cancel e The Button Type property is used to define the key s behavior Toggle Change the data state when the key is pressed Momentary Set the data to 1 when the key is pressed Set the data to 0 when the key is released Set the data to 1 when the key is pressed Turn Off Set the data to 0 when the key is pressed e The Button Data property is used to define the data to be changed by the key In the example above the key will toggle the value of the Output tag THE CHANGE INTEGER VALUE ACTION This action is used to write an integer value to a data item The options are shown below x This Page al Pages Action Mode Operation Change Integer Value Action Details write To i Motor
259. itial remote device to be addressed via the protocol If the protocol supports access to more than one device you can use the Add Additional Device button included with the port icon s properties to add further target devices Each device is represented via an icon in the left hand pane of the Communications window and depending on the protocol in question may have a number of properties to be configured ePUntitled File Crimson 2 0 Ioj xj File Edit View Link Help OSH 4iERBBX 2 Pr Communications BB 6303 m Device Settings Programming Port H RS 232 Comms Port Modbus Master Em PLCI Em PLC2 Em PLC3 R5 485 Comms Port E Ethernet Y Protocol 1 Y Protocol 2 Y Protocol 3 Y Protocol 4 IV Enable Device m Device Identification Drop Number 2 RLC Instrument no Multiple Register Writes J Disable Code 16 TF Disable Code 15 m Frame Register Limits Code 03 32 words Code 16 32 words Code 01 512 bits Code 15 512 bits Code 02 512 bits Code 04 32 words Delete This Device Add Gateway Block lover cars num In the example above the Modbus Universal Master protocol has been selected and two additional devices have been created indicating that a total of three remote devices are to be accessed The right hand pane of the window shows the properties of a single device The Enable Device property is present for devices for all pr
260. ks SMTP addresses follow the familiar name domain standard REVISION 12 PAGE 37 USING ELECTRONIC MAIL CRIMSON USER MANUAL The configuration options for the SMTP transport are shown below or Untitled File G306 Crimson 2 0 UNREGISTERED COPY A Dj x File Edit View Link Help DSua r soa x m SMTP Transport Transport Mode Server Selection ress v Fixed 192 9 200 4 umber w Fixed 25 5 jail Manager Fixed no domain com Fe i everse Path E Panel Edit ime Manager 2 Y Ef Sync Manager nitial Timeout 30 secs Disabled y addresses sms SMTP General e The Transport Mode property is used to enable or disable the transport Note that the mail manager must be enabled via the General tab before the SMTP transport can be enabled Note also that either SMTP or SMS must be enabled if the mail manager 1s to be able to deliver messages e The Server Selection property is used to define how the transport will locate an SMTP server If Manual Selection 1s used the Server IP Address property should be used to manual designate a server If Configured via DHCP is selected the unit s Ethernet port must be configured to use DHCP and the network s DHCP server must be configured to designate an SMTP server via option 69 e The Server IP Address property is used to designate an SMTP server when manual server selection is enabled The server must be configured to accept mail from the
261. l change to display a number of tabs each of which shows certain properties of the tag Depending on the family and type of the tag different tabs may be present and each tab may contain different fields No matter what kind of tag is selected the first tab in the right hand pane is always the Data tab This tab contains fields that indicate what data the tag is to represent and how that data is to be stored and perhaps transferred to or from a remote device The exact contents of the tab will vary according to the family and type of the tag in question The second tab is always the Format tab This indicates how the data in the tag is to be formatted when shown on the operator panel s display or when presented to a user via any other mechanism such as a web page The Format tab will take the same form for all tags of the same type such that all integer tags for example share the same set of properties The balance of the tabs define alarms and triggers for the tag These are not included for string tags or for arrays Alarms are used to detect a condition that needs to be brought to the operator s attention or simply to log the fact that the condition has occurred Triggers operate in a similar way but instead of recording the condition they are used to execute an action EDITING PROPERTIES Most properties are edited in ways that are self evident to anyone who has used a Windows operating system For example you may be required
262. l is specified as the server The facility is useful in that it allows the Daylight Savings Time adjustment to be made via a single device on the factory network with the other devices then following the central setting e The SNTP Mode and SNTP Server properties are used to configure the IP address of the Simple Network Time Service server If Configured via DHCP 1s selected the unit s Ethernet port must be configured to use DHCP and the network s DHCP server must be configured to designate a server via option 42 e The Enable GPS property is used to instruct the time client to use a GPS unit connected via NMEA 0183 as an alternative method of obtaining the current time The unit may be connected to any serial port using the appropriate driver e The Frequency property is used to specify how often the G3 should attempt to synchronize its time by the methods enabled above The G3 will always attempt to sync twenty seconds after power up and will then sync as specified by this property If a given attempt to sync fails the unit will retry every 30 seconds until it 1s successful If both GPS and SNTP synchronization are enabled the SNTP will only be used if a GPS 1s not available LOG FILE e The Time Stamp Using UTC property is used to instruct Crimson to base its event and data logging on UTC rather than on local time This produces log files which are more easily portable across time zones and which do not suffer from PAGE 54 http
263. larm 2 Alarm 1 Format Data Digits Data Format Number Base Decimal bd Sign Mode Unsigned y Leading Zeros no Ne Group Digits ves he Prefix vc ne Translate Suffix gals Translate Before DP 4 Digits After DP 0 m Examples Positive shown as 1 234 gals over caps num http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING DATA TAGS EDITING INTEGER TAGS e The Label Text property is used to specify the label that can be shown next to this tag when including the tag on a display page The label differs from the tag name in that the former can be translated for international applications while the latter remains unchanged and is never shown to the user of the panel e The Minimum Value and Maximum Value properties are used to define the limits used for data entry and to provide similar limits for the various graphical primitives that need to know the bounds within which the tag may vary such as when scaling a tag s value for display as a bar graph e The Number Base property is used to indicate whether the tag should be displayed in decimal hexadecimal binary octal or passcode Decimal values may be signed or unsigned while all other number bases imply unsigned operation Selecting passcode mode will display asterisks for values being entered and is intended for security purposes e The Sign Mode property is used to indicate whether or not a sign should be prefixed to the ta
264. lash access 1s necessary Do NOT call this function permanently with on tick on update or in a formula Call it upon an event such as OnSelect on the page you want to display the resulting value FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE FreeMemory GetDiskFreePercent 0 PAGE 296 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE GETDISKSIZEBYTES DRIVE GETDISKSIZEBYTES DRIVE ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION ine The drive number always 0 DESCRIPTION Returns the size in bytes of the CompactFlash Card Note This function requires time to calculate free memory space as a long CompactFlash access 1s necessary Do NOT call this function permanently with on tick on update or in a formula Call it upon an event such as OnSelect on the page you want to display the resulting value FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE CFSize GetDiskSizeBytes 0 REVISION 12 PAGE 297 GETFORMATTEDTAG INDEX GETFORMATTEDTAG JNDEX ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION PAGE 298 CRIMSON USER MANUAL DESCRIPTION Returns a string representing the formatted value of the tag specified by index The string returned follows the format programmed on the targeted tag For example a flag will show On or Off a multi variable will show the text corresponding to the value The index can be found from the tag label using the function FindTagIndex This function works with any type of tag
265. le shown above the horizontal dotted line indicates that the center of the tank primitive is vertically aligned with the center of the display With a little practice REVISION 12 PAGE 93 SELECTING PRIMITIVES CRIMSON USER MANUAL this feature can make 1t very easy to align primitives as they are created without the need to go back and tweak your display pages to get the various figures into alignment In the Smart Align example shown below a newly created ellipse is being aligned with two existing rectangles Guidelines are present at both the edges of the figures and at the center showing that both the edges and the centers are aligned The red rectangle is highlighting the newly created primitive while the blue rectangles are highlighting the primitives to which the guidelines have been drawn cer Untitled File Crimson 2 0 File Edit View Insert Format Arrange Transform Page Link Help Deel 47 eb exlal t z o 548 slo s Ar s Pr Smart Align 1s also enabled when primitives are moved or re sized KEYBOARD OPTIONS While creating a display primitive the following keyboard options are available e Holding down the shift key while dragging out the primitive will cause the primitive to be drawn such that it is centered on the initial mouse position with one of its corners defined by the current mouse position If this doesn t make sense go ahead and try it it s a lot easier to see than it is to expl
266. linear scaling mode is selected the Store As range indicates the upper and lower bounds of the variable within the PLC while the Display As range indicates the corresponding values as they will be presented to the operator The Source Data property can also be used in this mode to force Crimson to treat the underlying data as a floating point value before performing the scaling The other modes are as follows Moe osmos S BCD to Binary The BCD value is converted to binary Binary to BCD The binary value is converted to BCD Swap Bytes in Word The lower two bytes of the value are swapped Swap Bytes in Long All four bytes of the value are swapped Swap Words The upper and lower words of the value are swapped PAGE 74 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING DATA TAGS EDITING INTEGER TAGS CTN CN Bits 0 through 7 of the value are inverted Bits 0 through 15 of the value are inverted Bits 0 through 31 of the value are inverted e The Setpoint properties are used to indicate whether a setpoint will be specified for this tag and what that setpoint will be Setpoints are used by certain alarm modes and allow the state of a tag to be compared to its intended state For example a tag which represents the temperature of a vessel might have a setpoint that indicates the required temperature This will allow an alarm to activate if the vessel strays beyond a certain distance from its target e The On Write property is as described f
267. ll be made available as the G3 range is expanded Hardware installation instructions are provided with each card so please refer to the supplied data sheet for information on how to fit the card to the panel Once the card is installed configuration is performed by selecting the G3 icon in the left hand pane of the Communications window and clicking on the Edit button next to the Option Card property x Options R5232 485 Option Card CAN Option Card Selecting the appropriate card will add an icon to tree shown in the left hand pane of the window This icon will in turn contain icons for the additional port or ports that are made available by the card The example below shows a G3 with a serial expansion card installed or Untitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 Option Card Selection Option Card R5232 485 Option Card Remove Option Card Mail RS232 485 Option Card 232 Comms Port RS 485 Comms Por The additional ports can be configured by following the instructions supplied in the previous chapter Note that the drivers available for a port will depend on the connection type it supports For example the CANOpen expansion card shows a port that will only support drivers designed for the CAN communication standard REVISION 12 PAGE 33 SHARING SERIAL PORTS CRIMSON USER MANUAL SHARING SERIAL PORTS PAGE 34 All G3 operator panels provide a so called port sharing facility that allows
268. llowing settings can be entered e The Base Directory defines the directory on the server where the log files will be synchronized This directory is relative to the folder settings given in the FTP server For example if the FTP server is programmed to save any FTP connection under C inetpub ftproot and the Base Directory in Crimson 2 0 is MyFolder then all log files will be saved under C inetpub ftproot MyFolder The G3 will duplicate the folder tree present on the CompactFlash card in the Base Directory so data remains in the same order REVISION 12 PAGE 57 CONFIGURING THE FTP SERVER CRIMSON USER MANUAL e The Sync Period is the frequency at which the terminal will synchronize file transfers e The Sync Delay is the offset in minutes past the hour between file transfers Use this property to allow multiple terminals file transfers to be offset to avoid collisions ADVANCED FTP EXCHANGE FUNCTIONS Please refer to Appendix A later in this manual for details on the FtpPutFile and FtpGetFile functions The second function is useful when you plan to load a file from the server to the CompactFlash card Automatic logging only transfers from the CompactFlash card to the server CONFIGURING THE FTP SERVER PAGE 58 Crimson s FTP Server provides a mean to exchange files between a G3 and an FTP client application The G3 will act as a server waiting for client applications to connect and download or upload files For example
269. lues In the example shown above the tag is configured to be true when a motor speed exceeds a certain value e The Setpoint and Simulation properties are as described for flag variables THE DATA TAB ARRAYS The Data tab of a flag array contains the following properties cerUntitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 File Edit View Tag Link Help D j inex a ts S Dr 3 4 Tags X MotorSpeed Y MotorStopped Y Flag rray Array Data Mapping a Elements te bits Access Read and Write E Storage JNon Retentive gt Simulation Off h Colors Format Data m Communications Read Policy Read Adaptively E Read Ahead 3 registers Read Behind E registers Actions On Write None To include this tag in a custom web page use 2 ovER cars uu e The Elements property is used to indicate how many data items the array should hold Array elements are referred to using square brackets such that Array 0 is the first element and Array n 1 is the last element where n is equal to the value entered for this property e The Access and Storage properties are as described for flag variables REVISION 12 PAGE 69 EDITING FLAG TAGS CRIMSON USER MANUAL e The Simulation property is as described for flag variables Note that the value to be simulated applies to all elements of the array If you need to simulate on a per element basis use a number of f
270. m W Protocol 3 Additional Init W Protocol 4 Clear Port Settings By Mail OVER CAPS um The device properties are a subset of those provided for dial in connections SMS support is always enabled with this driver but once again note that in order for SMS messaging to operate properly you will also have to enable the SMS Transport using the Mail icon in the Communications window REVISION 12 PAGE 45 WORKING WITH MODEMS CRIMSON USER MANUAL PAGE 46 SMS MESSAGE PROCESSING When SMS messaging 1s enabled the G3 will instruct the GSM modem to check for new incoming or outgoing messages every five seconds Incoming messages are forwarded to the mail manager which will optionally forward them to other users according to its configuration Note that 1t is not possible to check for messages while the modem is connected to a CSD or GPRS session so you will want to avoid using permanent connections when working with SMS Note also that 1f more than one GSM modem is configured all will be able to receive messages but only the second modem will be used for sending USING MULTIPLE INTERFACES Each G3 panel can support up to two modem independent connections When combined with the Ethernet port this gives a total of up to three distinct IP interfaces all of which will operate according to the configuration parameters defined for each connection This section describes how these multiple interfaces will interact and how t
271. m variable Data This system variable is only available for the OnHelp field and contains information on the alarm selected Data is a Long Double word and contains the following information e Low word the tag index this alarm is related to e High word the alarm number for this tag Remember there are two alarms per tag The second step 1s thus achieved by running a program with Data as argument A program has to be created first and set up to accept an integer argument as show in the image below ixi Fie Edit View Program Link Help DSaH r Dax o9 2 ajm lt ES Programming Programi Programs 8 Programi Arguments Type Argument 1 Integer Edit Argument 2 not Used Edit farg Argument 3 Notus tS E farg Argument 4 Notus tCS S EA arg Argument 5 Not Used Edi args _ coa Options Return Type None Edit Run In Background No External Data Read when Referenced y Data Timeout 30 0 secs Arguments void Programi int Arg1 Now the OnHelp field is ready to accept the following code This tells the viewer to run Program1 with the information provided in Data when the Help button is pressed Programl Data PAGE 152 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING A COLOR USER INTERFACE PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS The last step 1s then to write the program so the proper information 1s displayed depending on the alarm selected The code sample below illustrates an example with 2
272. maller tick marks are drawn at each division Selecting a value of one for this property will disable minor divisions The second page defines various formatting options cor Whole Dial Gauge Properties i xX Properties Additional Format Text Format Font Text Type Transparent wi Foreground Fixed C white Pick Background 9 Fixed E Gray Pick Fill Format Fill Color 1 gt Fixed ua Red Pick Fill Color 2 Fixed C Gray Pick Line Format Line Color gt Fixed O white Pick Cancel Set 4s Defaults e The Text Format properties are used to define the font to be used to display the optional data value and data label and the colors to be used for the text In addition a property is provided to define whether the font should be opaque or whether the pointer should be visible through the text e The Fill Format properties are used to define the background color of the dial and the color to be used to draw the interior of the pointer and the scale tick marks Fill Color 1 defines the background Fill Color 2 the other items e The Line Format property is used to define the color of the lines used to demark the pointer the scale tick marks and the outline of the dial gauge itself The third page 1s used to define the optional label and the minimum and maximum values and the data format for the optional data value This page functions as was previously d
273. ming icon from the main screen to create and manipulate programs You should note that many applications will not need programs You may thus choose to skip this chapter 1f desired 2 gt Untitled File G306 Crimson 2 0 o xj File Edit View Program Link Help aa 4 DSa r max gt o 9 34 if TankLevel lt 100 LimitLo 1 else LimitLo 0 if TankLevel gt 500 LimitHi 1 else LimitHi 0 External Data Read When Referenced USING THE PROGRAM LIST To create rename or delete programs click on the left hand pane of the User Interface window The various commands on the Program menu can then be used to make the desired changes Alternatively right click on the required program and select from the menu To select a program either click on the name in the list or use the up and down arrows in the toolbar Alternatively you can use the Alt Left and Alt Right key combinations to move up and down the list as required These keys will work no matter which pane is selected EDITING PROGRAMS To edit a program simply edit the program text using the large area in the right hand pane of the Programming window When you have finished press the ctr1 T key combination or select the Translate command from the Program menu This will read the program and check it for errors If an error is found a dialog box will be displayed and the cursor will be moved to the approximate position of t
274. mson to work with that specific model USING BALLOON HELP Crimson provides a useful feature called Balloon Help lover caps num This feature allows you to see help information for each icon in the main menu or for each field in a dialog box or window It is controlled via the icon at the right hand edge of the toolbar and can be configured to three modes namely Do Not Display in which case balloon help is disabled When Mouse Over in which case help is displayed when the mouse pointer is held over a particular field for a certain period of time or When Selected in which case help is always displayed for the currently selected field WORKING WITH DATABASES Crimson stores all the information about a particular panel s configuration in what 1s called a database file These files have the extension of cD2 although Windows Explorer will hide this extension if it is left in its default configuration Crimson database files differ from those PAGE 16 http www redlion net g3 CRIMSON BASICS DOWNLOADING TO A TERMINAL used by previous Red Lion operator panels in that they are text files which are thus far easier to recover in the case of accidental corruption Databases are manipulated via the commands found on the File menu These commands are standard for all Windows applications and need no further explanation The exception is Save Image which will be covered later DOWNLOADING TO A TERMINAL Crim
275. mson will always constrain resizing operations so as to ensure that primitives stay on the screen and to make sure that items do not exceed their maximum permitted size or shrink below the minimum size appropriate to their format REORDERING PRIMITIVES Primitives on a display page are stored in what is known as a z order This defines the sequence in which the primitives are drawn and therefore whether or not a given primitive appears to be in front of or behind another primitive In the first example below the hatched square is shown behind the solid squares ie at the bottom of the z order In the second example it has been moved to the front of the order and appears in front of the other figures ansform iew Insert Format Arrange Transform P ink Hel Ele Edit View Insert ormat Arrange Tri Page Link Help E File Edit vi Ir Arrange Tr Page Link Help DOSu r Dax a s3 o E allo Ar 3 7 5 taxa 2 P e allos Ar 5 To move items in the z order select the items and then use the various commands on the Arrange menu The Move Forward and Move Backward commands move the selection one REVISION 12 PAGE 95 EDITING PRIMITIVES CRIMSON USER MANUAL step in the indicated direction while the Move To Front and Move To Back commands move the selection to the indicated end of the z order Alternatively if you have a mouse that is equipped with a wheel the wheel can be used to move the selection Scrolling up moves the
276. n Advanced Communication Configuring the Synchronization Manager of this manual for details on this feature USING WEBSYNC PAGE 198 The WebSync utility which will be stored in the directory specified when the software was installed can be executed to synchronize a directory on a PC with the contents of an operator panel s data logs You may decide to configure an application such as the Windows Scheduler or perhaps a cron daemon to run this utility on a regular basis or you may use a command line switch to instruct WebSync to perform the polling automatically You may also decide to host WebSync on a central server so that the log files can be made available to selected users on your corporate network WEBSYNC SYNTAX WebSync is invoked from the command line using the following syntax websync switches lt hostname gt where lt hostname gt is replaced with the IP address of the panel to be polled OPTIONAL SWITCHES The switches field may contain one or more of the following options e terse can be used to suppress progress information e poll lt n gt can be used to poll the terminal every n minutes e path lt dir gt can be used to specify dir as the directory to hold the log files e ras lt name gt can be used to invoke a dial out connection to access the unit e user lt name gt can be used to specify the username for the connection e pass lt pass gt can be used to specify the password
277. n forward slashes can be used in place of backslashes without the need for such doubling The function returns a value of one if it succeeds and a value of zero if it fails Note that the file is not opened after it is created a subsequent call to OpenFile must be made to read or write data FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Success CreateFile logs custom myfile txt PAGE 264 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE DATATOTEXT DATA LIMIT DATATOTEXT DA7A LIMIT ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION data int The first element in an array ne The number of characters to process DESCRIPTION Forms a string from an array 4 characters per array elelment until either the limit 1s reached or a null character is detected FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE string DataToText Data 0 8 REVISION 12 PAGE 265 DATE Y M D DATE Y M D ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION PAGE 266 CRIMSON USER MANUAL The year to be encoded in four digit form The month to be encoded from to 12 DESCRIPTION The date to be encoded from 1 upwards Returns a value representing the indicated date as the number of seconds elapsed since the datum point of 1 January 1997 This value can then be used with other time date functions FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE t Date 2000 12 31
278. n any context NOTES FOR EDICT USERS Users of Red Lion s Edict 97 software should note e The various Port functions replace the Serial RYOP functions REVISION 12 PAGE 247 ABS VALUE CRIMSON USER MANUAL ABS VALUE ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION int float The value to be processed DESCRIPTION Returns the absolute value of the argument In other words if value 1s a positive value that value will be returned if value is a negative value a value of the same magnitude but with the opposite sign will be returned FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int or float depending on the type of the value argument EXAMPLE Error abs PV SP PAGE 248 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE ACOS VALUE ACOS VALUE ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Returns the angle theta in radians such that cos theta 1s equal to value FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE theta acos 1 0 REVISION 12 PAGE 249 ALARMACCEPTALL ALARMACCEPTALL ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION PAGE 250 CRIMSON USER MANUAL DESCRIPTION Accepts all active alarms FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE AlarmAcceptAll http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE ASIN VALUE ASIN VALUE ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Returns the angle theta in rad
279. n can be used with the FindFileNext function to scan all files in a given directory FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE Name FindFileFirst LOGS LOG1 REVISION 12 PAGE 283 FINDFILENEXT CRIMSON USER MANUAL FINDFILENEXT ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Returns the filename of the next file or directory in the directory specified in a previous call to the FindFileFirst function Returns and empty string if no more files exist This function can be used with the FindFileFirst function to scan all files in a given directory FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE Name FindFileNext PAGE 284 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE FIND TAGINDEX LABEL FIND TAGINDEX LABEL ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION Tag label not tag name or mnemonic DESCRIPTION Returns the index number of the tag specified by label FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Index FindTagIndex Power Returns the index number for the tag with label Power REVISION 12 PAGE 285 FORCE TAG VALUE CRIMSON USER MANUAL FORCE TAG VALUE Tag Tag which will be forced imne float Value to be written to the Tag DESCRIPTION Sets tag to value removing any existing entries for tag from the write queue and performing the write whether or not the operation results in a change to the value of tag T
280. n will change all the selected items to use that pattern If nothing is currently selected clicking on a pattern will set the default pattern for newly created primitives The various options can also be accessed via the Format menu or via the paint can icon on the toolbar THE LINE FORMAT TOOLBOX The line format toolbox is used to control the color that will be used to draw an Line Format outline around a display primitive If one or more primitives 1s selected clicking on a line color will change all the selected items to use that color If nothing is currently selected clicking on a color will set the default outline color for newly created primitives The various options can also be accessed via the Format menu or via the paintbrush icon on the toolbar http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING THE G303 USER INTERFACE ADDING DISPLAY PRIMITIVES THE TEXT FORMAT TOOLBOX The text format toolbox 1s used to control the horizontal and vertical alignment of primitives that contain text elements If one or more such primitives is selected clicking on an icon will change all the selected items to use the selected justification If nothing is currently selected clicking on an icon will set the default format for newly created primitives The various options can also be accessed via the Format menu THE FOREGROUND TOOLBOX The foreground toolbox is used to control the foreground color for primitives that contain text elements If one o
281. nanonenans 275 EMPTY WRITEQUEUE DEN 2 6 BNABMED EVICE DEVICE Susi iio at 277 ENDBATCH ica 278 A AA aE E A E E ie 279 BP LOO OE carte O 280 PILECELEMENT DATA COUNT A 281 FINDSTRING CHAR SKIP a 282 FINDFILEFIRST DIR rata 283 FINDFLENEXT mitinn cica 284 FIND TAGINDEX ZADEL dt 285 FORCE TAG VALUE usario laica 286 FORGECOPY DESI SRG COUNT riada 287 FORMATCOMPACTELASHA a i 288 FIPGEMRIMEC SERVER 1 OG REM DELETE ta a 289 FIP UTPILECSERVER LOC REM DELETE iia 290 GETARIA UNDER AS RANE 291 SETA ina 292 GETCAMERADATA PORT CAMERA PARAM oococononnnnononenonnnnanonononnananononennanonenennnnnnos 293 GET DATE COMA AND FAM as 294 GETDISKFREEBYTES DRIVE risisti ninni i i A a a 295 GETDISKFREEPERCENT QRIVE ariadna 296 GET DISKSIZE DYES OR VE aras 297 SET F ORMA TIED TAG WDE unicas ias 298 GETINTEREACESTAIUS ORT cats 299 SET LIT LAG CIN OEY sia 300 GETIMAXTAGINT INDEX a 301 GETIMAXTAGREALUINDEX J ruris mi a a 302 GETMINTAGINTONDEX ri aid 303 GETMINTAGREALINDEO cositas oia 304 GETMONTADA Said 305 GET INET GATE POR Dada 306 GETNETID POR Ta 307 GETNETIP POR Didi 308 GETNET MASKOR TY Cati ad 309 GETNOWC rancios 310 PAGE X http www redlion net g3 TABLE OF CONTENTS SETNOWDATE serlo 311 GETNOWTIMEO dde 312 GETPORTCONFIG PORTE PARAM didas 313 GET REAL TAGE VO A pi 314 GETS TRING TAG INDE iras 315 SGETTAGLABEL INDE a a 316 GETUPDOWNDATALDATA LIMIT aa d 317 GETUPDOWNSTEP DATA LIMIT sd 318 GOTOPAGE WAME
282. nce the gyrations required to remove a CompactFlash card are somewhat complex Crimson provides two other mechanisms for accessing log files thereby eliminating the need for such removals These methods are described below ACCESSING LOG FILES There are three additional methods of accessing log files e The less preferable method is to mount the card as a drive on a PC via the process described at the start of this manual so that the logs can be copied using REVISION 12 PAGE 197 USING WEBSYNC CRIMSON USER MANUAL Windows Explorer Note that Windows 2000 or above is recommended when using this method as earlier versions of Windows may otherwise lock the CompactFlash card and disrupt data logging e The preferred method is to use the web server as described in the next chapter With the web server enabled log files can be accessed over the panel s Ethernet port using either a web browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer or by using the automated process implemented by the WebSync utility that is provided with the Crimson configuration software e Another preferred method especially over networks is to use the Synchronization Manager This advanced feature uses the File Transfer Protocol FTP to synchronize the G3 CompactFlash card with an FTP server The G3 in this case will be an FTP client thus allowing the G3 to initiate the file transfer as opposed to the PC initiating the transfer via WebSync Please refer to the sectio
283. nction 1s active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE FormatCompactFlash PAGE 288 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE FTPGETFILE SERVER LOC REM DELETE FTPGETFILE SERVER LOC REM DELETE Tae FTP connection number always O loc Local file name on the CompactFlash card rem Remote file name on the FTP server delete int If true the source will be deleted after the transfer otherwise it will remain on the source disk DESCRIPTION This function will transfer the defined file from the FTP server to the operator interface CompactFlash card It will return true if the transfer is successful false otherwise The source and destination file name can be different The remote path is relative to the FTP server setting root path See Synchronization Manager for details FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Success FtpGetFile 0 Recipes csv Recipes Rec001 csv 0 In this example the file Recipes csv will be transferred from the FTP server to the CompactFlash Card The original file will not be deleted from the PC server REVISION 12 PAGE 289 FTPPUTFILE SERVER LOC REM DELETE CRIMSON USER MANUAL FTPPUTFILE SERVER LOC REM DELETE int FTP connection number always 0 loc Local file name on the CompactFlash card rem Remote file name on the FTP server delete int If true the source will be deleted after the transfer
284. nction does not return a value EXAMPLE IsPortRemote 1 REVISION 12 PAGE 325 ISWRITEQUEUEEMPTY DEV CRIMSON USER MANUAL ISWRITEQUEUEEMPTY DEV ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION PAGE 326 dev re The device number to get the queue state from DESCRIPTION Returns the state of the writes queue for the device identified with the argument dev The function will return true if the queue 1s empty false otherwise Note The device number can be identified in Crimson s status bar when a device is selected in Communication FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE QueueEmpty IsWriteQueueEmpty 1 In this example the function returns the write queue stat for devicel http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE LEFT STRING COUNT LEFT S7RING COUNT ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION int The number of characters to return DESCRIPTION Returns the first count characters from string FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE AreaCode Left Phone 3 REVISION 12 PAGE 327 LEN STRING CRIMSON USER MANUAL LEN S7RING ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Returns the number of characters in string FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Size Len Input PAGE 328 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE LOADCAMERASETUP PORT CAMERA INDEX FILE LOADCAMERASETUP PORT CAMERA INDEX FILE
285. nd converts it to a value that oscillates between O and limit l It is typically used within a demonstration database to generate realistic looking animation often by passing DispCount as the data parameter so that the resulting value changes on each display update If the GetUpDownStep function is called with the same arguments it will return a value indicating the direction of change of the data returned by GetUpDownData FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Data GetUpDownData DispCount 100 REVISION 12 PAGE 317 GETUPDOWNSTEP DATA LIMIT CRIMSON USER MANUAL GETUPDOWNSTEP DAT7A LIMIT ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION data ine A steadily increasing source value int The number of values to generate DESCRIPTION See GetUpDownData for a description of this function FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Delta GetUpDownStep DispCount 100 PAGE 318 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE GOTOPAGE NAME GOTOPAGE WAME ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION Display Page The page to be displayed DESCRIPTION Selects page name to be shown on the terminal s display FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE GotoPage Pagel REVISION 12 PAGE 319 GOTOPREVIOUS CRIMSON USER MANUAL GOTOPREVIOUS ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Causes the panel to re
286. ne is not supported The Emulator can be used to test not only the user interface portion of a database but also the operation of the data logger and the web server Note that data logger data is saved in the computer RAM memory and is therefore not available on the hard drive This means the memory will be emptied every time the Emulator is stopped The RAM will not behave like the G3 CompactFlash card and file functions will not work Downloading to the Emulator will open a new window representing the G3 as shown To download to the Emulator the link has to be configured by checking Send to the Emulator in the Link Options or by activating that link via the tool bar button Emulator Toolbar button http www redlion net g3 CRIMSON BASICS UPDATING VIA COMPACTFLASH The database can be downloaded in the Emulator using either the Link Send or Link Update commands DANGER gt 2 0027002 15 25 TankLevel Too Low UPDATING VIA COMPACTFLASH If you need to update the database within a unit that is already installed at a customer s site Crimson allows you to save a copy of the database to a CompactFlash card ship that card to your customer and have the G3 load the database from that card The process is performed via the Save Image command on the File menu smer e e ISE The Network b This Computer 9 Documents File name ldbasel v Save as type Image Files cdi v Cancel The Save Imag
287. ne of these utilities and configuring it to address the G3 HMI you can have serial access to any devices connected to the HMI without any additional cabling Indeed there is no need to have any physical serial ports available on the PC at all something that is very valuable when working with modern laptops where a COM port is often an expensive option Several third party virtual serial port utilities are available On the freeware side a company called HW Group http www hw group com provides a utility called HW Virtual Serial Port There are also a number of other freeware port drivers available most of which seem to be derived from the same source base On the commercial side a company called Tactical Software http www tacticalsoftware com offers Serial IP for about 100 a port While the various freeware drivers no doubt have many contented users we have found that these drivers have occasional stability problems on certain PCs Tactical Software s Serial IP REVISION 12 PAGE 35 SHARING SERIAL PORTS CRIMSON USER MANUAL is thus the only package that we are able to support and the following information assumes that you are using this package To create a virtual serial port open Serial IP s configuration screen and select the name of the COM port you wish to define This will typically be the first free COM port after those allocated to the physical ports and modems installed in your PC Next enter the IP address of the
288. ne remote device and another via Crimson s protocol converter DATA TAGS This icon is used to define the data items to be accessed within the remote devices or to define internal data items to store information within the terminal itself Each tag has a variety of properties associated with it The most basic property is formatting data which is used to specify how the data held within a tag is to be shown on the terminal s display and on such things as web pages By specifying this information within the tag Crimson removes the need for you to re enter formatting data each time a tag is displayed More advanced tag properties include alarms that may activate when various conditions relating to the tag occur or triggers which perform programmable actions on similar conditions http www redlion net g3 CRIMSON BASICS MAIN SCREEN ICONS USER INTERFACE This icon 1s used to create and edit display pages and to specify what actions should be taken when the operator panel s keys are pressed released or held down The page editor allows you to display various graphical items known as primitives These vary from simple items such as rectangles and lines to more complex items that can be tied to the value of a particular tag or expression By default such primitives use the formatting information defined when the tag was created but this information can be overridden if required PROGRAMMING This icon is used to create and edi
289. net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE GETMAXTAGINT INDEX GETMAXTAGINT INDEX ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION int Tag index number DESCRIPTION This function returns the maximum value from the data limits The index can be found from the tag label using the function FindTagIndex This function will only work if the target tag is an integer FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Data GetMaxTagInt 1 REVISION 12 PAGE 301 GETMAXTAGREAL INDEX CRIMSON USER MANUAL GETMAXTAGREAL INDEX ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION Ene Tag index number DESCRIPTION This function returns the maximum value from the data limits The index can be found from the tag label using the function FindTagIndex This function will only work if the target tag 1s an real floating point FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE Data GetMaxTagReal 1 PAGE 302 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE GETMINTAGINT INDEX GETMINTAGINT INDEX ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION int Tag index number DESCRIPTION This function returns the minimum value from the data limits The index can be found from the tag label using the function FindTagIndex This function will only work if the target tag is an integer FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Data GetMinTagInt 1 REVISION 12 PAGE 303 GETMINTAGREAL INDEX CRIMSON USER MANU
290. new data set will be added to the file until 1t reaches the maximum time specified by the Update Rate x Number of samples For example with an update rate of 60 seconds and a number of samples of 1440 a new file will be created every 1440 x 60 3600 24 hours The number of samples per file will http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING DATA LOGGING THE LOGGING PROCESS most likely be different however each file will represent a fix length of time regardless of the number of samples THE LOGGING PROCESS Crimson s data logger operates using two separate processes The first samples each data point at the rate specified in its properties and places the logged data into a buffer within the RAM of the G3 panel The second process executes every two minutes and writes the data from RAM to the CompactFlash card This structure has several advantages e Writes to the CompactFlash card are guaranteed to begin only on a two minute boundary that is at exactly 2 4 or 6 minutes past the hour and so on This means that if your G3 panel supports hot swapping of CF cards you can wait for the next burst of writes to start and when the CompactFlash activity LED on the front of the panel ceases to flicker you are guaranteed to have until the start of the next two minute interval before further writes will be attempted This means that you can remove the card without fear of data corruptions As long as you insert a new card before four minut
291. nfiguring a serial port the various Port Settings fields Baud Rate Data Bits Stop Bits and Parity will be set to values appropriate to the protocol in question You should obviously check these settings to make sure that they correspond to the settings for the device to be addressed PROTOCOL OPTIONS Some protocols require additional configuration of parameters specific to that protocol These appear in the right hand pane of the Communications window when the corresponding port icon is selected The example below shows the additional parameters for the Allen Bradley DH 485 driver which appear under the Driver Settings section of the window EA A Driver Selection Programming Port RS 232 Comms Port DH485 Driver Allen Bradley SLC 500 via DH485 Edit E PLCI R5 485 Comms Port Driver Settings B k y ul 1 Station Number of Terminal Y Protocol 2 Highest Station on Network 31 W Protocol 3 Y Protocol 4 r Port Settings Baud Rate 19200 X Data Bits Eight Stop Bits one y Parity Even y Clear Port Settings Restore Driver Defaults Add Additional Device PAGE 24 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING COMMUNICATIONS WORKING WITH DEVICES WORKING WITH DEVICES As mentioned above when a communications protocol is selected a single device is created under the corresponding port icon In the case of a master protocol this represents the in
292. ng tones Sample tunes can be obtained from many sites on the World Wide Web FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE PlayRTTTL TooSexy d 4 0 5 b 40 16f 169 16 16g 16f 16 16g9 16 16g 16g L6g 16g 16g 16g 16f 16 16g 16f 16g9 16f 16 16g 16f 16g9 16f 16 16 g 16f 16g 16g 16g 16g 16g 16g 16f 16 16g 16f 16g 32f REVISION 12 PAGE 345 POPDEV ELEMENT COUNT CRIMSON USER MANUAL PoPDEv ELEMENT COUNT element int float The first array element to be processed Count int The number of elements to be processed DESCRIPTION Returns the standard deviation of the count array elements from element onwards assuming the data points to represent the whole of the population under study If you need to find the standard deviation of a sample use the StdDev function instead FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE Dev PopDev Data 0 10 PAGE 346 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE PORTCLOSE PORT PORTCLOSE POR7 ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION int Closes the specified port DESCRIPTION This function is used in conjunction with the active or passive TCP raw port drivers to close the selected port by gracefully closing the connection that is attached to the associated socket FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EX
293. nk1 Tank2 What would it mean to write to this expression Arrays represent a collection of data items within the terminal These are typically used to store recipe data or to build up collections of data for statistical analysis They are not used in the majority of simple applications but provide a powerful tool for more complex projects TAG TYPES Each family contains five tag types each of which holds a different kind of data d A Flag tags represent a single true or false condition When they are mapped to a register in a remote device they will typically correspond to an internal coil or to a single digital I O point Flag formulae typically represent combinations of such items or comparisons of numeric values Integer tags represent 32 bit signed numbers These tags can store values between 2 147 483 648 and 2 147 483 647 Even if a tag is mapped to a PLC register which contains only 16 bits of data Crimson performs its internal operations at the higher level of precision to ensure large intermediate values can be handled with ease Multi tags represent numeric values that correspond to a number of distinct states Thus while an integer might represent a tank level a multi tag will represent say one of three states of a machine such as Stopped Running or Paused The distinction is obvious when you consider that a multi tag is displayed as one of a set of strings while an integer 1s displayed as a number Re
294. nly so the G3 cannot overwrite some information in the PLC select the tag and change the Access to Read Only under the Data Tab The variable symbol will turn green In the image below Var is in Read Only and Var2 in Read and Write access or Untitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 File Edit View Tag Link Help SHl stax a 4 m 4 To include this tag in a custom web page use 0 comment security Triggers alarm 2 alarm 1 Colors Format Data mYariable Data Mapping v puct__ moo7 0001 Edit Sign Mode Driver Defaut E access TE Storage Non Retentive gt Simulation 0 m Scaling and Transforms Transform None y JP Round Source Data szbt Integer y Store As 0 To 10000 Display 4s E c To 10000 Setpoint Enable mo P SP Value e General Edit r Actions On Write OVER caps NUM http www redlion net g3 QUICK START USER INTERFACE USER INTERFACE Close the Data Tags window and open the User Interface to create display screens The first time the G310 user interface is open you won t be able to access the screen when you click in the black area as your screen resolution might be too small 10 x isform Page Link Help 4 08 xX a t my o m Ee all olm r x Crimson 2 0 D The window is too small to allow editing Uncheck Show whole screen to allow zooming d
295. nnection Timeout 5000 ms Gonnection Backoff a Transaction Timeout 2500 ms Delete This Device Add Gateway Block When creating data tags the server tags will be accessible via the mapping button A client tag can be linked to one of the server s tags Once used in the database reading or writing this tag will access the server with the appropriate command and action with no further programming necessary If the server tag 1s related to a PLC changing the client tag will impact on the server which in turn will reflect the change in the PLC PAGE 52 http www redlion net g3 ADVANCED COMMUNICATIONS USING TIME MANAGEMENT Data Tags Fa Variable Data Mapping Y HMIL 2 0 a PA mo E 5 Sian Mode Driver Default uu Select Address for OPC TCP IP Master i x z m Tag Item lt No Selection gt m Tag Type Cancel Help Actions On Write None Note The server tag list provided in the client database is updated every time the client Crimson database is opened Therefore if the server database is modified and new tags are created reopening the client database will update the server tag list and the newly created tags will be available for mapping in the client USING TIME MANAGEMENT Crimson contains facilities to allow you to synchronize the time and date within the G3 to a
296. nnnnnnno 107 DEFINING SYSTEM AC HONS 40 ad edo aA 108 DEFINING KEY BEHAVIOR a a a aa 108 ENABLING ACTIONS os 109 ACTION DESCRIPTION es 109 THEGOTO PAGE ACTION surta rai 109 THE PUSH BUTTON ACTION 00 AAA 110 THE CHANGE INTEGER VALUE ACTION ta cio de 110 THE RAMP INTEGER VALUE ACTION Sila 111 PAGE IV http www redlion net g3 TABLE OF CONTENTS TAEPLAY TUNE ACTION conan adan dada ada 111 THE USER DEFINED ACTION amp cscstaadiionstandaodstaadindetaxntatetandantanoasantatnnd tate tenddaddtuasaadatmadautsbandaenetandandenetes 112 BEOGK DEFAULT ACTION nda 112 CHANGING THE LANGUAGE nisrtanasir E 113 ADVANCED TOPLESS aida 113 ACTION PROCESS ING rol a 113 DATA AVATEA BITT iio aa 114 NOTES FOR EDICT USERS cido 114 CONFIGURING A COLOR USER INTERFACE ssccsccccnnccnceccneccnneccneccnneesseecnseenseeesseesss LO CONTROLLING THE VIEW ironia ia tested vatmounnnatned ua tanese ina ai 115 ZOOM FUNCTION issstaataganpannagntannsanniasasae anes ian aai 115 OTHER VIEW TON 116 USING THE PAGE LIS aaa iia 116 WORKING WITH THE GRID uste tii iii ici dei 117 WHE DRAWING FOOL BOX Saca 117 ADDING DISPLAY PRIMITIVES id 118 SMART ALIGNMENT itae ian ai aena aa aa aaae Na aaa aaaea a aa ana Naia aeaaeai aa aa 118 KEYBOARD OPTIONS arriari sa 119 Eee INSERT MODE E E A A E E E omammeen ae 119 USING THE IMAGE LIBRARY acusada 119 SELECTING PRIMITIVE S siii 120 MOVING AND RESIZING ud 120 ALIGNING PRIMITIVES cerni oeann EA 121 SPACING PRIMITIVES tia 121 REOR
297. nstants can either be entered simply as 1 or 0 or by use of the keywords true or false FLOATING POINT CONSTANTS Floating point constants represent a 32 bit single precision floating point value They are represented as you might expect by the integer portion followed by a single decimal point followed by the fractional portion Exponential notation is not supported STRING CONSTANTS String constants represent sequences of characters They comprise the characters to be represented enclosed in double quotation marks For example the string ABCD represents a four character string comprising the values 65 66 67 and 68 Actually five bytes are used to store the string with a null value being appended to indicate the end of the string The various escape sequences discussed above may also be used within strings TAG VALUES The value of a tag is represented in an expression by the tag name Upper case and lower case characters are considered equivalent when finding the required tag Also once an expression REVISION 12 PAGE 217 SIMPLE MATH CRIMSON USER MANUAL has been entered any changes to the name of the tag will modify all of the expressions that make reference to it so there is no need to re edit the expressions to fix the name COMMUNICATIONS REFERENCES References to registers in master communications devices can be entered into an expression by means of a syntax comprising an opening square bracket the r
298. nt The value to be processed ne The number base to be used int The number of digits to generate DESCRIPTION Returns the string obtained by formatting data in base radix generating count digits The value is assumed to be unsigned so 1f a signed value 1s required use Sgn to decide whether to prefix a negative sign and then use Abs to pass the absolute value to IntToText FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE PortPrint 1 IntToText Value 10 4 REVISION 12 PAGE 323 ISDEVICEONLINE DEVICE CRIMSON USER MANUAL ISDEVICEONLINE DEVICE ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION PAGE 324 ne Reports 1f device 1s online DESCRIPTION Reports if device is online or not As device is marked as offline if a repeated sequence of communications error have occurred When a device is in the offline state it will be polled periodically to see if has returned online Note The device number can be identified in Crimson s status bar when a device is selected in Communication FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Okay IsDeviceOnline 1 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE ISPORTREMOTE PORT ISPORTREMOTE PORT ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION int The port number to monitor DESCRIPTION The function will monitor the specified port to indicate if port sharing 1s active FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE This fu
299. o 319 GOTOPREVIOUS espro tio 320 FAS ACCESS RUC acta 321 HIDEPOPUP isa 322 INTTOTEXT DATA RADIX COUNT A a a 323 ISDEVICEONTINE DEV CP irc cds 324 ISPORTREMOTE POR Tur 325 TSWV RITE QUEUE MP TY DEV ia id 326 CERTESTRING COUNT id 327 CENTRO aaa 328 LOADCAMERASETUP PORT CAMERA INDEX FILE csceccsceccececseceeecetseseeeesersesesansesanes 329 LOCA tai 330 OG OCVALUE ainia iaa 331 EOC SAVE atan 332 MAREO TIA oidos 333 AK TING VALUE arne ic sahsica oisiedinad AA A 334 MAA Aa 335 MEANTELEMENT COUNT 336 MIDCUSTRING POS COUNT ass 337 MINA isa 338 MUDINA D O tasa 339 MUTESIREN sas 340 NEW BATCHIWAME at 341 INORG aaa 342 OPENFILE WAME MODE ad 343 Pi see tcti srt eater ted ap ET atobiaan ene O OAO 344 PIAYRTETECTUN APM RO PSOE ancauersentpaatuanartaniauestcueaee 345 PORDEVUELEMENT CO Di 346 RONTELOSE FORT od 347 PORTE ET ETS POR T orrian 348 PORTINPUT PORT START END TIMEOUT LENGTH sccsceccececseceesecseeeseeeeseesesesensesanes 349 PORTPRINT ZOR 15 NO Aa 350 POR TREAD PORT PERIOD ido 351 REVISION 12 PAGE XI TABLE OF CONTENTS CRIMSON USER MANUAL POR TORT SPORE TE caba 352 PORTWRITELPOR T DATA iba 353 POSTRE CODE TRANSITO a 354 ROWERCALUE POWER state 355 RADA DE GCA praia ino 356 RANDOMC RANGE ds 357 READDATA DATA COUNT Dio 358 READER CA oie 359 READFILEMINE FICE sic 360 RENAMEFILE HANDLE NAME iii a 361 RIGHTCSI RING COUNT oia 362 SAVECAMERASETUP PORT CAMERA INDEX FILE sssceceececeeceeecce
300. o be able to access the G3 web server REVISION 12 PAGE 205 WEB SERVER SAMPLES CRIMSON USER MANUAL In case the TCP port defined in the Web Server module is different from 80 the IP address entered in the web browser has to be followed by a colon and the port required For example http 192 168 100 0 81 WEB SERVER SAMPLES The picture below shows the main menu displayed by the web server Demo Web Server Microsoft Internet Explorer E lO xj File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back gt amp A A seach GFavorites meda 4 B E E tnks z address El http 1192 9 200 188 OOOO de Demo Web Server Option Description view Data Display a list showing available data pages view Logs Download files from the G303 s data logger Remote View Display a view of the G303 s display and keyboard Custom Site Display the home page of the custom website 1993 2003 Red Lion Controls E Done 89 Internet The picture below shows a list of standard web pages Z Directory of Available Pages Microsoft Internet Explorer E x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back gt amp A A search GFavorites meda B S A Links z Address a http 192 9 200 163 auto default htm y Go Directory of Available Pages Name Sample Web Page BACK 1993 2003 Red Lion Controls E Done Internet The picture below shows a standard web page cont
301. o define the color pair to be used to display the tag when it is in the on state e The Tag Off property is used to define the color pair to be used to display the tag when it is in the off state Not present on G303 and other monochrome devices REVISION 12 PAGE 71 EDITING FLAG TAGS CRIMSON USER MANUAL THE ALARMS TAB The Alarms tab of a flag variable or formula contains the following properties gar Untitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 Motori Running Level Alarm a ela manual y Disabled y le active Off y Motor1 Stopped To include this tag in a custom web page use 3 e The Event Mode property is used to indicate the logic that will be used to decide whether the alarm should activate The tables below list the available modes moos LV 175 TT Active Off The tag 1s false The following modes are only available when a setpoint is defined Moor ALARM Wnt nervar wen The tag does not equal its setpoint The tag does not respond to an ON setpoint The tag does not respond to an OFF setpoint The tag equals its setpoint e The Event Name property is used to define the name that will be displayed in the alarm viewer or in the event log as appropriate Crimson will suggest a default name based upon the tag s label and the event mode that has been selected e The Trigger property is used to indicate whether the alarm should be edge or level triggered In the forme
302. o the tag has to be an integer Use the transform property on the tag to modify the data source You might have to try multiple solutions to solve the issue http www redlion net g3 TROUBLESHOOTING PROBLEM Symbol or image leaves a trace when animated Rich Bar Graph or Dial Gauge does not move Trend Viewer curve stuck at the bottom Display shows TIMEOUT or NOT READY or WORKING USB Drivers location for Windows USB Driver installation Upgrading Crimson did not upgrade the software version GENERAL POSSIBLE CAUSES POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS The background of the image is not refreshed Tag minimum and maximum are not setup No minimum and maximum setup on the data tags displayed in the viewer Program issue Location of the drivers unknown The operating system is unable to find the driver or the installation failed The option selected during the upgrade was Modify instead of Repair Change the primitive Fill Format to Solid color Add the system variable dispcount in the background of the image to force the refresh Check the tag s minimum and maximum values These are used by both primitives for min and max Check that all displayed tags in the trend viewer have a Minimum and a Maximum setup See program troubleshooting The drivers are located under Crimson 2 0 Device installation folder For example C Program File
303. o treat as a single object you may select them as described above and then use the Group command on the Arrange menu You can perform the same operation by pressing the Ctr1 G key combination Once a group has been created it can be moved sized and copied just like a single object A group can be broken into its component primitives by selecting it and using the Ungroup command or the Ctr1 U key combination Note that groups can comprise both primitives and other groups and that groups can be nested indefinitely You should typically avoid excessive levels of grouping however as 1t can make 1t difficult to edit the most deeply nested primitives EDITING PRIMITIVES In addition to the above primitives can be edited in various ways e The various clipboard commands on the Edit menu eg Cut Copy and Paste or the corresponding toolbar icons can be used to duplicate items or move them around on a page or between pages The Duplicate command can be used to perform a Copy operation immediately followed by a Paste operation Note that when a Paste is performed Crimson will offset the newly pasted item if it will exactly overlay an item of the same type e The more detailed properties of a primitive can be edited by double clicking the primitive or by using the Properties command on the Edit menu A dialog box will be displayed allowing all of the primitives to be accessed The properties associated with each primitive will be described bel
304. ode property is used to indicate whether you wish to specify the number of data points to be displayed or whether you want the software to PAGE 158 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING A COLOR USER INTERFACE PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS display one data point for each horizontal pixel of the primitive The Points to Show property 1s used to specify the number of points to be displayed when the Sizing Mode is so configured e The Show Channels property is used to specify an optional integer value that controls which channels are displayed If an expression is entered channel n will be shown if and only if the n bit of the value is set The n bit is defined as the bit having the weight of 2 such that the lowest order bit is bit 0 Bit 0 represents the first tag in the list displayed in the Pens tab Bit 1 would be the second tag in the list e The Fill Format properties are used to define the background of the primitive e The Line Format properties are used to specify the format of the optional border around the primitive Note that these properties do no change the pens used to draw the actual channel data the colors of these lines are defined by the system e The Show Item property defines if the primitive should be displayed or not depending of the expression The Pens page provides a way to change the color of the trace for each tag present in the data log Select the tag to get the corresponding color The color is changed via t
305. of usage e The Text Type property is used to indicate whether the text should be drawn with a solid or transparent background Transparent text can be used to overlay multiple primitives while still allowing those primitives to be seen e Foreground and Background properties are used to specify the colors to be used to draw the text Obviously having the same color for both settings will render the text invisible a fact that can be exploited to show or hide text as required e The Horizontal and Vertical justification properties are used to indicate where the text should be placed within the bounding rectangle of the primitive THE AUTO TAG PRIMITIVE The Auto Tag primitive allows you to select a tag and then automatically place E the appropriate text primitive on the display For example selecting an integer tag will allow insertion of an appropriately configured integer text primitive This 1s the icon you will use most often for adding tags to a page It first displays the dialog box shown below to allow tag selection and then creates one of the five tag text primitives described in the next section The new primitive will be configured so as to display the tag in question using its label and its formatting properties as defined when the tag was created REVISION 12 PAGE 137 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL PAGE 138 Select Tag x Tag List X Tanklevel Create Tag Y Flag Variable y Create
306. om the software s image library The first of these tabs 1s shown below der Button Properties xj Properties additional Images Action Button Options Label Button Translate Style Custom Images y Layout llabelattop Text Format Foreground o Fixed CET Pick Set s Defaults e The Label property 1s used to define the text to be shown on the button e The Style property is used to define the style of button to be displayed STYLE DESCRIPTION Round A round button comprising two concentric circles Flat Rectangle A rectangular button comprising two nested rectangles 3D Rectangle A rectangular button drawn using 3D coloring effects 3D Rectangle with Bevel A rectangular button with more pronounced 3D effects Custom Images A button based upon two custom images e The Layout property is used to indicate where if anywhere the label should be placed when using custom images to define the button s appearance e The Text Format properties are used to define the label font and coloring PAGE 162 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING A COLOR USER INTERFACE PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS The second page 1s used to define additional formatting information cor Button Properties x Properties Additional Images Action Fill Format Fill Style Solid Color 57 Fill Color 1 Fixed Gray Fick Fill Color 2 Fixed la Black Y Pick Line Format Line
307. omms ports This means that if either port is used for a slave protocol the other port is unavailable It also means that if a token passing protocol such as Allen Bradley DH 485 is employed the other port is similarly disabled Other G3 panels impose no such restrictions e The unit s programming port may be used as an additional communications port but 1t will obviously not be available for download if it 1s so employed This is not an issue if the USB port is used for such purposes and it is highly recommended that you use this method of download if you want to connect serial devices via the programming port REVISION 12 PAGE 23 SELECTING A PROTOCOL CRIMSON USER MANUAL SELECTING A PROTOCOL To select a protocol for a particular port click on that port s icon in the left hand pane of the Communications window and press the Edit button next to the Driver field in the right hand pane The following dialog box will appear Driver Picker for Raw Serial Port 3 x m Manufacturer Driver o Driver Selected Danfoss DF1 Master GE DH485 Master version 1 02 Klockner Moeller Matsushita Mitsubishi Electric Modbus Omron PLC Direct Koyo Red Lion Siemens Select the appropriate manufacturer and driver and press the OK button to close the dialog box The port will then be configured to use the appropriate protocol and a single device icon will be created in the left hand pane If you are co
308. on will switch to Tag mode and show the tag name in the selection field CONSTANTS Constants represent not surprisingly constant numbers or strings INTEGER CONSTANTS Integer constants represent a single 32 bit signed number They may be entered in decimal binary octal or hexadecimal as required The examples below show the same number entered in the four different number bases Decimal 123 Binary 061111011 Octal 0173 The U and L suffixes supported by earlier versions of software are not used http www redlion net g3 WRITING EXPRESSIONS DATA VALUES CHARACTER CONSTANTS Character constants represent a single ASCII character encoded in the lower 8 bits of a 32 bit signed number A character constant comprises a single character enclosed in single quotation marks such that A can be used to represent a value of 65 Certain otherwise unprintable or unrepresentable characters can be encoded using what are called escape sequences each of which is introduced with a single backslash Sequence va O ams Pana ecc vate repress by ana gt Rasa tats tenses CO Asin cuotion martian gt Re a oso gio mr cara LOGICAL CONSTANTS Logical constants represent a 1 or O value that is used to indicate the truth or otherwise of a yes or no expression An example of something that can be assigned to be equal to a logical constant is a tag that represents a digital output in a PLC Logical co
309. ontrol may be defeated by certain advanced hacking techniques and is not warranted by Red Lion Controls ADDING WEB PAGES In addition to the facilities described above the web server supports the display of generic web pages each of which contains a predefined list of tag values These pages are created by pressing the Create Web Page button below the web server properties and are stored in a list similar to that used for display pages data logs and so on File Edit View Page Link Help Deal texa Le 8 WebPage1 Each web page has the following properties e The Title property is used to identify the web page in the menu presented to the user via their web browser Although the title 1s translatable current versions of Crimson use only the US version of the text e The Refresh property is used to indicate whether or not the web browser should be instructed to refresh the page contents automatically Update rates between 1 and 8 seconds are supported Note that the amount of flicker exhibited by the web browser will vary according to the exact package used and the performance of the machine being employed The update is not intended to be flicker free e The Use Colors property not available in the G303 is used to indicate if the tags colors should be displayed for this page in the web browser The color displayed in the web browser will follow the one defined for each tag and will t
310. or Time and Date Properties x Froperties Format Data Label Data Format Field Type Date Then Time Time Format 12 Hour civil AM Suffix Locale Default Translate PM Suffix Locale Default Translate Show Seconds yes Date Format Locale Default Show Month Jas Digits Show Year as 2 Digits e The Label Text property is used to define an optional label for the primitive e The Field Type property is used to indicate whether the field should display the time the date or both In the last case this property also indicates in which order the two elements should be shown e The Time Format property is used to indicate whether 12 hour civil or 24 hour military time format should be used As with other properties leaving this set to Locale Default will allow Crimson to pick a suitable format according to the language selected within the operator panel e The AM Suffix and PM Suffix properties are used with 12 hour mode to indicate the text to be appended to the time field in the morning and afternoon as appropriate If you leave the property undefined Crimson will use a default e The Show Seconds property is used to indicate whether the time field should include the seconds or whether it should just comprise hours and minutes e The Date Format property is used to indicate the order in which the various date elements ie date month and year should be displayed e The Show Month proper
311. or a list of supported actions Refer to the Data Availability section in this chapter for details of a timeout than can occur when using these properties The On Tick property is used to define an action that will run every second during the period for which this page is displayed Refer to the Writing Actions section and the Function Reference for a list of supported actions If a lack of data availability results in this action being unable to execute 1t will be skipped and retried one second later The Period is the time in seconds to wait before performing the action specified On Timeout 1s the action to be performed when the period of time has expired The Parent Page property 1s used to indicate the page to be displayed when the panel s Exit key is pressed while this page 1s active Selection of this page can be overridden using the techniques below The Next Page property is used to indicate the page to be displayed when the panel s Next key is pressed while this page is active and when the cursor is on the last data entry field on the page This selection can also be overridden The Previous Page property is used to indicate the page to be displayed when the panel s Prev key is pressed while this page is active and when the cursor is on the first data entry field on the page This selection can also be overridden If you have too many data entry fields to fit on a single page the Next Page and Previous Page properties can be
312. or flag variables THE DATA TAB FORMULAE The Data tab of an integer formula contains the following properties cerUntitled File Crimson 2 0 e The Tag Value property is used to specify the value represented by this tag It is typically set to a combination of other tags linked together using math operators In the example above the tag is set to be equal to the sum of two tank levels therefore indicating the total amount of feedstock available e The Scaling and Transforms properties are as described for integer variables e The Setpoint properties are as described for integer variables REVISION 12 PAGE 75 EDITING INTEGER TAGS THE DATA TAB ARRAYS The Data tab of an integer array contains the following properties gar Untitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 File Edit view Tag Link Help lolx Ose 4 Z i bmx lar 2 9 Data Tags 3 4 Tags X MotorSpeed Y MotorStopped Y Flag rray Y Motori X IntFormula X Int rray Colors Format Data Array Data ES Mapping 54 Elements 16 integers Sign Mode Driver Defat y Access Read and write y Storage Simulation m Communications Read Policy Read Adaptively y Read Ahead 3 registers Read Behind 3 registers Actions On Write None To include this tag in a custom web page use 5 OVER cars NUM CRIMSON USER MANUAL e The Mapping pro
313. ord will need to be REVISION 12 PAGE 213 CREATING USERS CRIMSON USER MANUAL re entered Enabling this feature produces higher security and may be required to comply with security standards in certain industries e The Default Access properties are used to indicate the access to be provided to various objects should no specific access be defined for that item The settings are as described in the Access Control section above e The Default Logging properties are used to indicate whether changes to mapped and unmapped tags should be logged should no specific logging criteria be defined for a tag It 1s not possible to log programmatic access by default as such logging should be carefully considered to avoid excessive log activity e The Logging Control properties are used to define whether and how the security logs should be created Refer to the Configuring Data Logging chapter for information on how the data 1s written and how files are named CREATING USERS PAGE 214 You may use the Create User button to create as many users as you need The users may be renamed or deleted using the left hand pane To select a user either click on the name in the list or use the up and down arrows in the toolbar Alternatively you can use the Alt Left and Alt Right key combinations to move up and down the list as required These keys will work no matter which pane is selected gar Untitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 j lol xj File Edit Yiew Us
314. ormat tab of the dialog box If something else has been selected you will only have the second option e The Flash on Alarm property is used to indicate whether or not you want the text on the G3 s display to flash if the tag entered in the value property is currently in an alarm state This property is not available for string text primitives or for those primitives that have a non tag value defined for the value property e The balance of the properties control the font colors and justification to be used when drawing the primitive These properties require no further explanation The second page varies according to the primitive in question and displays the same information as the Format tab of the associated tag type Different sections of the page will be enabled according to the settings provided for the Get Label and Get Format properties The example below shows the Format tab for an integer text primitive corInteger Text Properties x Froperties Format Data Label Label Text ankLeve Translate Minimum value Y General s Per Format Maximum value fF General 4s Per Format Data Format Number Base Decimal Sign Mode Unsigned Digits Before DP 5 Digits After DP a Leading Zeros Yes E Group Digits No Prefix Mone Translate Suffix Mone Translate As can be seen the properties shown are indeed identical to those shown on the Format tab of an integer tag As men
315. orming complex actions on every display update You should also note that in many cases actions that you may think need to be run on each update can be performed using triggers or by using mapping blocks e The Parent Page property is used to indicate the page to be displayed when the panel s Exit key is pressed while this page 1s active Selection of this page can be overridden using the techniques below e The Next Page property is used to indicate the page to be displayed when the panel s Next key is pressed while this page 1s active and when the cursor is on the last data entry field on the page This selection can also be overridden e The Previous Page property is used to indicate the page to be displayed when the panel s Prev key is pressed while this page is active and when the cursor is on the first data entry field on the page This selection can also be overridden e The Period property is used to define the time in seconds to wait without any user interaction occurring before performing the action specified in the On Timeout property These properties are typically used to remove a popup or to return to some sort of menu screen after several seconds of inactivity If you have too many data entry fields to fit on a single page the Next Page and Previous Page properties can be used to link together a series of pages to allow the operator to edit the fields in sequence Crimson will automatically position the cursor appropriatel
316. ormulae to alias the array elements e The Read Policy property is used to define how Crimson will read the data for arrays that are mapped to remote data items The table below lists the various policies that can be configured and describes their operation Read Adaptively Read Manually Read Whole Array Any referenced array elements will be added to the communications scan Data either side of a referenced element as defined by the Read Ahead and Read Behind properties will be read as well Old data may be displayed momentarily when an element from an adaptive array 1s first displayed on the panel The array will be read if and only if the ReadData function is called This mode is useful for items that are read only rarely or which are known not to change in the remote device The entire array will be added to the communications scan if any element in the array is referenced This mode ensures that all data items are available before they are referenced but can lower system performance e The Read Ahead and Read Behind properties modify the behavior of the adaptive read policy by controlling how many adjoining registers will be read when a specific array element is referenced The adjoining reads are used to maximize the chance of data being available when indirection is used to scroll up or down an array The default values should be suitable for most applications e The On Write property is as described for flag v
317. ors described in the Writing Actions section or it may run a program In the example above a user defined action is used to implement a momentary pushbutton BLOCK DEFAULT ACTION This action does not actually do anything but can be used as a place holder to prevent further processing As an example suppose you have configured F1 to perform a global action but want to prevent this action from being invoked on a particular page By configuring F1 on that page as Block Default Action the global action will not occur http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING THE G303 USER INTERFACE CHANGING THE LANGUAGE CHANGING THE LANGUAGE To configure a key to change the language displayed by the operator panel select User Defined mode and enter SetLanguage n as the On Pressed property where n is a number between 1 and 8 according to the language to be displayed The display page will be redrawn in the selected language with any text for which translations have been entered including fixed text tag labels and tag formatting information adjusted as appropriate Pages that are subsequently displayed will also be drawn in the selected language ADVANCED TOPICS The following sections deal with more advanced issues relating to keyboard actions ACTION PROCESSING When a key is pressed or released Crimson goes through a defined sequence when deciding what to do with the event If any stage results in some action being performed the sequence
318. ort indicated by port The port must be configured to use a raw driver such as the raw serial port driver or either of the raw TCP IP drivers The character will be transmitted and the function will return The port driver will handle handshaking and control of transmitter enable lines as required FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE PortWrite 1 A REVISION 12 PAGE 353 POSTKEY CODE TRANSITION CRIMSON USER MANUAL PosTKEY CODE TRANSITION ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Adds a physical key operation to the queue FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE void EXAMPLE PostKey 0x80 0 KEY coon o CN ons Funan Kay CS ose rneionKey 7 CA os rneionKey a ona Soh keys roan ALARMS ona Soh Kays foam wre fons Sotkeys ows E Co one Co Co Com foun Co CN CO CN CT CN Key Soft Key 1 Soft Key 2 Soft Key 3 Function Key 5 PAGE 354 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE POWER VALUE POWER POWER VALUE POWER value int float The value to be processed int float The power to which value is to be raised DESCRIPTION Returns value raised to the power th power FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int or float depending on the type of the value argument EXAMPLE Volume Power Length 3 REVISION 12 PAGE 355 RAD2DEG THETA CRIMSON USER MAN
319. orts the ability to create any number of users each of whom will have a username a real name and a password The username is a case insensitive string with no embedded spaces that is used to identify the user when logging on while the real name is typically a longer string that 1s used within logon files to record the human readable identity of the user making a change Note that you are free to use these fields in other ways if 1t suits your application You may for example create users that represent groups of individuals or perhaps roles such as Operators Supervisors and Managers You may also decide to use the real name to hold an item such as a clock number to tie user identities into your MRP system orUntitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 m System Rights I Change Own Password Change All Passwords Maintenance Access m Custom Rights F User Right 1 I User Right 3 I User Right 5 I User Right 7 USER RIGHTS Each user is granted zero or more access rights A user with no rights can access those objects that merely require the identity of the user to be recorded whereas users with more rights can REVISION 12 PAGE 211 SECURITY BASICS CRIMSON USER MANUAL PAGE 212 access those objects that demand those rights to be present Rights are divided into System Rights and User Rights with the former controlling access to facilities within the Crimson software and the latter being available
320. orx This software is the OPC Server identified by the SCADA package permitting access to the operator interface data tags It can run either locally on the SCADA PC or in multi SCADA architecture on a network server accessed by multiple PCs For information on OPCWorx configuration and functionality please see OPC Worx manual available on http www redlion net Support Software OPC Worx Docs OPC Worxrev1 pdf OPC LINK RED LION PRODUCTS DATA EXCHANGE Some Red Lion Controls products have the ability to exchange data using OPC This facility provides direct tag addressing avoiding cumbersome mapping and thus being a major advantage over other traditional protocols such as Modbus TCP The communication architecture is client server based One server can share the data to multiple clients Maximum 4 The client can request and if authorized change data in the server REVISION 12 PAGE 51 OPC COMMUNICATION CRIMSON USER MANUAL PROGRAMMING A SERVER The server interface 1s programmed as described in OPC server settings previously The OPC server just has to be activated so data can be shared Any tags present in the server database will be available for clients except Arrays and String tags PROGRAMMING A CLIENT Access to the server tags 1s achieved via the OPC Master protocol available on the Ethernet protocols in Communication Once the driver is selected a new device HMI is created Communications Lx o 63 Driver Sele
321. ot be permitted e The Show Label property is used to indicate whether or not you want the primitive to include a label to identify the data being displayed If this property is set to yes the label will be left justified within the primitive s bounding rectangle while the data itself will be right justified If this property is set to no the Horizontal Justification property will be used to locate the data within the field Note that this property can be edited via the Field Label commands on the Format menu When no primitive is selected these commands can also be used to set the default value for newly created primitives e The Get Label property is used to indicate from where the label text should be obtained The options presented depend on what was entered for the value property If a tag has been selected you will be given the option of using the tag s default label or entering a new label on the Format tab of the dialog box If something else has been selected you will only have the second option e The Get Format property is used to indicate from where the formatting information for this primitive should be obtained The options presented depend on what was entered for the value property If a tag of the correct data type has REVISION 12 PAGE 101 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL PAGE 102 been selected you will be given the option of using the tag s default formatting or entering modified information on the F
322. ot supported by this version of Crimson Create a new database file corresponding to your device File gt New Check if the cable is connected correctly to the PC and the device programming ports USB or PG Port Check that Crimson is directed to the correct communication port Link gt Options Check that the communication port is not used by another service or software especially for serial ports If you download via Ethernet Check the IP address of the target device in Link gt Options Check that the USB drivers were install successfully Reinstall G3 HMI USB driver under the PC device manager if necessary Make sure the cable is connected or check above solutions Download again with Link gt Update or F9 Insert a CompactFlash Card in the target device Use another communication port for download USB or Serial Change the panel view using View gt Panel gt Display only Update Crimson 2 to the latest version available on www redlion net Choose Repair when upgrading http www redlion net g3 TROUBLESHOOTING SERIAL COMMUNICATION SERIAL COMMUNICATION This section is used to troubleshoot the communication between two devices linked via serial ports 1 e RS232 or RS485 TIP For communication troubleshooting it is strongly advised to create a new Crimson database including only one data tag mapped to a known register in the target device POSSIBLE CAUSES POSSIBLE SOL
323. ot you want the primitive to attempt to label each of the possible states of the tag The states will only be shown if sufficient space exists at the top of the primitive It is also important to select a small enough font to avoid overlapping text e The Get From Tag properties are used to indicate from where the data format and the associated text colors should be obtained The options presented depend on what was entered for the Value property In each case you may manually enter the data in the appropriate properties or assuming a suitable expression has been defined you may instruct the primitive to get the required information from the underlying data tag e The Text Format properties are used to select the font and text colors for the state labels If the primitive is configured to obtain its text colors from the underlying tag the color fields will be disabled http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING A COLOR USER INTERFACE PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS The second tab contains additional formatting information dor Rich 2 State Selector Properties xX Properties Additional Data Entry Format Fill Format Fill Color 1 Fill Color 2 Fixed a Gray Pick Line Format Line Color gt Fixed E white Pick Set s Defaults e The Fill Color 1 property is used to define the color of the rectangular portion of the selector that moves in order to indicate the tag state The Fill Color 2 property 1s
324. otherwise it will remain on the source disk DESCRIPTION This function will transfer the defined file from the operator interface CompactFlash card to the FTP server It will return true if the transfer is successful false otherwise The source and destination file name can be different The remote path is relative to the FTP server setting root path See Synchronization Manager for details FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Success FtpPutFile 0 LOGS Report txt Reports Report txt 1 In this example the file Report txt will be sent to the FTP server and deleted from the CompactFlash Card upon success of the transfer PAGE 290 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE GETALARMTAG INDEX GETALARMTAG VDEX ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION int Tag index number DESCRIPTION This function returns a bit mask integer representing the tag alarms state for the tag identified with index Bit 0 ie the bit with a value of 0x01 represents the Alarm 1 state and bit 1 ie the bit with a value of 0x02 the Alarm 2 Note The tag index can be found from the tag name using the FindTagIndex function FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE AlarmsInTag GetAlarmTag 12 In this example the function returns the states of Alarm 1 and 2 for the tag with index 12 REVISION 12 PAGE 291 GETBATCH CRIMSON USER MANUAL GETBATCH ARGUMEN
325. otocols while the balance of the fields are specific to the protocol that has been selected Note that the devices are given default names by Crimson when they are created These names may be changed by selecting the appropriate icon in the left hand pane and simply typing the new device name ETHERNET CONFIGURATION The G3 s Ethernet port is configured via the Ethernet icon in the left hand pane of the Communications window When this icon is selected the following settings are displayed ePUntitled File Crimson 2 0 lo x File Edit View Link Help DSH r DbDAx lt Pr Communications BB 6303 m Port Settings A Programming Port R5 232 Comms Port Port Mode RS 485 Comms Port E lt 4 Ethernet IP Address Y Protocol 1 Y Protocol 2 Y Protocol 3 Y Protocol 4 Network Mask 255 Gateway 192 Physical Layer IV Enable Full Duplex IV Enable High Speed lover caps num REVISION 12 PAGE 25 ETHERNET CONFIGURATION CRIMSON USER MANUAL PAGE 26 IP PARAMETERS The Port Mode field controls whether or not the port 1s enabled and the method by which the port is to obtain its IP configuration If DHCP mode is selected the G3 will attempt to obtain an IP address and associated parameters from a DHCP server on the local network If the unit is configured to use slave protocols or to serve web pages this option will only make sense if the DHCP server is configured to allocate
326. otor speed is not referenced on the previously displayed page then when the page 1s first displayed Crimson will not know the current speed and will thus be unable to write the new value To handle this if the operator attempts to perform an action for which the required data is not available the G3 panel will display a NOT READY message until the key in question is released The operator must then wait a short while and try the operation again In practice communications updates normally take place quickly enough that even the most nimble fingered operator will be hard pressed to get the message to appear but since 1t may on occasions be seen it is worth explaining A slightly more complex issue comes about if the action defined by a page s On Select property is unable to proceed because it also finds that required data is not available Here Crimson will wait up to thirty seconds for the data to arrive If it does not the action will not be performed and a TIMEOUT message will be displayed for the operator This timeout mechanism is required to avoid problems should a communications link become severed NOTES FOR EDICT USERS PAGE 182 Users of Red Lion s Edict 97 software should note e Pages no longer have text and graphic layers as all primitives are graphical in nature This means that the concept of a page format is similarly redundant e Page categories have been replaced with system primitives Where Edict
327. ou will notice that the for statement contains three distinct elements each separated by semicolons The first element is the initialization step which is performed once when the loop first begins the next is the condition which is tested at the start of each loop iteration to see if the loop should continue the final element is the induction step which is used to make a change to the control variable to move the loop on to its next iteration Again remember that if you want more than one action to be included in the loop include them in curly brackets THE Do LOOP This type of loop is similar to the while loop except that the condition 1s tested at the end of the loop This means that the loop will always execute at least once The architecture of the do loop statement is as follow actionl1 while condition REVISION 12 PAGE 191 NOTES FOR EDICT USERS CRIMSON USER MANUAL The example below shows the example from above rewritten to use a do loop t Datal1 while i lt 10 return t LOOP CONTROL Two additional statements can be used within loops The break statement can be used to terminate the loop early while the continue statement can be used to skip the balance of the loop body and begin another iteration without executing any further code To make any sense these statements must be used with if statements to make their execution conditional The example below shows a loop that terminates
328. ow DEFINING COLORS PAGE 122 Many properties of primitives relate to the colors in which the primitive is to be drawn The example below shows one of the fill colors from a Rectangle primitive Fill Color 1 gt Fixed Gray Fick http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING A COLOR USER INTERFACE DEFINING FILL PATTERNS You will note that the color property is presented by means of a drop down menu button a drop down list and the Pick button The drop down menu is used to select the color mode which can be any one of the following e In Fixed mode the color does not change and is selected from the drop down list or by invoking the color selection dialog by pressing the Pick button e In Tag Text mode the color is animated to match the foreground color defined by a particular tag The specific tag can be selected by pressing the Pick button e In Tag Back mode the color is animated to match the background color defined by a particular tag The specific tag can be selected by pressing the Pick button The drop down list contains the fixed following colors e The sixteen standard VGA colors e The sixteen custom colors defined by the user e Fourteen shades of gray that fall between black and white The color selection dialog referenced above is shown below Basic colors Mi FM MF Mj FEF pmi ies f A f 4 EEE EEE g EERE E Custom colors Se Sar Sat 126 Green 1194 Define Custom Colors gt
329. ow data entry via buttons via direct manipulation or via both methods You should note that direct manipulation can be somewhat risky in that accidental touches may result in large changes to process values e The Get From Tag property is used to indicate whether the data format should be obtained from the controlling value or from the Format page Note that most of the format values are unused save the minimum and maximum values e The Line Format properties are used to define the style of the primitive s outline e The Fill Format properties are used to define the color and style of the primitive s background and of the slider itself The background is drawn in Fill Color 2 while the slider is drawn in either Fill Color 1 or the combination of the two colors that 1s specified by the Fill Style The second page is used to control data entry and functions are as for tag text primitives You are thus referred to the earlier section for more information The third page is used to define REVISION 12 PAGE 147 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL PAGE 148 the optional label and the minimum and maximum values possibly by means of a complete data format This page functions as was previously discussed for integer data tags and you are referred to that section for further details THE ALARM VIEWER PRIMITIVE The Alarm Viewer primitive 1s used to provide the operator with a method to view and accept active alarms Differin
330. p to allow the entry of user credentials You do not normally have to use this function as Crimson will prompt for credentials when any action that requires security clearance 1s performed FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE UserLogon REVISION 12 PAGE 395 WAITDATA DATA COUNT TIME WAITDATA DA7A COUNT TIME CRIMSON USER MANUAL data any First array element to be read INT Number of elements to be read int The timeout period in milliseconds DESCRIPTION Requests that count elements from array element data onwards to read on the next comms scan This function 1s used with arrays that have been mapped to external data and which have their read policy set to Read Manually Unlike ReadData the function waits for up to the time specified by the time parameter in order to allow the data to be read The return value is one if the read completed within that period or zero otherwise FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE status WaitData array1 8 PAGE 396 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE WRITEFILE FILE TEXT WRITEFILE FILE TEXT file int File handle as required by OpenFile DESCRIPTION Writes a string up to 512 characters in length to the specified file and returns the number of bytes successfully written This function does not automatically include a Line feed and carria
331. pages The exact usage of these rights 1s up to the system designer SPECIFYING TAG SECURITY Each writable tag has a tab called Security which is used to define the access control and write logging settings for that tag If you do not define specific settings the system will use the appropriate default settings depending on whether it is mapped to external data SPECIFYING PAGE SECURITY The access control settings for a display page are defined via the Properties dialog er Page Properties b x Basic Links Actions Security Security Access Control Default for Object Edit Once again if no setting is defined default settings will be used THE SECURITY MANAGER PRIMITIVE The Security Manager Primitive is used to display the names of users present on the system It can be used to change a user s password depending on the rights allocated to the active user The only editable properties of this primitive define the fonts to be used and whether or not the primitive should be displayed Refer to other primitives for descriptions of these settings SECURITY RELATED FUNCTIONS Please refer to Appendix A later in this manual for details on the UserLogOn UserLogOff and TestAccess functions This third function is useful when changing many values from within a program as it allows you to force an access check early in the code to avoid making changes only to have later operations fail due to insufficien
332. panel and to relay messages if required by the application e The Server Port Number property is used to define the TCP port number that will be used for SMTP sessions The default value is 25 This value will be suitable for most applications and will only need to be adjusted if the SMTP server has been reconfigured to use another port e The Domain Name property is used to specify the domain name that will be passed to the SMTP server in the HELO command The vast majority of SMTP servers ignore this string In the unlikely event that your SMTP server attempts to do a DNS lookup to confirm the identity of its client you may need to enter something appropriate to your DNS configuration e The Reverse Path property is used to specify the email address that will be supplied as the originator of the messages sent by the operator panel The property comprises a display name and an email address Since the panel is not capable of receiving messages the email address will often be set to something that will return an undeliverable message if a reply is sent PAGE 38 http www redlion net g3 ADVANCED COMMUNICATIONS USING ELECTRONIC MAIL e The Record Log File property can be enabled to keep a log of all SMTP interactions in the root directory of the CompactFlash card This file can be useful when debugging SMTP operations but it will tend to degrade performance slightly e The nitial Timeout property is used to specify how long the ma
333. perator interface e The Fill format properties are used to define the background of the primitive e The Line Format properties are used to specify the format of the optional border around the primitive e The Show Item property defines if the primitive should be displayed or not depending of the expression THE TRENDING PRIMITIVES The Data Logger primitive provides a fixed view of the data contained within a data logger The number of data points to be displayed may be defined and channels may be shown or hidden using a bit mask The Trend Viewer primitive provides a more advanced interactive view of a data logger allowing the operator to zoom in zoom out and to scroll backwards and forwards through historical data that is saved in the logger s history buffer The data logger primitive is configured via two property pages shown below is the general properties page cor Data Logger Properties x Froperties Pens Log Options Ls eeu Sizing Mode Specify Point Count Points to Show o oso Show Channels General C Edit Fill Format Fil Style E solid color rl Fil Color 1 e Fixed E cray sf Fick Fil Color 2 Fixed CEA a Fick Line Format Line Style jsoidcolor sts Line Color Fixed O white of Fick Display Skate Show Iker General TRUE Edit Set s Defaults e The Data Log property is used to select the data log to be displayed e The Sizing M
334. perty is used to specify if the variable is to be mapped to a register in a remote device or if 1t exists only within the terminal If you press the arrow button and select a device name from the resulting menu you will be presented with a dialog box that will allow a PLC register to be selected e The Elements property is used to indicate how many data items the array should hold Array elements are referred to using square brackets such that Array 0 is the first element and Array n 1 is the last element where n is equal to the value entered for this property e The Sign Mode property is used to override the default behavior of the comms driver when reading 16 bit values from a remote device The driver will normally make a decision about whether to treat these values as signed or unsigned based upon how the data is normally used within the device If you want to override this decision set this property as required e The remainder of the properties are as described for the Data tab of flag tags THE FORMAT TAB The Format tab of an integer tag contains the following properties cerUntitled File Crimson 2 0 Eile Edit View Tag Link Help Dare EX ar ta FS B Tags X Tanki X Tank2 X Total Label m Data Label Text otal Feedstoc Translate X Arrayl m Data Limits Minimum Value Y General As Per Forma Edt Maximum Value Y General As Per Format Edt Triggers A
335. ple blocks to access the different ranges of the Mitsubishi device DATA TRANSFORMATION You may also use Gateway Blocks to perform math operations that your PLC might not otherwise be able to handle For example you may want to read a register from the PLC scale it take the square root and write it back to another PLC register To accomplish this refer to the section on Data Tags and create a mapped variable to represent the input value that will be read from the device Then create a formula to represent the output value setting the expression so as to perform the required math You can then create a Gateway Block targeted at the required output register and drag the formula across to instruct Crimson to write the derived value back to the PLC NOTES FOR EDICT USERS Users of Red Lion s Edict 97 operator interface configuration software will by this point no doubt be wondering what happened to the Communications Blocks that they know and love so well The answer is simple Crimson manages communications blocks automatically and only reads and writes the data that is needed to satisfy the requirements of the system at that time This means that if a register is only accessed on a given page it will only be read when that page is selected The communications process is thus automatically optimized Other communications differences between Edict 97 and Crimson are e Slave protocols are no longer handled via Communications Blocks but
336. pped to registers 400001 through 400002 The direction of the arrows indicates that the G3 provides these values into the PLC So the PLC can only read them Next another block 1s created so the PLC can write data in the G3 This 1s done by changing the block s Direction property to Device to G3 In the example below Var3 and Var4 are mapped to registers 400010 through 400011 or Untitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 File Edit View Link Help OSsel47 toe x m 4 BB 63 Programming Port RS 232 Comms Port Modbus RTU Slave PLCI Block 1 X 400001 vari i EX X 400002 Var2 i bn X 400003 7 Not Mapped X 400004 X 400005 m Block 2 X 400010 var3 X 400011 Var4 RS 485 Comms Port ad Ethernet S Protocol 1 Y Protocol 2 S Protocol 3 Y Protocol 4 S By Services E Mail Manager iy OPC Server E FTP Server ga Time Manager n Sync Manager over caps NUM Note the color of the block is red telling you the PLC can write data in any registers linked to this block The arrows also indicate that the PLC can also read data from the block so this block has a Read Write access NOTE Make sure block starting addresses are far enough so no common address can exist between blocks A register address for example 400010 has to be unique for all blocks used under a single protocol Communications ar
337. ppended to the data in the string CALLING PROGRAMS Programs that return values may be invoked within expressions by following the program name with a pair of parentheses For example Program1 10 will invoke the associated program and multiply the return value by 10 Obviously the return type for Program1 must be set to integer or floating point for this to make sense USING FUNCTIONS Crimson provides a number of predefined functions that can be used to access system information or to perform common math operations These functions are defined in detail in the Function Reference They are invoked using a syntax similar to that for programs with any arguments to the function being enclosed within the parentheses For example cos 0 will invoke the cosine function with an argument of 0 returning a value of 1 0 PRIORITY SUMMARY PAGE 222 The table below shows the priority of all the operators defined in this section COTO Onenarons oot Goo o Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 7 Group 8 Group 9 Group 10 http www redlion net g3 WRITING EXPRESSIONS NOTES FOR EDICT USERS CC Operators in the lower numbered groups are applied first NOTES FOR EDICT USERS Users of Red Lion s Edict 97 software should note e The amp amp and operators stop evaluation once the result is known e The only available data types are string integer and floating point e The ternary operator is now supported
338. property is used to configure the system so as to disable the display backlight after the specified number of seconds of inactivity This facility can be used to extend the life of the backlight components The operator can reactivate the backlight by pressing a key or touching an active area of the touch screen The key press or touch is ignored until the backlight is lit The Activate Beeper property is used to control if the beeper should sound when the HMI touch screen or soft key buttons are pressed This property will not deactivate the beeper for other events such as alarms or beep functions The One Touch Data Entry property defines whether or not the keypad should pop up after one touch or two touches on a data entry field Selecting No requires two touches to allow data entry The Keypad Next Prev Keys property defines whether or not the system keypad popups for data entry should include the Next and Prev keys Next and Prev keys are used to jump from one data entry field to another so as to avoid hiding the keypad between each data entry The Select Languages button is described in Selecting Languages below The Advanced tab provides more evolved parameters explained below cerUntitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 File Edit View Key Page Link Help Oesel 4 i bax o E Watchdog Failure show GMC After Restart 3 m Error Recovery m e m Software Exception ARA Database Contents
339. ps num To move data between two master devices simply select one of the devices and create a Gateway Block for that device You can then add references to the other device s registers just as you would when exposing data on a slave protocol Again C2 will automatically read PAGE 30 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING COMMUNICATIONS DATA TRANSFORMATION or write the data as required transparently moving data between the devices The example above shows how to move data from a Mitsubishi FX into an SLC 500 WHICH WAY AROUND One question that may occur to you is whether you should create the Gateway Block within the Allen Bradley device as in this example or within the Mitsubishi device The first thing to note is that there is no need to create more than a single block to perform transfers in a single direction If you create a block in AB to read from MITFX and a block in MITFX to write to AB you ll simply perform the transfer twice and slow everything down The second observation is that the decision as to which device should own the Gateway Block is essentially arbitrary In general you should create your blocks so as to minimize the number of blocks in the database This means that if the registers in the Allen Bradley lay within a single range but the registers in the Mitsubishi are scattered all over the PLC the Gateway Block should be created within the Allen Bradley device so as to remove the need to create multi
340. r case the alarm will trigger when the condition specified by the event mode first becomes true In the latter case the alarm will continue in the active state while the condition persists This property can also be used to indicate that this alarm should be used as an event only In this case the alarm will be edge triggered but will not result in an alarm condition Rather an event will be logged to the G3 s internal memory e The Delay property is used to indicate how long the alarm condition must exist before the alarm will become active In the case of an edge triggered alarm or event this property also specifies the amount of time for which the alarm PAGE 72 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING DATA TAGS EDITING INTEGER TAGS condition must no longer exist before subsequent reactivations will result in a further alarm being signaled As an example if an alarm is set to activate when a speed switch indicates that a motor is not running even when the motor has been requested to start this property can be used to provide the motor with time to run up before the alarm is activated e The Accept property is used to indicate whether the user will be required to explicitly accept an alarm before it will no longer be displayed Edge triggered alarms must always be manually accepted e The Priority property is used to control the order in which alarms are displayed by Crimson s alarm viewer The lower the numerical value of the priorit
341. r database program is getting too complex The program takes too much time to run Either run it in the background or reduce the workload If it times out the program was stuck in a loop Make sure that all the tags in the program exist in the target device PAGE 405 WEB SERVER WEB SERVER PROBLEM Internet Browser says Cannot display the web page PAGE 406 CRIMSON USER MANUAL POSSIBLE CAUSES SOLUTIONS Web Server not enabled Ethernet port disabled or Ethernet settings issue Incorrect Crimson device IP address Incorrect PC IP Address Check that the Web Server in Crimson 1s enabled Check that the Ethernet port in Crimson is enabled and has a correct IP address See Ethernet Communication troubleshooting Check that the IP address in the browser matches Crimson s Ethernet IP address Check the PC Ethernet Settings for a valid IP address http www redlion net g3
342. r more such primitives is selected clicking on an icon will change all the selected items to use the selected color If nothing is currently selected clicking on an icon will set the default color for all newly created primitives The various options can also be accessed via the Format menu THE BACKGROUND TOOLBOX The background toolbox is used to control the background color for primitives that contain text elements If one or more such primitives is selected clicking on an icon will change all the selected items to use the selected color If nothing is currently selected clicking on an icon will set the default color for all newly created primitives The various options can also be accessed via the Format menu ADDING DISPLAY PRIMITIVES To add a display primitive to a page click on the required icon in the drawing toolbox or select the required option from the Insert menu The mouse cursor will change to an arrow with a crosshair at its base and you will then be able to drag out the required position of the primitive within the display window erUntitled File Crimson 2 0 E 10 x File Edit View Insert Format Arrange Transform Page Link Help Dea st oeBxl al t o 2 5 A Bl s A GF er SMART ALIGNMENT If you have the Smart Align features of the View menu enabled Crimson will provide you with guidelines to help align a new primitive with existing primitives or with the center of the display In the examp
343. r other server side tricks The filenames used for the HTML files and associated graphics must also comply with the old style 8 3 naming convention This means that file extensions will be for example HT instead of HTML and JPG instead of JPEG This also means that the body of the filename must be eight characters or less and that you must not rely on the difference between upper and lower case to differentiate between pages You may use any directory structure as long as you once again ensure that your directories observe the 8 3 naming convention and do not rely on case differences EMBEDDING DATA To embed tag data within a web page insert the sequence N replacing N with the index number of the tag in question This index number is displayed on the status bar when a tag is selected within the Data Tag window and more or less corresponds to the order in which the tags were created When the web page containing this sequence is served the sequence will be replaced by the current value of the tag formatted according to the tag s properties DEPLOYING THE SITE To deploy your custom web site copy it into the WEB directory on the CompactFlash card to be installed in the terminal To copy the files either mount the card as a drive on your PC as described at the start of this manual or use a suitable card writer connected to your PC Make sure that the Enable Custom Site property 1s set and the custom site will appear on the web ser
344. r2 on the G3 display a keypad will automatically pop up so you can change the data As soon as the enter key is pressed the change will be sent to the target device and the reading should now display the new value REVISION 12 PAGE 9 COMMUNICATIONS G3 AS A SLAVE CRIMSON USER MANUAL COMMUNICATIONS G3 AS A SLAVE PAGE 10 Some applications require the G3 to be set up as a slave The following steps describe how to expose data to the master device All slave protocols use this setup apart of some drivers such as Profibus DP that can be setup like a master protocol First Data Tags have to be created In the main menu enter the Data Tags window and create four integer variables by clicking the Integer button in the Create New Variable group dar Untitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 Fie Edit View Tag Link Help OSal7 stax er 22 4 er Logging Main m Create New Formula Flag integer Multi Real String m Create New Array Variable Mappings Export to File Import from File m Maintenance Validate All Tags Remap Retentive Tags Show Tag Viewer Manipulate Multiple Tags Close the Data Tags window and open the Communications Select the communication port your PLC should be connected to in this example the RS232 Comms Port and click the Edit button in the driver selection area to choose a protocol In this example Modbus RTU Slave has been s
345. ra 220 MANIPULA TINE Sinai 221 AND OR AND AO Roa a asada 221 SHIFT OPERATORS sige aaabaru aware cataaube cubated ubdaniedanted AAA A A 221 DIWISE NO Tai Gevcaen E E E E E eee sms eewenee eds 221 TNDEXING ARRAYS nuroa tidad EE A 221 INDEXING STRINGS Sd id 222 ADDING STRINGS ts 222 CALCENG PROGRAMS isis ron Di bio 222 USING FUNCTION Simat adan 222 PRIORITY OUMMAR Yala 222 NOTES FOR EDICT USERS tica oia 223 WRITING ACTION Sacra 2 2D CHANGING PAGE Sana ds 225 CHANGING NUMERIC VALUES sinasiian ido ii 225 SIMPLE ASSIGNMENT Dread Dd titi 225 COMPOUND ASSIGNMENT o NR 225 INCREMENTAND DECREMENT ia NA 225 CHANGING BIT VALUES aa idad 225 RUNNING PROGRAMS lt a ibas 226 USING FUNCTONS labial 226 OPERATOR PRIOR Nadia 226 NOTES FOR EDICT USERS sde 226 CONFIGURING A SERIAL POR T aaa oi 227 CONFIGURING A TCP IP SOCKET ca 227 READING CHARACTERS amarla 228 READING ENTIRE FRAMES at Ad 228 SENDING ATA wer clica dicslacold dao dscanbdd 229 NOTES FOR EDICT USERS aaa 229 PAGE VIII http www redlion net g3 TABLE OF CONTENTS SYSTEM VARIABLE REFERENCE oscscscscncncncncncncnenenenensnenenenensnenenenenenenenenenensnssees 231 HOW ARE SYSTEM VARIABLES USED desta dd 231 ACTIVE ALARMS rene a 232 COMMS ERROR au 233 DISPBRIGHTNESS stand nent E E A 234 DISPEONTRAST indi 235 A O E EEA Tar 236 DISPUPDA TES Sato 237 ISSTRENON ir 238 na EET EE EE E TPE E AE ETET AE TEE ET EEE EE E DEE E TEET 239 TIMEZONE era iia aa E aaa 240 TIMEZONEMIN Saa 241 Us EDS A
346. re beyond the scope of this manual Rather the aim is to provide a quick overview of the facilities available so that the interested user might experiment further MULTIPLE ACTIONS The simplest type of program comprises a list of actions with each action taking up a single line and being followed by a semicolon All of the various actions defined in the Writing Actions section are available for use Simple programs like this are typically used where combining the actions in a single action definition would otherwise prove unreadable The sample shown below sets several variables and then changes the display page Motorl Motor2 Motor3 GotoPage Pagel The actions will be executed in order and the program will then return to the caller IF STATEMENTS This type of statement is used within a program to make a decision The construct consists of an if statement with a condition in parentheses followed by an action or actions to be executed if the condition is true If more than one action is specified each should be placed on a separate line and curly brackets should be used to group the statements together An optional else clause can be used to provide for code to be run if the condition is false The architecture of the if statement is as follow if condition actionl else action2 The example below shows an if statement with a single action if TankFull StartPump REVISIO
347. re tight timeouts that do not allow the G3 time to relay the data to the PLC a reliance on sending break signals or on the manipulation of hardware handshaking lines or DOS style port access such that the package cannot see the virtual serial ports Luckily these 1ssues are rare and most packages will happily communicate as 1f they were directly connected to the PLC in question TBA USING ELECTRONIC MAIL Crimson can be configured to send email messages when alarm conditions are present or when notifications needs to be provided of other events within the system The methods to be used to deliver email are configured via the Mail icon in the Communications window dar Untitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 Mail Settings Mail Manager Disabled Si G3 Pane Unit Names sms smtp General Mail E lt R5232 485 Option Card RS 232 Com Y R5 485 Com rl Addresses ms Po ms Po t t The properties on a General tab are used to enable or disable mail manager and to provide a name for the operator panel This name will be used within email messages to identify the originator of the message Applications will typically use the name of the machine to which the G3 is attached or the name of the site that it is monitoring CONFIGURING SMTP The SMTP tab is used to configure the Simple Mail Transport Protocol This is the standard protocol used to send email over the Internet or over other TCP IP networ
348. ress entered in the web browser has to be followed by a colon and the port required For example http 192 168 1 10 81 USING MODEMS The second way to access the web server is via a modem connection The G3 supports multiple types of modems such as Landline GSM and GPRS The G3 Ethernet port does NOT have to be activated if you only plan to access the web server via modem Please refer to the Advanced Communication Working With Modems section for more details about modem configuration For a PPP and modem server configuration once the PC and the modem are connected the IP address required in the browser is NOT the G3 Ethernet port IP address but the Local Address defined on the Comm Port where the PPP modem protocol is selected The remote address is the one obtained by the PC upon its connection with the modem Driver Selection 240 secs Init String amp C1 amp D08R18508K0 Edit Additional Init None Log File r Authentication Logon Username None O Logon Password None rm IP Configuration Local Address 192 168 200 1 Remote Address 192 168 200 2 Remote Mask 255 255 255 255 Clear Port Settings For a PPP and modem client configuration the G3 will most likely connect to the Internet using an Internet access provider The IP address to enter in your web browser is therefore the one provided by this service For this reason you will most likely require a fixed IP address t
349. rimitive displays a scale with a specified number of minor and major divisions It is often used to label other primitives such as bar graphs The scale primitives can either be fix or adaptive the latest providing a new set of division if the maximum or minimum is changed The properties are accessed by double clicking the p REVISION 12 rimitive corYertical Scale Properties x Format Colors Orientation Facing Right Major Divisions Minor Divisions Minimum General 0 Edit Maximum General 100 Edit Counts per Major Division 1 Display State Show Item Ff General TRUE Edit Cancel Set As Defaults e The Style property defines if the scale should be fixed or adaptive If the second 1s selected the minimum and maximum are made available for tag mapping so the scale follows tags values e The Orientation property is used to indicate the direction in which the tick marks should point Vertical scales support selections of left and right while horizontal scales support selections of up or down e The Major Divisions property is used to indicate into how many major divisions the scale should be divided Large tick marks are drawn at each division The PAGE 135 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL lowest number of major divisions is one in which case large tick mark will be drawn at the ends of the scale but not along its length This property is onl
350. riority 1 Color LANA O Red TEXT Priority 2 Color O white and C Black TEXT Priority 3 Color white y and E Yellow a TEXT Priority 4 Color jo white and O Blue TEXT Priority 5 Color E white and O Fuchsia TEXT Priority 6 Color jo white and Aqua TEXT Friority 7 Color O white and Silver Priority Color O white and C Gray TEXT Cancel Set s Defaults Up to eight pairs of colors may be assigned to tags with priorities 1 through 8 A priority value greater than 8 will use the setting for priority 8 USING THE HELP BUTTON The Alarm Viewer includes a Help button to provide context help on alarms For example when multiple alarms are active in the viewer the operator can select one of the alarms and push the Help button to get more information or eventual solution for this alarm To use this functionality the help button has to be activated in the Alarm Viewer as shown below Alarm Help e Enable Help Button On Help Programi iData The actions in the OnHelp field will be launched when the Help button is pressed on the alarm viewer Any actions can be entered in the OnHelp field however to use contextual help the following design as to be followed Get alarm selected by user Run a program passing the alarm number Display proper information REVISION 12 PAGE 151 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL The first step is achieved using the syste
351. rn uses Varl as minimum Database is corrupted Most likely a program going in an endless loop The touchscreen is not calibrated correctly CF card corrupted or invalid Check power supply Units require 24 VDC 10 Program one of the soft keys with the action as User Defined and the following code in the field On Pressed dispcontrast Add objects to the User Interface in Crimson Push one of the soft keys to turn 1t back on Replace the backlight tube Remove one of the references or use formula tags for indirect reference e g Forml is equal to Varl and used in Var2 minimum instead of Varl Create a new database or send to technical support for debugging Check if the operation launches program containing loops with no exit point Use the Touch Calibration primitive to recalibrate Primitive available under Insert gt System gt Touch Calib Insert the primitive so it covers the entire screen Format the card from Crimson using the Link gt Format Flash menu PAGE 399 GENERAL PAGE 400 PROBLEM Unit shows Version Mismatch Unit shows Invalid Database 99 Values show Value does not update Value shows BIG or BIG Value deviates by a factor of ten Value is invalid CRIMSON USER MANUAL POSSIBLE CAUSES POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS The database currently in the device does not match Crimson s firmware version Messag
352. s FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE Value GetFormattedTag 10 Returns the value of the tag with index 10 in a string Value GetFormattedTag FindTagiIndex Power Returns the value from the tag with label Power in a string http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE GETINTERFACESTATUS PORT GETINTERFACESTATUS PORT ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION int The interface to be queried DESCRIPTION Returns a string indicating the status of the specified TCP IP interface Refer to the earlier chapter on Advanced Communications for details of how to calculate the value to be placed in the interface parameter and of how to interpret the returned value FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE cstring EXAMPLE EthernentStatus GetInterfaceStatus 1 REVISION 12 PAGE 299 GETINTTAG INDEX GETINTTAG INDEX ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION PAGE 300 CRIMSON USER MANUAL DESCRIPTION Returns the value of the integer tag specified by index The index can be found from the tag label using the function FindTagIndex This function will only work if the targeted tag is an integer FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Value GetIntTag 10 Returns the value of the tag with index 10 Value GetIntTag FindTagIndex Power Returns the value from the tag with label Power http www redlion
353. s Crimson s PPP implementation will ask its peer to use CHAP authentication to avoid transmitting or receiving plaintext password but will fallback to using PAP if the remote client does not support CHAP e The Local Address property is used to define the IP address to be allocated to the local end of the connection This will thus be the IP address of the G3 for this link Please note that this must not be the same as the IP address of the G3 s Ethernet port as every physical IP interface must have a distinct IP address The default value will work in most situations unless your network design demands that you use a different setting e The Remote Address property is used to define the IP address to be allocated to the remote end of the connection It is used together with the Remote Mask property to determine what packets will be routed to this connection For most applications a mask of 255 255 255 255 will be used thereby instructing Crimson to send via this interface only those packets directly bound for the remote client A mask of 0 0 0 0 by contrast will allow all packets that do not specifically match another interface to be forwarded to the remote client presumably for further forwarding to the intended host Intermediate masks may be used to control exactly which packets are sent REVISION 12 PAGE 43 WORKING WITH MODEMS CRIMSON USER MANUAL ADDING A DIAL OuT CONNECTION Dial out connections are added exactly as above ex
354. s Red Lion Controls Crimson 2 0 Device In your operating system device manager check if the device G3HMI is present If so uninstall that device Follow the USB installation guide available on www redlion net Launch the upgrade again and choose Repair when prompted The USB tech note is available under the Human Machine Interface section on the following page REVISION 12 http www redlion net Support VirtualHelpDesk TechNotes html PAGE 401 CRIMSON MESSAGES CRIMSON MESSAGES CRIMSON USER MANUAL ERRORS POSSIBLE CAUSES POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS Device incompatible with file Unable to open communication port No Reply from terminal CompactFlash required for upgrade The window is too small to allow editing The device returned an unexpected reply code PAGE 402 The device you are trying to download into doesn t match the database device The communication port you try to download with is unavailable m Cable not connected Incorrect download communication port Port already used Target device IP address incorrect No USB Drivers Cable is not connected If the message appears while downloading to the device The version of Crimson on the PC is different from the target device firmware version when attempting a download via Ethernet The current User interface view is too small to allow editing The device you are trying to download to is n
355. s for event logging and the Security Manager Include in Batch Mo REVISION 12 PAGE 193 CREATING DATA LOGS CRIMSON USER MANUAL E e MAA Fi El BATCH El 5 WATERA S Loci E WATERB C Loi E O Loss 5 LOG1 O Loc The figure above shows the result on the CompactFlash card for normal logging and batch logging In this example two batches were created one called WATERA and one WATERB Each folder contains a LOGI folder which in turn contains log files with data only recorded while each respective batch was running The data logger created continuous log files under LOGS LOGI1 Note that LOG2 was not included in batch as it does not appear under the batch folders CONTROLLING A BATCH In order to control batch logging some functions are available NewBatch cstring Name will create a batch folder called Name on the CompactFlash card and start batch logging Files recorded after this command will be saved under that folder EndBatch will stop the current running Batch GetBatch will return the name of the current running batch For more information please refer to the functions reference of this manual CREATING DATA LOGS You may use the Create Data Log button to create as many data logs as you need Since each log can record an unlimited number of data tags most applications will only use a single log However since each log has a fixed set of properties in terms of its sample rate you may decide to
356. s over a slave protocol is simply an extension of the mapping process described above except this time instead of dragging a tag from the right hand pane you should expand the appropriate master device and drag across the icon that represents the registers that you want to expose You will then be asked for a start address in the master device and the number of registers to map and the mappings will be created as shown In this example registers N7 0 through N7 7 in an Allen Bradley controller have been exposed for access via Modbus TCP IP as registers 40001 through 40008 Crimson will automatically ensure that these data items are read from the Allen Bradley PLC so as to fulfill Modbus requests and will automatically convert writes to the Modbus registers into writes to the PLC This mechanism allows even simple PLCs to be connected on an Ethernet network MASTER AND MASTER Ioj xj File Edit view Link Help DSH r 3DAx 4 Pr Communications EHH 6303 Available Mappings Programming Port BB 6303 RS 232 Comms Port Mitsubishi FX MM SLCSOD EM MITFX EE MITFX E RS 485 Comms Port DH485 Tags E EM stcsoo 7 Not Mapped E m Block 1 X N007 0001 MITFX DOOO1 X N007 0002 MITFX DOOO2 X NO007 0003 MITFX DO003 X N007 0004 MITFX DOO04 X N007 0005 MITFX DODOS X N007 0006 MITFX DOO06 X N007 0007 MITFX D0007 E 4 Ethernet Y Protocol 1 Y Protocol 2 YS Protocol 3 Y Protocol 4 over ca
357. s2 p9 54 3PUntitled File Crimson 2 o Elle Edit View Key P E D0SO BA m As you can see at each level fewer keys are shown and more of the window is allocated to the display itself The zoom level can be controlled from the View menu by using the magnifying glass icon or by pressing the Alt key together with the digits 1 through 4 OTHER VIEW OPTIONS As well as controlling the zoom the View menu contains the following options e The Page List command can be used to show or hide the left hand pane of the User Interface window If the page list is disabled even more space is made available for editing the display The F4 key toggles the page list on and off e The Hold Aspect command can be used to control whether or not Crimson attempts to maintain the aspect ratio of the display If aspect holding is enabled a figure that would appear as say a circle on the G303 will appear as a perfect REVISION 12 PAGE 91 USING THE PAGE LIST CRIMSON USER MANUAL circle on your PC If this mode is not selected Crimson can expand the display page to use more of the PC s screen but at the expense of some distortion Other options are available during page editing and are described below USING THE PAGE LIST To create rename or delete display pages click on the left hand pane of the User Interface window The various commands on the Page menu can then be used to make the desired changes Alternatively right cl
358. sed to convert a floating point value to an integer value perhaps deliberately giving up some precision from an intermediate value before storing it in a PLC register For example the expression int cos Theta 100 will calculate the cosine of an angle multiply this value by 100 using floating point math and then convert it to an integer dropping any digits after the decimal place COMPARING VALUES You will quite often find that you wish to compare the value of one data with another and make a decision based on the result For example you may wish to define a flag formula to show when a tank exceeds a particular value or you may wish to use an if statement in a program to execute some code when a motor reaches its desired speed The following comparison operators are provided Orenaron Not Equal To Data 100 Each operator produces a value of 0 or 1 depending on the condition it tests The operators can be used on integers floating point values or text strings If strings are compared the comparison is case insensitive ie abc is considered equal to ABC TESTING BITS Crimson allows you to test the value of a bit within a data value by using the bit selection operator which is represented by a single period The left hand side of the operator should be the value in which the bit is to be tested and the right hand side should be an expression indicating the bit number to test This right hand value should be bet
359. should you lose your database file you will be able to extract an editable image from the terminal http www redlion net g3 CRIMSON BASICS Save in Temp e E e Ed _ FrontPageTempDir Desktop Documents This Compu t Save as type Crimson 2 0 Database cd2 y Cancel As The N etwork DOWNLOADING TO A TERMINAL Note that if you lose your database file and you do not have upload support enabled you will not be able to reconstruct your file without starting from scratch To extract a database from a panel use the Link Extract command This command will upload the database and then prompt you for a name under which to save the file The file will then be opened for editing MOUNTING THE COMPACTFLASH If you are connected to a G3 panel via the USB port you can instruct Crimson to mount the G3 s CompactFlash card as a drive within Windows Explorer You can use this functionality to save files to the card or to read information from the Data Logger The drive is mounted and dismounted by sending commands using the Mount Flash and Dismount Flash options on the Link menu Once a command has been sent the G3 panel will be reset and Windows will refresh the appropriate Explorer windows to show or hide the CompactFlash drive This Computer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help System C1 Apps Gr Groups 1 Work iJi Ecco Pr CDROM Re Home Ls vault ys Data ei Programs 9 Control Pan
360. son database files are downloaded to the G3 panel by means of the Link menu The download process typically takes only a few seconds but can take somewhat longer on the first download if Crimson has to update the firmware in the operator panel or if the panel does not contain an older version of the current database After this first download however Crimson uses a process known as incremental download to ensure that only changes to the database are transferred This means that changes can be made in seconds thereby reducing your development cycle time and simplifying the debugging process CONFIGURING THE LINK The programming link between the PC and the G3 is made using an RS 232 serial port a USB port or a TCP IP connection While TCP IP connections are typically made via the panel s Ethernet port they may also be established via a dial in link Before downloading you should use the Link Options command to ensure that you have the method selected Link Options x m Communications Port prceccssecossosos TCP IP TCP Port Panel Emulation Send to Emulator Cancel VERIFYING THE USB LINK If you are using USB you might also want to ensure that the G3 s USB drivers have been correctly installed To do this connect the G3 panel and 1f the drivers have not previously been installed follow the instructions at the start of this manual Then open the Device Manager for your operating s
361. space between the items to achieve equal spacing The two outer primitives will be left in their current positions Note that the command may fail if an inappropriate set of primitives are selected and may not achieve perfect spacing 1f the available space is too limited REORDERING PRIMITIVES Primitives on a display page are stored in what is known as a z order This defines the sequence in which the primitives are drawn and therefore whether or not a given primitive appears to be in front of or behind another primitive In the first example below the blue square is shown behind the red squares ie at the bottom of the z order In the second example it has been moved to the front of the order and appears in front of the other figures REVISION 12 PAGE 121 GROUPING PRIMITIVES CRIMSON USER MANUAL Position 126 315 To move items in the z order select the items and then use the various commands on the Arrange menu The Move Forward and Move Backward commands move the selection one step in the indicated direction while the Move To Front and Move To Back commands move the selection to the indicated end of the z order Alternatively 1f you have a mouse that is equipped with a wheel the wheel can be used to move the selection Scrolling up moves the selection to the back of the z order scrolling down moves the selection to the front GROUPING PRIMITIVES If you have several primitives that you wish t
362. ssive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE D GetNowDate REVISION 12 PAGE 311 GETNOWTIME CRIMSON USER MANUAL GETNOWTIME ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Returns the time of day in terms of seconds FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE t GetNowTime PAGE 312 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE GETPORTCONFIG PORT PARAM GETPORTCONFIG PORT PARAM int Number of the port to be set ine Port parameter to be set DESCRIPTION Returns the value of a parameter on port The port number starts from the programming port with value 1 The table below shows the parameter number and associated return values The actual baud rate e g 115200 ond 1 or a Physical Mode 0 RS232 1 422 Master 2 422 Slave 3 485 FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Config GetPortConfig 2 4 In this example Config will take the value of the current parity setting on the RS232 communication port REVISION 12 PAGE 313 GETREALTAG INDEX GETREALTAG NDE X ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION PAGE 314 CRIMSON USER MANUAL DESCRIPTION Returns the value of the real tag specified by index The index can be found from the tag label using the function FindTagIndex This function will only work if the targeted tag is a real floating point FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE float EXAMPLE
363. stem will display a popup to ask for user credentials using the prompt argument to indicate why the popup is being displayed The function is typically used in programs that perform a number of actions that might be subject to security and that might otherwise be interrupted by a log on popup By executing this function before the actions are performed you can provide a better indication to the user as to why a log on is required and you can avoid a security failure part way through a series of operations FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE if TestAccess 1 Clear all data Datal 0 Data2 0 Data3 0 PAGE 388 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE TEXTTOADDR ADDR TEXTTOADDR ADDR ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION The addressed in dotted decimal form DESCRIPTION Converts a dotted decimal string into a 32 bit IP address FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE ip TextToAddr 192 168 0 1 REVISION 12 PAGE 389 TEXTTOFLOAT STRING CRIMSON USER MANUAL TEXTTOFLOAT S7RING ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Returns the value of string treating it as a floating point number This function is often used together with Mid to extract values from strings received from raw serial ports It can also be used to convert other string values into floating point numbers FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive
364. t it will tend to degrade performance slightly FTP SECURITY Since the FTP Server can provide full remote access to the CompactFlash card for security reasons it has to be protected with password access The Security Manager provides all the flexibility by creating independent users Each user are assigned specific rights Two are available for FTP Server access e Check FTP Server Read Access to authorize a user to download files from the G3 CompactFlash card e Check FTP Server Write Access to authorize a user to upload files to the G3 CompactFlash card 310 Crimson 2 File Edit View User Link Help Ce a seaxl t gt m F Es User Details RealName John Doe y Credentials Passwor eok IV Override Existing m System Rights I7 Change Own Password IF Change All Passwords JV FTP Server Read Access IV FTP Server Write Access Web Server Access Maintenance Access y Custom Rights J User Right 1 J User Right 2 TF User Right 3 TF User Right 4 I User Right 5 I User Right 6 J User Right 7 J User Right 8 ACCESSING THE SERVER To access an FTP server from a web browser type ftp 192 168 200 1 where 192 168 200 1 has to be replaced with your unit IP address REVISION 12 PAGE 59 CONFIGURING DATA TAGS ALL ABOUT TAGS CONFIGURING DATA TAGS Once you have configured the communications options for your database the next step 1s to define the data items that you want
365. t only a single device is required and that things such as the station number to which the G3 will respond are normally configured via the port settings rather than those of the device ADDING GATEWAY BLOCKS Having configured the protocol you must now decide what range of addresses you want the slave protocol to expose In this example we want to use Modbus registers 40001 through 40008 to allow read and write access to certain data items in our database We begin by selecting the device icon in the left hand pane of the Communications window and clicking the Add Gateway Block button in the right hand pane An icon to represent Block 1 will appear and selecting it will show the following settings dar Untitled File Crimson 2 0 BB 6303 Block Settings Programming Port E RS 232 Comms Port Modbus ASCII Slave Start Address 40001 Edit EEN PLCI A Hm Block Size E Edit RS 485 Comms Port ona Device to 63 z Direction Device to G3 Edit E Ethernet Edit Delete This Block In the example above we have configured the Start Address to 40001 to indicate that this 1s where we want the block to begin We have also configured the Block Size to eight so as to allocate one Modbus register for each tag we want to expose Finally we have configured the http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING COMMUNICATIONS SLAVE PROTOCOLS Direction as Device to G3 to indicate that we want remote devices to b
366. t programs using C2 s unique C like programming language These programs can perform complex decision making or data manipulation operations based upon any data items within the system They serve to extend the functionality of Crimson beyond that of the standard functions included in the software thereby ensuring that even the most complex applications can be tackled with ease DATA LOGGER This icon is used to create and manage data logs each of which can record any number of variables to the G3 s CompactFlash card Data may be recorded as quickly as once per second The recorded values will be stored in CSV comma separated variable files that can easily be imported into applications such as Microsoft Excel The files can be accessed by swapping out the CompactFlash card by mounting the card as a drive on a PC connected on the G3 s USB port or by accessing them via Crimson s web server via the Ethernet port WEB SERVER This 1con 1s used to configure Crimson s web server and to create and edit web pages The web server is capable of providing remote access to the G3 via a number of mechanisms First you can use Crimson to create automatic web pages which contain lists of tags each formatted according to the tag s properties Second you can create a custom site using a third party HTML editor such as Microsoft FrontPage and then include special text to instruct Crimson to insert live tag values Finally you can enable
367. t user rights REVISION 12 PAGE 215 DATA VALUES CRIMSON USER MANUAL WRITING EXPRESSIONS You will recall from the earlier sections of this manual that many fields within Crimson are configured as what are called expression properties You will further recall that these fields are configured by means of a user interface element similar to that shown below Value General Tag In many situations you will be configuring these properties to be equal to the value of a tag or to the contents of a register in a remote communications device in which case your selection will be made simply by clicking the appropriate option on the drop down menu and then selecting the required item from the resulting dialog box There will be situations though when you want to make a property dependent on a more complex combination of data items perhaps using some math to combine or compare their values Such eventualities are handled via what are known as expressions which can be entered in the property s edit box whenever General mode 1s selected via the drop down DATA VALUES PAGE 216 All expressions contain at least one data value The simplest expressions are thus references to single constants single tags or single PLC registers If you enter either of the last two options Crimson will simplify the editing process by automatically changing the property mode as appropriate For example if you enter a tag name in General mode Crims
368. ta Tags window when editing one of the various kinds of integer tags REVISION 12 PAGE 73 EDITING INTEGER TAGS CRIMSON USER MANUAL THE DATA TAB VARIABLES The Data tab of an integer variable contains the following properties gar Untitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 f 3 hu m p E 5 ir uw a 2 5 v z 1 N E E a n z 5 D a To include this tag in a custom web page use 0 e The Mapping property is used to specify if the variable is to be mapped to a register in a remote device or if it exists only within the terminal If you press the arrow button and select a device name from the resulting menu you will be presented with a dialog box that will allow a PLC register to be selected e The Sign Mode property is used to override the default behavior of the comms driver when reading 16 bit values from a remote device The driver will normally make a decision about whether to treat these values as signed or unsigned based upon how the data is normally used within the device If you want to override this decision set this property as required e The Access property is as described for flag variables e The Storage property is as described for flag variables e The Simulation property is as described for flag variables e The Scaling and Transforms properties are used to modify the data value as it is read and written from the remote device When the
369. tags and different alarm numbers When the program is called Data is transferred in Argl int Alarm Argl gt gt 16 Local integer assigned with alarm number int Tag Argl OXxFFFF Local integer assigned with tag index number switch Tag Look a the tag index case 0 Tag index is 0 if Alarm Alarm number is 1 GotoPage Helpl break case 9 Tag index is 9 if Alarm Alarm number is 2 GotoPage Help2 break default Tag index not found GotoPage NoHelp In this sample if alarm of the tag with index 0 is selected in the alarm viewer and the operator presses the Help button the display will go to the page with name Helpl If alarm 2 of the tag with index 9 1s selected in the alarm viewer and the operator presses the Help button the display will go to the page with name Help2 In the event another alarm is selected and the Help button is pressed the display will go to the page with name NoHelp Note GotoPage functions can be replaced by ShowPopup functions to display a popup window instead of a page Note The index number of a tag can be found in the status bar in the Data Tags when a tag 1s selected THE ALARM TICKER PRIMITIVE The Alarm Ticker primitive scrolls through the active alarms in the system It takes up a single line and 1s typically placed at the bottom of the display perhaps on every page It does not allow the operator to acc
370. tangle around the primitives you want to select or select each primitive in turn holding down the Shift key to indicate that you want each primitive to be added to the selection If multiple primitives are selected the red rectangle will surround all of the primitives and the handles can then be used to resize the primitives as a group The relative size and position of the primitives will be maintained as long as Crimson can do so without violating minimum size requirements MOVING AND RESIZING Primitives can be moved by first selecting them and then by dragging them to the required position on the display page If Smart Align is turned on guidelines will appear to help you align the primitives with other items on the page Holding down Ctr1 while moving a primitive will leave a copy of the primitive in its original position thereby allowing duplicates to be created You can also use the cursor keys to nudge the current selection a single pixel in the required direction Holding down Ctr1 while nudging will increase the movement of the primitives by a factor of eight Primitives can be resized by selecting them and then by dragging the appropriate handle to the required position Once again if Smart Align is turned on guidelines will appear to help you align the primitives with other items on the page The Shift and Ctrl keys can be used to modify the resize behavior as described in the Adding Display Primitives section Note that Cri
371. te that care should be taken when logging changes made by programs as certain database may log unmanageable amounts of data in such circumstances DEFAULT ACCESS To speed the configuration process Crimson also provides the ability to specify default access and write logging parameters for mapped tags internal tags and display pages The differentiation between mapped and unmapped tags 1s important in systems where all changes http www redlion net g3 USING THE SECURITY SYSTEM SECURITY SETTINGS to external data must be recorded but where data internal to Crimson can be manipulated without the need for such an audit trail ON DEMAND LOGON Crimson s security system supports both conventional and on demand logon A conventional logon can occur when a user interface element such as a pushbutton is used to activate the Log On User action or to call the UserLogOn function On demand logon occurs if the operator attempts an action without sufficient access rights and if a failed logon attempt has not occurred within the same action For example a user may press a button that runs a program to reset a number of values As soon as the program attempts to change a value that requires security access the system will prompt for logon credentials This method reduces operator interaction and produces a more responsive system MAINTENANCE ACCESS The system also provides a facility called Maintenance Mode to allow the user inactivity timeo
372. the address book entry This is the name that will be used for the display name of the SMTP recipients and choosing an address book entry within Crimson e The Email Address property is used to define one or more recipients for this address book entry Multiple recipients should be separated by semicolons The format of each recipient will depend on the transport that is expected to deliver the message In the example above the address book entry refers to one SMTP recipient and one SMS recipient The address can be mapped to a string tag so it could be changed from the display WORKING WITH MODEMS PAGE 40 This section explains how to configure your G3 panel to work either with modems or with direct serial connections to computers running the Windows operating system Note that Crimson s modem support is fundamentally different from that provided by earlier Red Lion operator panels in that it is entirely based upon the Point To Point Protocol otherwise known http www redlion net g3 ADVANCED COMMUNICATIONS as PPP While protocols such a Modbus allow a single conversation to occur between any two devices PPP 1s more akin to an Ethernet connection in that 1t allows an unlimited number of logical connections to exist on a single physical link A single PPP connection can thus allow simultaneous access to the panel s TCP IP download facility its web server its shared serial ports and to any TCP IP protocols that have been selected
373. the server AUTH The connection 1s performing the authentication process to ensure that the appropriate user credentials are used NEG IPCP The connection is negotiating IPCP options This process decides on a set of network protocol settings that are acceptable to both the client and the server The connection is active and IP data can be exchanged HANGING UP The modem is disconnecting This state will exist for only a short time before the modem returns to IDLE The signal strength values returned by GSM modems have the following meaning rss oo sign seein anot be deemed Cell phones typically interpret these values as follows when displaying signal strength MODEM INITIALIZATION SEQUENCE The interface needs the following settings configured in the modem e Noecho e Verbal result codes e Normal carrier detect operation e DTR override PAGE 48 http www redlion net g3 ADVANCED COMMUNICATIONS WORKING WITH MODEMS e No Flow Control e Modem must ignore RTS e DSR override always on e Auto answer disabled e Escape character set to 43 decimal e 500 millisecond guard time for the escape code sequence The following sequence shows the init strings send to modems AT COMMAND STRING DESCRIPTION AT FEO amp F set factory defaults same as 8 FO EO disable echo ATHOQOV1 HO Hang Up QO Displays result codes V1 Verbal codes ATLIMIX3 L1 Low speaker volume M1 Speaker on until conn
374. then inform you as to the success or failure of the calibration Double clicking the primitive will access the format properties to define colors and line format Actions can also be inserted upon success or failure of the test REVISION 12 PAGE 175 DEFINING PAGE PROPERTIES DEFINING PAGE PROPERTIES CRIMSON USER MANUAL Each page has a number of properties that can be accessed via the Page menu PAGE 176 EXT x General Entry Order Rows Then Columns lt Popup Location center y Update Rate standard Y Background E Black Links Parent Page none Period O secs Next Page none tsi Y On Timeout Mone Actions On Select None On Remove Mone On Tick None On Update None Page Timeout Previous Page None bd The Entry Order property is used to define how the cursor on the operator panel will move between data entry fields The setting determines whether fields organized in a grid will be entered in row or column order The Popup Location property is used to define the location of popup windows or the popup keypad when this display page is visible You may wish to adjust this property to keep the popups away from important data items The Update Rate property is used to define how frequently items on the display are updated As update rates increase in frequency overall communications performance of the operator interface panel may decrease This selection should be left at
375. ther or not tag values from visible traces should be displayed at the bottom of the viewer The value will be the latest sample value in live mode or the value at the crossing point of the trace and the cursor when the cursor is used e The Label Font property is used to define the font used to draw the various labels that adorn the primitive The default font will typically be too large for applications where the primitive does not take up the entire screen e The Fill Format properties define the background of the primitive Please make sure that the background color 1s not identical to a pen color otherwise the trace will not appear The time page is used to specify the time and date format that will be used to indicate the extremities of the displayed data PAGE 160 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING A COLOR USER INTERFACE PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS The gridline page defines the horizontal and vertical divisions to be shown on the trend viewer cor Trend Yiewer Properties Ea Froperties Time Gridlines Pens Cursor Major Data Gridlines Divisions Line Color Y Fixed E Silver Y Pick Minor Data Gridlines Divisions 1 Line Color Fixed mu Black Pick Time Gridlines Show Divisions No r Set 4s Defaults e The Major Data Gridlines property is used to indicate into how many major divisions the vertical axis of the viewer should be divided A thick line will be drawn across th
376. ther the operator interface or Windows FUNCTION TYPE 3 Formatting The G3 is formatting the card This state occurs when a format operation is requested by the programming PC This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE d CompactFlashStatus REVISION 12 PAGE 259 CONTROLDEVICE DEVICE ENABLE CRIMSON USER MANUAL CONTROLDEVICE DEVICE ENABLE device ne Device to be enabled or disabled int Determines if device is enabled or disabled DESCRIPTION Allows the database to disable or enable a specified communications device The number to be placed in the device argument to identify the device can be viewed in the status bar of the Communications category when the device name is highlighted FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE ControlDevice 1 true PAGE 260 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE COPY DEST SRC COUNT CoPY DEST SRC COUNT int float The first array element to be copied to src int float The first array element to be copied from int The number of elements to be processed DESCRIPTION Copies count array elements from sre onwards to dest onwards FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE Copy Save 0 Work 0 100 REVISION 12 PAGE 261 COS THETA CRIMSON USER MANUAL COS THETA ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION
377. tion of overly complex databases e While Edict would typically manage something between two and five display updates per second Crimson is designed to redraw the display every 100msec thus providing for example smoother operator feedback during data entry http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING A COLOR USER INTERFACE CONTROLLING THE VIEW CONFIGURING A COLOR USER INTERFACE Now that you have configured your communications options and created data tags for the various items that you wish to display you can create display pages to allow the user to view or edit these data items These pages are manipulated by selecting the User Interface icon from the main screen Please note that this chapter refers specifically to color operator panels such as the G306 If you are using a G303 operator panel with a monochrome display please refer to the previous chapter for configuration details CONTROLLING THE VIEW By default the User Interface window attempts to show the entire front panel of the operator panel including the display and all the available keys In many cases this will not allocate enough screen space for the display to be edited so you will probably want to use one of the other zoom levels as shown below Sample Library 1 G310 Crimson 2 0 File Edit View Key Page Link Help D BRx m 34 09 15 mple Library 1 G310 Crimson 2 0 jew Insert Arrange Transform Page Link Help Edit Yi eE 7 be x a t
378. tioned above the properties for the other types of primitive are similarly identical to those of the corresponding tag You are thus referred to the earlier section of the manual regarding Data Tags for more information on each property EDITING THE UNDERLYING TAG If you want to edit a tag text primitive s properties either double click on the primitive or right click and select the Properties command from the resulting menu If however you want to edit the properties of the tag that 1s being used to control the primitive right click and select the Tag Details command instead The resulting dialog box will show the Data and Format tab from the Data Tags window and allow you to change the various properties Note that a change made via this mechanism will change all the primitives controlled by that tag if those primitives have the Get Label or Get Format properties set to From Tag Properties http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING THE G303 USER INTERFACE PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS THE TIME AND DATE PRIMITIVE The Time and Date primitive is used to display the current time and date or to display the contents of a time and date expression It can also be used to edit such an expression or to set the operator panel s real time clock The properties of a time and date primitive are displayed using two tabbed pages The first page 1s shown below cor Time and Date Properties x Froperties Format Data Source Value
379. tive will leave a copy of the primitive in its original position thereby allowing duplicates to be created You can also use the cursor keys to nudge the current selection a single pixel in the required direction Holding down Ctr1 while nudging will increase the movement of the primitives by a factor of eight Primitives can be resized by selecting them and then by dragging the appropriate handle to the required position Once again if Smart Align is turned on guidelines will appear to help you align the primitives with other items on the page The Shift and Ctrl keys can be used to modify the resize behavior as described in the Adding Display Primitives section Note that Crimson will always constrain resizing operations so as to ensure that primitives stay on the screen and to make sure that items do not exceed their maximum permitted size or shrink below the minimum size appropriate to their format http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING A COLOR USER INTERFACE ALIGNING PRIMITIVES ALIGNING PRIMITIVES While the Smart Alignment options discussed above allow many alignment operations to be performed by hand there are times that you will want the software to perform the alignment for you This can be done by selecting a number of primitives starting with the primitive that you wish to use as the reference point for the alignment operation Note that the reference primitive is always shown with a double square at its center Once you hav
380. to enter a numeric value or to select an PAGE 64 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING DATA TAGS EDITING PROPERTIES item from a drop down list Certain types of property though provide more complex editing options and these are described below EXPRESSION PROPERTIES Expression properties are capable of being set to e A constant value e The contents of a data tag e The contents of a register in a remote communications device e A combination of such items linked together using various math operators In its default state the arrowed button immediately after the label of the property shows that the field is in General mode and the edit box to the right of the button shows a grayed out string that indicates the default behavior of the property Value If you are familiar with Crimson s expression syntax a complete description of which can be found in the Writing Expressions section you can edit the property by typing an expression directly into the edit box Most users though will choose to press the arrowed button and select from the menu of options that is presented e Selecting Tag will display a dialog box containing a list of data tags You can select the tag that you want to be used to control this property In some cases you will also be given the chance to create a new tag and define its basic properties This is not available when editing properties that belong directly to other data tags as it is otherw
381. to read a character from the port indicated by port The port must be configured to use a raw driver such as the raw serial port driver or either of the raw TCP IP drivers If no data is available within the indicated time period a value of 1 will be returned Setting period to zero will result in any queued data being returned but will prevent Crimson from waiting for data to arrive if none is available FUNCTION TYPE This function is active RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE Data PortRead 1 100 REVISION 12 PAGE 351 PORTSETRTS PORT STATE CRIMSON USER MANUAL PORTSETRTS POR7 STATE PAGE 352 IOL The raw port to control int The state of the RTS true 1 or false 0 DESCRIPTION Sets the RTS of the port indicated by port with the setting in state The port must be configured to use a raw driver and be on of the serial ports The state argument can take values 0 or 1 only Note The communication port number can be identified in Crimson s status bar when the port 1s selected FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE PortSetRTS 2 1 In this example the function sets the RTS of the RS232 communication port to true http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE PORTWRITE PORT DATA PORTWRITE POR7 DATA int The raw port to be written to ne The byte to be transmitted DESCRIPTION Transmits the byte indicated by data on the p
382. to use the appropriate Input Method Editor for the currently selected default language Note that only the default language text can be edited directly Other versions of the text must be edited via the properties dialog box which is accessed by selecting the primitive and pressing Alt Enter or by selecting the Properties command from the Edit menu PAGE 136 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING A COLOR USER INTERFACE PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS cer Static Text Properties xX Translate Font Swiss 12x16 Pick Leading 2 pixels Text Type Jopaque F Foreground Fixed white Fick Background Fixed CEA Fick Justification Horizontal center Y vertical mide y Set 45 Defaults e The Text property is used to specify the text to be displayed As mentioned above the default language version of the text can also be edited directly on the display page when the primitive is created or by clicking an existing primitive e The Font property is used to specify the font to be used The font list comprises the eight resident fonts found in all terminals plus any custom fonts already created in this database The Pick button can be used to invoke the font selection dialog allowing any font that is installed on your system to be rendered in a form that can be used by the target device Note that it is your responsibility to ensure that your license in respect of the font allows this kind
383. turn to the previous page shown on the terminal s display FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE GotoPrevious PAGE 320 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE HASACCESS RIGHTS HASACCESS RIGHTS ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION int The required access rights DESCRIPTION Returns a value of true or false depending on whether the current user has access rights defined by the rights parameter This parameter comprises a bit mask representing the various user defined rights with bit 0 ie the bit with a value of 0x01 representing User Right 1 bit 1 ie the bit with a value of 0x02 representing User Right 2 and so on The function is typically used in programs that perform a number of actions that might be subject to security and that might otherwise not occur FUNCTION TYPE This function is passive RETURN TYPE int EXAMPLE if HasAccess 1 Datal 0 Data2 0 Data3 0 REVISION 12 PAGE 321 HIDEPOPUP CRIMSON USER MANUAL HIDEPOPUP ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION Hides the popup that was previously shown using ShowPopup FUNCTION TYPE This function 1s active RETURN TYPE This function does not return a value EXAMPLE HidePopup PAGE 322 http www redlion net g3 FUNCTION REFERENCE INTTOTEXT DATA RADIX COUNT INTTOTEXT DA7A RADIX COUNT ARGUMENT TYPE DESCRIPTION data i
384. ty is used to indicate whether the month should be displayed as digits ie 01 through 12 or as its short name ie Jan though Dec e The Show Year property is used to indicate whether the date field should include the year and if so how many digits should be shown for that element THE RICH BAR GRAPH PRIMITIVES The Rich Vertical Bar primitive allows you to display a more complex bar graph which includes a label a numeric version of the data being displayed and tick markers to indicate any associated setpoint PAGE 104 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING THE G303 USER INTERFACE PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS The Rich Horizontal Bar primitive allows you to display a more complex bar graph which includes a label a numeric version of the data being displayed and tick markers to indicate any associated setpoint The operation of these rich primitives is analogous to that of the various tag text primitives in that they are capable of deriving much of the required formatting information from the tag used as their controlling value Just as with tag text primitives two tabbed pages are used to edit the primitives properties The first of these pages 1s shown below REVISION 12 der Rich Yertical Bar Graph Properties xj Froperties Format Data Source value Show Label Show value Show Setpoint Get Label From Tag Properties Get Format From Tag Properties Graph Format File Black Font miss fx
385. uadrant of an ellipse In addition to the outline and fill properties the ellipse quadrant has a property to indicate which quadrant it should occupy The Ellipse Half primitive is one half of an ellipse In addition to the outline and fill properties the ellipse half has a property to indicate which of the four possible halves think about it will be drawn The properties for these primitives need little further explanation other than to point out that the quadrant or half rendered by the Wedge Ellipse Quadrant or Ellipse Half primitives can also be edited via the command found on the Transform menu THE TANK PRIMITIVES The Conical Tank primitive is a conical tank with a defined outline and fill pattern When the primitive is selected additional handles appear allowing the exact shape of the tank to be modified by dragging the handles as required The Round Bottomed Tank primitive is a tank with a defined outline and fill pattern When the primitive 1s selected an additional handle appears allowing the exact shape of the tank to be modified by dragging the handle as required The properties for these primitives need little further explanation THE SIMPLE BAR GRAPH PRIMITIVES REVISION 12 The Simple Vertical Bar primitive allows an expression to be drawn as a vertical bar graph between specified minimum and maximum values An additional property allows the primitive s border to be displayed or hidden The Simple
386. ue to operate Before accepting the message you may wish to write down the code You may then email it to Red Lion technical support so that one of our technical gurus can meditate on this information in order to track down the cause of the problem You may also want to email a copy of the terminal s database and describe what you were doing when the terminal crashed http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING COMMUNICATIONS SERIAL PORT USAGE CONFIGURING COMMUNICATIONS The first stage of creating a Crimson database is to configure the communications ports of the G3 panel to indicate which protocols you want to use and which remote devices you want to access These operations are performed from the Communications window which 1s opened by selecting the first icon of the Crimson main screen Driver Selection Driver No Driver Selected Edit Port Settings Baud Rate 19200 As can be seen the Communications window lists the unit s available ports in the form of a tree structure G3 panels have three primary serial ports with the option to add a further two ports in the form of an expansion card They also provide a single Ethernet port that is capable of running four communications protocols simultaneously SERIAL PORT USAGE When deciding which of the G3 s serial ports to use for communications note that e The G303 multiplexes a single serial communications controller between its RS 232 and RS 485 c
387. unication port is selected the right hand pane displays the communication driver properties for this port e g the parity baud rate G3 address if required etc You should verify that the driver properties make sense for your application When the device here PLCI is selected the right hand pane displays the communication settings for this specific target device e g the device type address etc http www redlion net g3 QUICK START MAPPING DATA You can add an additional device by selecting the communication port and clicking on the Add Additional Device button as shown below A new device called PLC2 will be created Select that device to change its settings orUntitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 File Edit view Link Help D SHl tnax Communications 63 m Driver Selection Programming Port RS 232 Comms Port DF1 Master Driver Allen Bradley DF1 Master Edit E PLCI E PLC2 m Driver Settings dai s Source Address a Y Protocol 1 Frame Validation ere y Y Protocol 2 Y Protocol 3 W Protocol 4 pasted By Services BaudRate 9600 y E Mail Manager iy OPC Server Data Bits Eight y pS FTP Server Pe Time Manager ay Sync Manager BA Sy 9 Parity None m Port Sharing Share Port no y TCP Port 0 Clear Port Settings Restore Driver Defaults Stop Bits One bed over caps num M
388. upport microsoft com kb 262680 Note that since Crimson uses an IP address and not a host name to reference the SNTP server it will lose connection with any server that is relocated to a new network address While such relocations are very rare they are beyond your control and that of Red Lion The use of an enterprise time source which accesses its own source via DNS is thus considered preferable TIME ZONE CONFIGURATION As mentioned above the G3 operator interface must have knowledge of the current time zone if it is to use advanced time management This information can be given to the G3 in two ways The simplest method is to use Send Time command on the Link menu of the Crimson configuration software In addition to setting the G3 s clock this command also sends the PC s current time zone and the status of Daylight Savings Time The G3 will store this data in non volatile memory and use it from that point forward Obviously you should be sure that the PC contains valid time and date information before sending it to the unit e The alternative method is to use the system variables TimeZone and UseDST The former holds the number of hours by which the local time zone differs from UTC and may be either negative or positive For example a setting of 5 corresponds to Eastern Standard Time in the United States The latter contains either 0 or 1 depending on whether Daylight Savings Time is active Editing either of these variables via th
389. use multiple logs if you wish to sample different data at different rates USING THE LOG LIST PAGE 194 To rename or delete data logs click on the left hand pane of the Data Logger window The commands on the Log menu can then be used to make the desired changes Alternatively you may right click on the required data log and select from the menu Note that the name of a data log must be eight characters or less in length This is because the name will be used to define the directory under which the log files are stored and the G3 panel is not able to handle names that do not conform to FAT style 8 3 naming To select a data log either click on the name in the list or use the up and down arrows in the toolbar Alternatively you can use the Alt Left and Alt Right key combinations to move up and down the list as required These keys will work no matter which pane is selected http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING DATA LOGGING DATA LOG PROPERTIES DATA LOG PROPERTIES Each data log has the following properties e The Update Type property defines if this data log will record data continuously or on a trigger edge Continuous Sample data logging saves tags values at regular time intervals as define by the Update Rate property Triggered Snapshot saves tags values when the expression in the Log Trigger property goes from false to true Since the log trigger is looking at the change in the expression only on
390. used to define the color of the rest of the primitive e The Line Format property is used to define the color of the various lines that are used to draw the primitive These include the circle around the selector and the four lines that define the rectangle within the primitive The fourth page defines a number of properties specific to data entry These are as defined for the tag text primitives and you should refer to that section for details The fourth page defines the label and format to be used for the primitive and is as defined for flag tags or multi state tags depending on which type of selector is being configured You are once again referred to the chapter of Tags for information on the various formatting options THE PICTURE PRIMITIVE The Picture primitive is used to display one of a number of images based upon a an optional data value The images may be manipulated in various ways and may be moved within the primitive according to internal or external data values The primitive provides exhaustive facilities for displaying bitmaps JPEG picture or metafiles images from Crimson s extensive image library or from third party clipart providers Five separate tabbed pages control the various options REVISION 12 PAGE 167 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL The first tab 1s used to select the images to be displayed cor Image Properties x Images additional Movement Format Action Control
391. used to link together a series of pages to allow the operator to edit the fields in sequence Crimson will automatically position the cursor appropriately such that if the Prev key is pressed on the first field of a page the previous page will be activated with the cursor on the last field of that page e The Entry Order property is used to define how the cursor on the operator panel will move between data entry fields The settings determine whether fields organized in a grid will be entered in row or column order REVISION 12 PAGE 107 DEFINING SYSTEM ACTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL e The Update Rate property is used to define how frequently items on the display are updated As update rates increase in frequency overall performance of the operator interface panel may decrease This selection should be left at the default setting when possible DEFINING SYSTEM CTIONS In addition to the various actions that can be defined via page properties Crimson gives you the ability to define an action to be run when the system first starts and an action to be run once a second no matter which page is displayed These actions can be accessed by selecting the Pages icon in the left hand pane of the User Interface window DEFINING KEY BEHAVIOR PAGE 108 The previous sections have provided a detailed description of how to use the G3 s display to get information to the operator All that remains to complete the User Interface configuration is to
392. ut to be overridden during system commissioning This mode is activated if a display page is marked as being accessible with the Maintenance Access right and if the current user has gained access to the page as a result of that right Use of this mode avoids the need to logon repeatedly when testing the system SECURITY SETTINGS The security system settings are accessed via the Security Manager icon orUntitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 Mapped Tags Unauthenticated Users and Programs Edit Internal Tags Unauthenticated Users and Programs Edit Display Pages Unauthenticated Users Edit m Default Logging Mapped Tags Do Not Log Changes Edit Internal Tags Do Not Log Changes Edit m Logging Control Enable Logging no New File Every 60 mins Retain At Most 24 files Include in Batch no z Create U The available properties are as follows e The Inactivity Timeout property is used to indicate how much time must pass without user input before the current user is automatically logged off Too high a value for this setting will produce an insecure system while too low a value will produce a system that is awkward for operators e The Clear Logon Name property is used to indicate whether or not the username should be cleared before asking the operator to logon If this setting is disabled the previous username will be displayed and only the passw
393. utside the program and they do not retain their values between function invocations If a function is called recursively each invocation has its own variables Loop CONSTRUCTS The three different loop constructs can be used to perform a given section of code while a certain condition is true The while loop tests its condition before the code is executed while REVISION 12 PAGE 189 PROGRAMMING TIPS CRIMSON USER MANUAL PAGE 190 the do loop tests the condition afterwards The for loop is a quicker way of defining a while loop allowing you to combine three common elements into one statement You should note that some care 1s required when using loops within your programs as you may make a programming error which results in a loop that never terminates Depending on the situation in which the program is invoked this may seriously disrupt the terminal s user interface activity or 1ts communications Loops which iterate too many times may also cause performance issues for the subsystem that invokes them THE WHILE LOOP This type of loop repeats the action that follows it while the condition in the while statement remains true If the condition is never true the action will never be executed and the loop will perform no operation beyond evaluating the controlling condition If you want more than one action to be included in the loop be sure to surround the multiple statements in curly brackets as with the if statement The example b
394. value property to Level You can then set additional alarms on this alias tag Not present on G303 and other monochrome devices PAGE 88 http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING DATA TAGS VALIDATING TAGS VALIDATING TAGS Selecting the Tags icon in the left hand pane of the Tags window will allow access to the Validate All Tags button Pressing this button will recompile all expressions in your database fixing any broken communications references and updating tag reference counts You should not need to push this button unless you have removed and then replaced tags and wish to repair the expression that will have been broken when the tags were deleted EXPORTING TAG MAPPINGS Selecting the Tags icon in the left hand pane of the Tags window will also allow access to the tag import and export facilities The Export to File button can be used to export the tag names and mappings to a CSV file for subsequent editing in Microsoft Excel or some other suitable tool The Import from File button can then be used to re import the file changing the tag mappings in line with the changes made to the file These facilities are useful when porting an application from one PLC to another as 1t allows all the mappings to be changed in a single operation The import facility can also be used to create tags to correspond to data mappings that have been exported into a CSV file from a Red Lion Modular Controller LOGGING EVENT MESSAGES When the Tags icon is
395. ver menu When the site is selected a file called DEFAULT HTM within the WEB directory will be displayed Beyond that point navigation is according to the links within the site COMPACTFLASH ACCESS PAGE 204 Note that in order to serve custom web pages or to provide access to the panel s data logger the web server needs to be able to access the unit s CompactFlash card If you have mounted the card as a drive on your PC and performed write operations you may have to wait a minute or so for the PC to unlock the card and allow the terminal to get access If you http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING THE WEB SERVER ACCESSING THE WEB SERVER are using an operating system earlier than Windows 2000 to perform such an operation you may find that your PC locks the card when the drive is first mounted whether or not a write 1s performed Again this lock will be released within a minute or so ACCESSING THE WEB SERVER The web server can be accessed by multiple means depending on your application USING ETHERNET The principal and easiest way to access the web server 1s via Ethernet If your G3 1s connected to the Local Area Network LAN and has a valid IP address start your Web Browser and type the G3 Ethernet IP address to connect to the G3 web server The browser will then display the menu page or require login if authentication is activated In case the TCP port defined in the Web Server module 1s different from 80 the IP add
396. via the Communications window SOME TYPICAL APPLICATIONS The sections below list some typical applications of modem technology You want an operator panel in a remote location to send an email to a service engineer to inform him of a fault condition By configuring an on demand connection to an Internet Service Provider the panel is instructed to automatically connect when an email is to be sent and then to hang up when the message has been transferred You want an operator panel in a remote location to send messages directly to the cell phones of a group of service engineers to inform them of a fault condition By configuring a GSM modem with SMS support the panel is instructed to notify the engineers of the fault by means of short text messages Further when a given engineer replies to the message to indicate that he will deal with the problem the G3 can optionally forward the reply to all the other engineers letting them know that someone has taken ownership of the issue An operator panel in a remote location is configured to accept incoming connections from a PC based at a central office Once the connection is made the panel s database can be remotely upgraded by instructing the Crimson configuration to download via the TCP IP link If so configured the panel s web server can be accessed so as to provide remote control facilities Best of all by installing virtual serial port software on the PC and by enabling port sharing on
397. w Link Help Deal stax Pr Communications 63 Available Mappings Programming Port RS 232 Comms Port Modbus RTU Slave PLCI Block 1 X shel X 400002 X 400003 X 400004 X 400005 R5 485 Comms Port 4 Ethernet Y Protocol 1 Y Protocol 2 Y Protocol 3 Y Protocol 4 E By Services amp Mail Manager Hi OPC Server E FTP Server GE Time Manager ish Sync Manager To map items from the right hand pane to the items on the left simply double click them one at a time The cursor will automatically move to the next consecutive register allowing you to quickly map all of the items Instead of clicking the data in the right hand pane you may also drag and drop the data onto specific registers PAGE 12 http www redlion net g3 QUICK START COMMUNICATIONS G3 AS A SLAVE or Untitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 File Edit View Link Help Dealv7i nex m s 3 63 Programming Port RS 232 Comms Port Modbus RTU Slave PLCI Block 1 X 400001 Var1 X 400002 Var2 X 400003 X 400004 X 400005 RS 485 Comms Port 4 Ethernet Y Protocol 1 Y Protocol 2 Y Protocol 3 W Protocol 4 Services E Mail Manager OPC Server pS FTP Server FA Time Manager n Sync Manager over cars num In the example above tags Varl and Var2 have been ma
398. ween 0 and 31 The result of the operator is equal to 0 or 1 depending on the value of the bit in question REVISION 12 PAGE 219 MULTIPLE CONDITIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL OPERATOR PRIORITY EXAMPLE The example shown tests bit 2 1e the bit with a value of 4 within the indicated tag If you want to test for a bit being equal to zero you can use the logical NOT operator OPERATOR PRIORITY EXAMPLE This example is equal to 1 if bit 2 of the indicated tag 1s equal to 0 and vice versa MULTIPLE CONDITIONS If you want to define an expression that is true if a number of conditions are all true you can use the logical AND operator Similarly if you want to define an expression that is true if any of a number of conditions are true you can use the logical OR operator The examples below show each operator in use OPERATOR PRIORITY EXAMPLE Logical OR Group 12 A gt 10 B gt 10 The logical AND operator produces a value of 1 if and only if the expressions on the left hand and right hand sides are true while the logical OR operator produces a value of 1 if either expression is true Note that unlike the bitwise operators referred to elsewhere in this section the logical operators stop evaluating once they know what the answer will be This means that in the above example for logical AND the right hand side of the operator will only be evaluated if A is greater than 10 as if this were not true the result of th
399. which actions are defined F1 If the key is displayed in PURPLE a local action is defined for this PAGE F1 If the key is displayed in GREEN a GLOBAL action is defined F1 If the key is displayed in BLUE local and global actions are BOTH defined Once you have defined an action you can right click on the key and use the resulting menu to select either Make Global or Make Local to change the action type These options will not be available if both types of action have already been defined BLOCKING DEFAULT ACTIONS When defining key actions you may use the Block Default Action selection as a place holder to prevent further processing As an example suppose you have configured F1 to perform a global action but want to prevent this action from being invoked on a particular page By configuring F1 on that page as Block Default Action the global action will not occur REVISION 12 PAGE 181 DATA AVAILABILITY CRIMSON USER MANUAL DATA AVAILABILITY Crimson s communications infrastructure reads only those data items that are required for the current page This means that when a page is first selected certain data items may not be available For a display primitive this is no problem as the primitive simply displays an undefined state typically a number of dashes until the data becomes available For actions though things can get more complex For example suppose a local action increases the speed of a motor by 50 rpm If the m
400. would use an entire page for its alarm viewer for example the corresponding system primitive can be used to allocate as little or as much of the display as is required e The actions defined by double clicking a key replace the global and local event maps If your application used more than one row per event you will most likely need to use a program to implement the required logic e Events such as comms update complete and one second tick have been removed as most of the actions performed by such events can now be handled via other mechanisms For example comms update complete was often used to move data between devices This can now be performed using the protocol conversion functionality of the Communications window In addition these events were often misused and led to the creation of overly complex databases e While Edict would typically manage something between two and five display updates per second Crimson is designed to redraw the display every 100msec thus providing for example smoother operator feedback during data entry http www redlion net g3 CONFIGURING PROGRAMS USING THE PROGRAM LIST CONFIGURING PROGRAMS The previous sections of this manual describe how you can use actions to perform all manner of operations in response to key presses or changes in data tags If you need to perform an action that is too complex to fit on a single line or that demands more complex decision making logic you can use the Program
401. y In each case you may manually enter the data in the appropriate properties or assuming a suitable expression has been defined you may instruct the primitive to get the required information from the underlying data tag The second page contains additional formatting information for the field der Rich Yertical Bar Graph Properties x Properties Additional Format Text Format Font Swiss 12x16 Foreground Fixed E white Pick Background Fixed O Gray Pick Fill Style Solid Color Fill Color 1 Fixed C Red Pick Fill Color 2 Fixed C Gray Pick Line Format Line Color gt Fixed E White Pick Cancel Set s Defaults REVISION 12 PAGE 145 PRIMITIVE DESCRIPTIONS CRIMSON USER MANUAL e The Text Format properties are used to define the font and the colors to be used to draw the value and the field label assuming these elements are enabled e The Fill Format properties are used to define the fill color for the primitive The filled areas of the bars are drawn in the pattern and colors indicated while the unfilled areas are drawn with solid Fill Color 2 e The Line Format properties are used to define the style of the primitive s outline The third page contains the label and formatting information for the field der Rich Yertical Bar Graph Properties x Properties Additional Format Data Label Label Text EFE Translate Data L
402. y available when the scale is fixed e The Minor Divisions property 1s used to indicate into how many minor divisions each major division should be divided Smaller tick marks are drawn at each division Selecting a value of one for this property will disable minor divisions e The minimum and maximum are tags or expressions the scale will follow to define the number of major division required The Counts per Major Division is the number of unit between each major division For example if the counts is 10 the maximum 100 and the minimum 20 The full scale is 80 100 20 therefore there will be 8 major divisions e The Show Item property defines if the primitive should be displayed or not depending of the expression The Color page defines the fill pattern and line style of the scale THE FIXED TEXT PRIMITIVE The Fixed Text primitive is used to add unchanging text to a page The text 1s displayed in a specified font and color and with a specified justification The text can also be translated for international applications When the text is created a cursor will appear allowing the text to be entered 2 gt Untitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 Ioj x File Edit View Insert Arrange Transform Page Link Help Deelrineaxi al o lm Ee Elsie ls Pr This is text The text editor supports cutting pasting and all the other options normally found within a Windows editor The editor will also configure the keyboard
403. y such that if the Prev key is pressed on the first field of a page the previous page will be activated with the cursor on the last field of that page DEFINING SYSTEM ACTIONS In addition to the various actions that can be defined via page properties Crimson gives you the ability to define an action s to be run before the system starts when the system first starts and an action s to be run once a second or on page updates no matter which page is displayed These actions can be accessed by selecting the Pages icon in the left hand pane of the User Interface window You should refer to previous warnings regarding the use of the On Update property ADDITIONAL SYSTEM PROPERTIES In addition to the system actions described above there are two property pages accessed by selecting the Pages icon that gives you access to a number of other system wide parameters The Basic tab covers the following parameters REVISION 12 PAGE 177 ADDITIONAL SYSTEM PROPERTIES SPUntitled File G310 Crimson 2 0 File Edit View Key Page Link Help Oeal 4 soe xX al t 9 2 um 2 Lo CRIMSON USER MANUAL 3 Global Actions On Load On Tick None On Update None m Miscellaneous Backlight Off After o secs Activate Beeper fon Touch and Keys y One Touch Data Entry no y Keypad Next Prev Keys enabled gt m Translation Select Languages OVER cars Num The Backlight Off After
404. y field the nearer to the top the alarm will be displayed e The Email property is used to specify the email address book entry to which a message should be sent when this alarm is activated Refer to the Advanced Communications chapter for information on configuring email e The Siren property is used to indicate whether or not the activation of this alarm should also activate the G3 panel s internal sounder While the sounder is active the panel s display will also flash to better draw attention to the alarm condition THE TRIGGERS TAB The Triggers tab of a flag variable or formula contains the following properties 3PUntitled File Crimson 2 0 Ioj x Oe el rinmxie t 3 4 Pr Trigger One Trigger Mode MAXON Delay 1000 ms Action fcct poooy t Trigger Two Trigger Mode active off y Delay 1000 ms PLC1 D0100 0 Action Triggers Alarms Format Data e The Trigger Mode property is as described for the Alarms tab e The Delay property is as described for the Alarms tab e The Action property is used to indicate what action should be performed when the trigger 1s activated Refer to the Writing Actions section for a description of the syntax used to define the various actions that Crimson supports EDITING INTEGER TAGS You will recall that integer tags represent a 32 bit signed value The following sections describe the various tabs that are displayed on the right hand side of the Da
405. y is used to select the required font for the navigation buttons of the primitive e The Root Directory defines the root folder on the CompactFlash card where files to be open reside The viewer can only open files present under the indicated folder and cannot navigate to other folders The picture below shows functionalities available on the file viewer once downloaded in an operator interface Here the viewer is displaying the content of a CSV file available from the CompactFlash Card The file is accessed when the page with the primitive 1s displayed The Rescan button provides a way to reload the file content so the user has access to the latest data The Prev and Next button are used to navigate from one file to another They are available only if more than one file is present in the folder File number in the folder Name of the file displayed Total number of files in the folder EII Y of 1 late lime Yard Yar Gard Yard Yar 0002 2006 08 01 162278237 D7 51 52 of 57 0003 2006 08 01 16 28 38 18 11 T5 23 nf 0006 2006 08 01 162278239 14 bf E 0 a 0005 2006 08 01 162278240 10 4 At A 5 1 0006 2006 08 01 16 28 41 af 25 13 of 0007 2006 08 01 162278242 4 18 63 15 62 D008 AAA A EA oT 33 51 4 60 0009 2006 08 01 162278244 t 5 12 13 31 0010 2006 08 01 16 28 45 Ph 5 65 65 5 0011 2006708701 16 28 6 Di a3 20 oT 40 0012 2006 08 01 162278247 5 fo T 20 FE 0013 2006 08 01
406. y selecting the Web Server icon from the main screen WEB SERVER PROPERTIES The web server has the following properties Under the Main tab orUntitled File G306 Crimson 2 0 UNREGISTERED COPY oj xj File Edit View Page Link Help OS EY nax gt o mls gt gt s Create Web Page e The Server State property is used to enable or disable the web server If the server 1s enabled the panel will monitor port 80 for incoming requests and will fulfill the requests as required If the server 1s disabled connections to this port will be refused Remember that in order for the server to operate the panel s Ethernet port must have been enabled via the Communications window e The Listen on Port property indicates the TCP port number the web server will listen on Port 80 1s the standard http port for web browsing and will most likely suit your application e The Title property is used to provide the title to be shown on the web server menu This title can be used to differentiate between several terminals on a network thereby ensuring that the correct terminal is being accessed e The Data Log Access property is used to enable or disable web access to the files created by the Data Logger Obviously this facility must be enabled if the WebSync utility is to be used to copy the log files to a PC e The Remote Viewing property is used to enable or disable a facility by which a web browser c
407. ystem and expand the USB icon to show the icon for the G3 Panel device Ensure that this icon does not display a warning symbol If 1t does remove the device unplug and reconnect the G3 panel and verify that you have correctly followed the driver installation procedure The illustrations below show typical Device Manager views with the CompactFlash dismounted and mounted respectively REVISION 12 PAGE 17 DOWNLOADING TO A TERMINAL CRIMSON USER MANUAL PAGE 18 ipl x Action view gt alm E e aag BULLGOOSE E m Computer H E Disk drives m Display adapters E DVD CD ROM drives 4 Floppy disk controllers H E Floppy disk drives IDE ATA ATAPI controllers 488 Keyboards E A Mice and other pointing devices H Monitors Network adapters HY Ports COM 8 LPT E 2 SCSI and RAID controllers ement Action View les am e A az Tree Tree E BULLGOOSE E a Computer H E Disk drives 4 Display adapters 454 DVD CD ROM drives 4 3 Floppy disk controllers H Floppy disk drives H IDE ATA ATAPI controllers H Keyboards E 2 Mice and other pointing devices H monitors 1 89 Network adapters fF Ports COM amp LPT E pa SCSI and RAID controllers Computer Management Local E re System Tools 6 Event Viewer Y System Information gi Performance Logs and Alerts J Shared Folders Device Manager Computer Management Local E E System

Crimson User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents